JP2020114412A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes first notification means, second notification means, predetermined display means on which game medium information is displayed which is one of information corresponding to the number of game medium given to a player on the basis of a winning result and information corresponding to the number of game medium which the player can use, setting means which sets a set value corresponding to an advantageous degree of a player in a settable circumstance, and means which makes a display corresponding to the set value be carried out in the first notification means. When both of a first notification in the first notification means and a second notification in the second notification means are carried out, the first notification is ended in the first notification means at a timing when or after a timing when the second notification is ended in the second notification means. The first notification means is located in a position adjacent to the predetermined display means. A display range of the first notification means is constituted smaller than that of the second notification means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art As a kind of gaming machine, a slot machine, a gaming machine or the like capable of playing a game similar to a slot machine by using a game ball instead of a medal as a game medium are known. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is a general configuration that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery processing of the winning combination. Further, when the lottery processing of the winning combination is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In the gaming machine in which the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop operation on the stop button as described above, it is notified that the reel stop mode is the predetermined mode, and the reel stop operation is performed according to the notification A configuration is known in which the corresponding control is executed. For example, a configuration is known in which the reel stop order is notified, and a predetermined prize is established by stopping the reels in an order according to the notified stop order, and a medal corresponding to the predetermined prize is paid out. There is. Further, the reel stop order is notified, and by stopping the reels in the order according to the notified stop order, a predetermined prize is established, and a transition of the game state corresponding to the predetermined prize occurs. Are known. Such notification of the stop mode is performed by other control means that has received the information from the control means that executes the lottery process of the winning combination, and executes the notification control.

JP, 2014-045989, A

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, the control for executing the notification of the stop mode needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing control for executing notification of a stop mode.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern,
Start operation means that is operated to start variable display of patterns on the pattern display means,
A winning combination lottery means for executing a winning combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means,
Stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means,
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Means and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The correspondence executing means wins a predetermined correspondence combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern has become the predetermined mode, executes the predetermined correspondence execution. Equipped with means,
This gaming machine is
First control means having the role lottery means,
A first notification means controlled by the first control means,
Second control means for controlling the second notification means so that the notification display is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Information corresponding to the number of game media given to the player based on the winning results of the game times executed corresponding to the execution of the lottery process of the winning combination, and the game media given to the player based on the winning results. Predetermined display means for displaying game medium information, which is any one of information corresponding to the number of game media available to the player including the number,
Equipped with
The first control means is
First notification control means for controlling the first notification means so that the first notification corresponding to the predetermined mode is executed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the winning combination lottery process,
Setting means for setting a set value corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player in a settable state,
Means for causing the first notification means to execute a display corresponding to the setting value that is the selection target in the setting possible state;
Equipped with
The second control means controls the second notification means so that the second notification corresponding to the predetermined mode is executed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. Equipped with means,
When both the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means are executed, the first notification is performed at a timing after the timing at which the second notification ends in the second notification means. The notification means is configured to end the first notification,
The first notification means is arranged at a position adjacent to the predetermined display means,
The display range of the first notification means is narrower than the display range of the second notification means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform control for executing the notification of the stop mode.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement|sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the stop design at the time of each winning (a)-(i). (A) It is a front view of the image display apparatus and the stop order notification device arrange|positioned at an initial position, (b) It is a front view of the image display apparatus and the stop order notification apparatus arrange|positioned at the time of notification. (A) A front view of the image display device and the stop order notification device for explaining how the stop order notification device is used to notify the reel stop order, and (b) when the stop order notification device notifies. It is a front view of the image display device for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the situation where it is arranged at the position. 9A to 9E are time charts showing how reel stop order is notified by at least one of the image display device and the stop order notification device. FIG. 9 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the master MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of payment side. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the delivery side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by the main MPU. It is a flow chart which shows injection response processing performed in a master side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the corresponding processing at the time of throwing in which is executed in the payout MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by the master MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relationship between a reel stop order and a winning mode established when a normal mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT mode lottery table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relation between a reel stop order and a winning mode that is established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT modes. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relationship between a reel stop order and a winning mode established when a second RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a flow chart which shows reel control processing performed by a payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process during a game performed in the main side MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize decision processing which is executed with the payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the medium provision process performed by the delivery side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the corresponding processing at the time of the end of the game performed by the master side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of transfer to AT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an information storage area. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the display content of the image display apparatus in an acquisition challenge state, (b) It is an explanatory view for demonstrating an example of display content of the image display apparatus in a 1st transfer challenge state. is there. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the display content of the image display apparatus in (a), (b) promotion challenge state. It is a flow chart which shows lottery correspondence processing performed by the master MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the lottery table for (a), (b) opportunity points. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing which is executed with the production side MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed with the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer management process performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of the trigger point performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the state transition process performed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during 1st transfer performed by the main MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a lottery table for the first AT transfer lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 1st transfer challenges performed by the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a (a)-(f) 1st transfer challenge state progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion setting process performed in the main MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the promotion lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for promotion challenges performed in the MPU of the main side. It is a time chart which shows a mode that an promotion challenge state progresses. It is a time chart which shows a situation that the number of games required until the first transition challenge state occurs due to the promotion challenge state occurring. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for 2nd during transfer performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd transfer challenges performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery corresponding process in AT performed by the master MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART preparation state process performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state process performed by the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows the flow of (a)-(e) the addition state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery corresponding process in the addition state performed by the master MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the continuation rate promotion lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the addition state process performed in the main side MPU. (A), (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of the display contents of the image display device in the addition state, and (c) is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the production side RAM. It is the flowchart which shows the control processing for the addition state which is executed with production side MPU. (A) ~ (e) is a time chart showing how the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device is updated. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of each compensation lottery table. It is a time chart which shows a mode that (a)-(e) addition execution state advances. It is a flow chart which shows the end processing of the addition state performed by the master side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART termination branch process performed by the main MPU. (A) It is a front view of a special display part, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a special display part. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the alerting|reporting content in an image display apparatus, and the display content in a special display part. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process corresponding to the branch performed in the main MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the information processing which is executed with the production side MPU. (A) ~ (d) is a time chart showing how the notification of the relationship with the winning combination is performed in each of the special display unit and the image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process corresponding to the branch performed by the main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is a type of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 opened.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms the outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with its left side portion as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by an unlocking operation of a key on the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. On the game panel 20, three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are formed transparent or semitransparent, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R that are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R in a one-to-one correspondence. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is in a visible state through the corresponding display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the respective display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R can be individually and rotationally driven by driving the stepping motor. Has become.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, a start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. When the start lever 41 is operated while the medals are bet, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 which are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are brought into a state in which they can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed after the left reel 32L started rotating.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, thereby giving a medal. And until the execution of various processes such as management of the game state is completed, it corresponds to one game (game time).

On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 to the hopper device 53 when acceptance is permitted, and when reception is prohibited. It is guided to a medal tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12. Note that the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when the winning corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established on the activated line. There is.

Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 52. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum creditable virtual medals at one time, and two virtual medals are inserted at one time. A second credit insertion button 48 for inserting and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A payment button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as an actual medal.

As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated at power-on and power-off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and the setting states of the slot machine 10 from “setting 1” to “setting 1”. A setting key insertion hole 57 that is operated to change in the range of “setting 6” is provided.

<Design attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

In FIG. 3, the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is shown. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively, and these numbers are visible to the main controller 80 from the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the corresponding numbers will be used for description.

As the symbols, a "bell" symbol (for example, 20th on the left reel 32L), a "replay 1" symbol (for example, 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on the left reel 32L), "Replay 2" symbol (for example, 11th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" There are 9 types of symbols (for example, the 9th on the left reel 32L), “Replay 3” symbols (for example, the 6th on the left reel 32L), and “White 7” symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 3, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed such that, out of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R, three symbols are visible so that the entire symbols can be visually recognized. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the present slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating with a prescribed number of medals bet, and a winning corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, a profit of paying out medals, re-playing Either the profit or the transition of the game state is given.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line in which winning can be achieved. Then, the main line ML is set as a folding line, not a line extending straight. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M and the lower design of the right reel 32R, the upper design of the left reel 32L, the upper design of the middle reel 32M and the upper design of the right reel 32R. Subline SL2 tied, the middle reel design of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the middle reel design of the right reel 32R, and the subline SL3 tied, the lower reel 32L, the lower reel of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. On the line extending in a straight line such as the sub-line SL4 connecting the lower design, the lower design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, and the sub-line SL5 connecting the upper design of the right reel 32R. Even if the combination is established, the winning is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the winning symbol combination and the privilege granted in the case of winning will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols that become a prize and a privilege that is awarded when the prize is won, and FIGS. 6A to 6I show each prize. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the stop design in case of occurrence.

The small role prizes for which medals are paid out include the first to twelfth supplementary prizes, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize and the second watermelon prize.

In detail, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is Either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol. If it is, it is one of the first to ninth supplementary prizes. In addition, if the "red 7" symbol, the "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol stop from the left on the main line ML, the tenth supplementary prize is awarded, and the "BAR" symbol, the "bell" symbol from the left on the main line ML. And when the "bell" symbol is stopped, the eleventh supplementary prize is awarded, and when the "watermelon" symbol, the "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol are stopped from the left in the main line ML, the twelfth supplementary prize is awarded. If any of the first to twelfth supplementary prizes is reached, the number of game media grant targets is “1”.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is any of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the right symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the first bell prize is won. In the case of the first bell winning, the number of game media to be awarded is “4”.

In the case of the first bell winning, as shown in FIG. 6A, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower subline SL4 are "bell" symbols. The player can easily recognize that the winning is achieved when the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the straight line. In this case, by stopping and displaying the combination of the same "bell" symbols at the time of winning the first bell, it is easy for the player to recognize the occurrence of the winning in the configuration in which the winning establishment mode in the main line ML is diversified. It becomes possible.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. If either, the second bell win. When the second bell prize is awarded, the number of game media to be awarded is “9”.

When the second bell winning is achieved, as shown in FIG. 6B, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all "bell" symbols in the upward-sloping subline SL5. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell prize has been won. Further, the line in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed during the second bell winning is the subline SL5, which is different from the subline SL4 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed during the first bell winning. Due to this difference, it is possible for the player to distinguish between the first bell winning and the second bell winning.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "Watermelon" symbol, and the right symbol. When the stop symbol on the reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon prize is won. When the first watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given is “4”.

In the case of winning the first watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6C, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the descending right subline SL1 can be "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first watermelon prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is not stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the "cherry" symbol passes through the upper, middle, or lower stages, the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1 at the time of winning the first watermelon.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is either a "BAR" symbol or a "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is " If it is a "watermelon" design, the second watermelon is won. In the case of the second watermelon winning, the number of game media to be given is “4”.

In the case of the second watermelon winning combination, as shown in FIG. 6D, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower subline SL4 are all "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second watermelon prize has been won. Further, the line in which the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed in the second watermelon winning is the subline SL4, which is different from the subline SL1 in which the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed in the first watermelon winning. Due to such a difference, it is possible for the player to distinguish between the first watermelon prize and the second watermelon prize.

Replay prizes that allow the player to play the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals) are awarded as normal replay prizes, bell replay prizes, first cherry replay prizes, and second cherry replays. There are a prize, a first RT replay prize, a second RT replay prize, a first falling replay prize and a second falling replay prize.

In detail, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is If any of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is any of the "White 7" symbol and the "Watermelon" symbol, a normal replay prize Becomes

When the normal replay is won, as shown in FIG. 6(e), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the middle subline SL3 are "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol, and "Replay 3". It will be one of the designs. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the normal replay prize has been won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is "cherry" symbol. In the case where the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "cherry" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol, the bell replay is won.

When the bell replay is won, as shown in FIG. 6(f), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 are “bell” symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the Bell Replay prize has been won. The line in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed in the bell replay winning is the subline SL2, and the line in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed in the first bell winning and the "bell" in the second bell winning It is different from the sub line SL5 in which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, it is possible for the player to distinguish the bell replay prize from the first bell prize and the second bell prize.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol. And, if it is any of the "watermelon" symbols, it will be the first cherry replay prize.

In the case of the first cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6(g), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the descending right subline SL1 can be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combination of the "cherry" symbols is not stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first cherry replay winning is won, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification on the image display device 67 provided on the front door 12. A motivational presentation is performed. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "cherry" symbol by confirming the effect, the two "cherry" symbols or the three "cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL1. Can be displayed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is any of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the right symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, the second cherry replay prize is awarded.

In the case of the second cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6(h), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 can be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "cherry" symbols is not stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the second cherry replay winning is won, the image display device 67 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "cherry" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational presentation is performed. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop and display the "cherry" symbol after confirming the effect, two "cherry" symbols or three "cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL2. Can be displayed. Further, the line in which the combination of the "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed in the second cherry replay winning is the subline SL2, which is different from the subline SL1 in which the combination of the "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed in the first cherry replay winning. Due to such a difference, it is possible for the player to distinguish between the first cherry replay prize and the second cherry replay prize.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay" In the case of either the "2" symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol, the first RT replay prize is won. Here, regarding whether or not to be the first RT replay winning, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary, for example, the first "Replay 1" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML on the left reel 32L. Along with the situation where the first "Replay 3" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML on the right reel 32R, when the fourth "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M is stopped and displayed on the upper stage, "White 7" is displayed. The combination of symbols will be stopped and displayed on a straight line. Therefore, in the case of the first RT replay winning, stop control of the middle reel 32M is performed in a reel control process described later so that an event in which all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur. ..

On the main line ML, the stop design of the left reel 32L is either a "white 7" design or a "watermelon" design, the stop design of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" design, and the stop design of the right reel 32R is " In the case of any of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, the second RT replay prize is awarded. In the case of the second RT replay winning, the phenomenon that all the three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "Cherry" symbol, and the right symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is either the "cherry" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol, the first falling replay prize is awarded. In the case of the first falling replay prize, the phenomenon that all the three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "replay 1" symbol, "replay 2". If it is either the symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol, the second falling replay prize is awarded. In the case of the second falling replay prize, the phenomenon that all the three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

When any of the above replay prizes is achieved, it is possible to play the next game while betting is unnecessary for both the medal and the virtual medal. Specifically, when one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, it is possible to start a game of the next game in a three-bet state while betting is unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It will be possible.

Further, among the above-mentioned various replay prizes, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay prize, the first falling replay prize and the second falling replay prize are not only triggers for granting the benefits of the replay prize, but also as triggers for transitioning to the gaming state. Become. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of gaming states are set so that the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities of each winning combination are different in the lottery processing of the winning combinations, and the transition between these gaming states is the transition of the gaming state. It occurs when the replay prize that triggers is established. The contents of each gaming state and the conditions for shifting to each gaming state will be described in detail later.

There is a BB (big bonus) prize as a status change prize in which only the game status is changed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol. If it is, it is a BB prize. When the BB winning is established, the game state shifts to the BB state.

The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit number of games is higher than in the normal mode described later and in the non-AT state (this state is also referred to as the normal gaming state). Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit number of games is higher than any gaming state other than the BB state. Specifically, a winning combination that enables the establishment of the second bell prize is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.1) than in other gaming states, and when winning the winning combination, each The second bell prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The BB state continues for a plurality of games, and ends when the ending condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. Although the ending condition is arbitrary, in the present slot machine 10, it is set as the ending condition that the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or more than the ending reference number (eg, “350”). There is.

In the case of a BB winning, as shown in FIG. 6(i), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the descending right subline SL1 can be "red 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the BB prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "red 7" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the BB winning is won, the image display device 67 provided on the front door 12 is displayed in the winning game or in the game after the winning game where the winning state of the winning combination is carried over. As a chance notification, a motivational effect of stopping and displaying the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop and display the "red 7" symbol after confirming the effect, the three "red 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1.

<Apparatus for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, at a position below the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R, a credit display section 61 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and a small winning combination. When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 67, the number-of-applied display section 62 that displays the number of game media that have been awarded at the time of winning, and a display corresponding to the notified content are displayed. A special display section 63 is provided for each of them. These display units 61 to 63 are each formed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a part or all of the display units 61 to 63 are configured by a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix display device, or another type of display device. Good.

A speaker unit 65 is provided below the front door 12. The speaker units 65 are provided as a left and right pair, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, sound output control is performed so that a sound or a sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or a sound corresponding to a winning result is generated. Sound output is controlled so that sound is output. Further, the speaker unit 65 is controlled to perform sound output so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 67 is performed.

At the upper part of the front door 12, an effect light emitting portion 66 is provided and an image display device 67 is provided. When the abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the effect light emitting section 66 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the production light emitting unit 66 is controlled to emit light so as to perform a light emission production corresponding to the display production on the image display device 67.

The image display device 67 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or the like. It may be another display device having a display surface, or may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 67 is display-controlled so that images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result of each game are displayed on the display surface.

A stop order notification device 71 is provided at a position adjacent to the image display device 67 on the upper portion of the front door 12. The stop order notification device 71 is a predetermined winning combination when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop order, or a predetermined winning order when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop order. This is a device for notifying the predetermined stop order when a winning combination that can avoid the establishment of the winning is won. Here, in the slot machine 10, as will be described later in detail, even if a winning combination that can achieve the first bell prize is won, the correct answer is selected from the first stopping targets of the three reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The first bell prize cannot be established unless one of the first stop targets is selected. In addition, even if the winning combination that wins the second bell prize is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one stop order of the correct answers among the stop orders of the six reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The second bell prize cannot be established unless you stop. Further, even if the winning combination for winning the first RT replay prize is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in one stop order of the correct answer among the stop orders of the six reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The first RT replay prize cannot be established unless the game is stopped. Further, even if the winning combination for winning the second RT replay prize is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in one stop order of the correct answer among the stop orders of the six reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The second RT replay prize cannot be established unless you stop. In addition, when a winning combination that can establish the first falling replay prize is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one stop order of the correct answers among the stop orders of the six reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is impossible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize unless you stop. In addition, when the winning combination that can establish the second falling replay prize is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are selected in one stop order of the correct answers among the stop orders of the six reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is impossible to avoid the establishment of the second fall replay prize unless you stop. Then, unlike the non-AT state, in the AT state, the notification of the predetermined stop order is executed before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is validated. Under such circumstances, in some AT states, the stop order notification device 71 is used to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

The stop order notification device 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7(a) and 7(b). FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B are front views of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71. The stop order notification device 71 includes a base body 72 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape. The base body 72 is arranged such that one of the pair of plate surfaces having a larger area than the other surface faces the front of the slot machine 10 and the other faces the rear of the slot machine 10, and the lower left corner angle of the image display device 67. It is rotatably supported by a rotary shaft 73 that is provided so that the front-rear direction is the axial direction in the vicinity. In this case, the stop order notification device 71 can rotate clockwise about the rotation shaft 73 in the front-rear direction and can rotate counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 73. Then, a predetermined drive signal is output to the rotation drive unit 74 connected to the rotation shaft 73 to bring the rotation drive unit 74 into a predetermined drive state, whereby the stop order notification device 71 rotates clockwise. The stop order informing device 71 rotates counterclockwise by moving and outputting a specific drive signal to the rotating drive unit 74 to bring the rotating drive unit 74 into a specific drive state.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 12 is provided with the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 so that the player cannot touch the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71. 10 A transparent cover 75 is provided to cover the front. The transparent cover 75 is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic resin, and is transparent so that the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 can be visually recognized. The transparent cover 75 is formed behind the transparent cover 75 so as to secure a movement space for the stop order notification device 71. In FIG. 1, a part of the transparent cover 75 is broken.

FIG. 7A shows a state in which the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at an initial position which is arranged when the stop order notification device 71 does not notify the stop order. ) Indicates a state in which the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position which is arranged in the situation where the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order. When the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 7A, the direction of the short side portion on the front surface of the base body 72 becomes the horizontal direction, and the direction of the long side portion on the front surface of the base body 72 becomes. The direction is vertical. In this case, the long sides are parallel to the left and right edges of the image display device 67. When arranged at the initial position, the stop order notification device 71 is laterally separated from the image display device 67, and the stop order notification device 71 does not overlap the display surface of the image display device 67.

An initial position detection sensor 76 for detecting that the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the initial position is provided. When the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the initial position, one of the binary signals (for example, HI level signal) is output from the initial position detection sensor 76 to the effect control device 90 described later, and the stop order notification device 71. When is not located at the initial position, the initial position detection sensor 76 outputs the other of the binary signals (for example, a LOW level signal) to the effect control device 90.

When the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position as shown in FIG. 7B, the direction of the short side portion on the front surface of the base body 72 is the vertical direction and the long side portion on the front surface of the base body 72. Is the horizontal direction. In this case, the long sides are parallel to the upper and lower edges of the image display device 67. When the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position, the stop order notification device 71 has a range from the end on the side opposite to the side where the rotating shaft 73 is present to a position in the middle in the longitudinal direction (hereinafter, this range will be referred to as the front side). The facing range 77) faces the image display device 67 from the front. The range in which the front facing range 77 faces is a part of the range of the image display device 67, and more specifically, the front facing range 77 of the stop order notification device 71 with respect to the lower region in the image display device 67. It is facing from the front. Since the base body 72 of the stop order notification device 71 is formed opaque, when the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position, an area in the image display device 67 that faces the stop order notification device 71 in the front-rear direction. Is invisible when viewed from the front.

When the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification position, the stop order notification device 71 is separated from the image display device 67 in front of the slot machine 10. That is, the stop order notification device 71 is located in front of the image display device 67 in front of the slot machine 10 and is movable between the initial position and the notification time position without contacting the image display device 67. ..

A notification time position detection sensor 78 is provided for detecting that the stop order notification device 71 is located at the notification time position. When the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position, one of the binary signals (for example, HI level signal) is output from the notification time position detection sensor 78 to the effect control device 90 described later, and the stop order notification device 71 is output. When the device 71 is not arranged at the notification time position, the notification time position detection sensor 78 outputs the other of the binary signals (for example, a LOW level signal) to the effect control device 90.

In the front facing area 77 of the base body 72, three stop order display portions 79a to 79c are provided at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction. That is, in the front facing range 77 of the base body 72, the stop order display portions 79a to 79c are provided in the same number as the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the stop buttons 42 to 44. Each of the stop order display portions 79a to 79c is configured as a dot matrix display, but is not limited to the dot matrix display, and may be a liquid crystal display device, a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface. It is possible to display at least numbers and characters such as "1", "2", "3", "?" and "!" on the respective stop order display portions 79a to 79c.

When the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position, the stop order display portions 79a to 79c are arranged in the horizontal direction. In this state, a winning combination is achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a predetermined stopping order or a winning combination is achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a predetermined stopping order. When a winning combination that can be avoided is won, the predetermined stop order is notified by using each stop order display section 79a to 79c. On the other hand, when the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the initial position, the winning combination is achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop order, or the reels 32L and 32L are stopped in a predetermined stop order. Even if the winning combination that can avoid the establishment of a predetermined winning when the 32M and 32R are stopped is notified, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R using the respective stop order display portions 79a to 79c is executed. Not done.

FIG. 8A is a front view of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 for explaining how the stop order notification device 71 is used to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Is. FIG. 8A shows a stop order in a situation in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of the middle reel 32M, the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L, and the second bell winning combination is won. Indicates that the notification has been started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is validated. In this case, the number "1" is displayed on the central stop order display portion 79b, the number "2" is displayed on the right stop order display portion 79c, and the number "3" is displayed on the left stop order display portion 79a. Is displayed. This makes it possible to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R using the stop order notification device 71. When the winning combination that can achieve the first bell prize according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is won, it corresponds to the correct stop target of the stop order display portions 79a to 79c. The number "1" is displayed on the stop order display part, and the numbers and characters are not displayed on the other stop order display parts.

Here, when the stop order notification device 71 has notified the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the area of the image display device 67 facing the stop order notification device 71 from the rear side is also shown in FIG. As shown, notification images G1 to G3 for notifying the same stop order as the stop order notified by the stop order notification device 71 are displayed. For example, when “3”, “1”, and “2” are notified by the stop order notification device 71 as shown in FIG. 8A, the image display device 67 as shown in FIG. 8B. In the area that faces the stop order notification device 71 from behind, “3”, “1”, and “2” are also notified. As described above, not only the stop order notification device 71 but also the image display device 67 is notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so that the stop order notification device 71 is temporarily broken and placed at the notification time position. Even in a situation in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R cannot be stopped, it is possible to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

On the other hand, the entire area of the image display device 67 in which the notification images G1 to G3 for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed is the stop order notification device 71 arranged at the notification time position. It is included in the area facing from the rear. Therefore, the notification images G1 to G3 displayed on the image display device 67 are displayed in a situation where the stop order notification device 71 arranged at the notification time position notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing it. Therefore, even if the notification images G1 to G3 are displayed on the image display device 67, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stop order notification device 71.

It is a part of the AT state that the stop order notification device 71 is used to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In other AT states, the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the initial position. As the state continues, the stop order notification device 71 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the image display device 67 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, in the image display device 67, as notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, notification images G1 to G3 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8B. That is, the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by using the image data for displaying the notification images G1 to G3 on the image display device 67 in other AT states. It is possible to display the notification images G1 to G3 in the situation. As a result, it is possible to display the notification images G1 to G3 in a situation where the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R while reducing the required data amount.

FIG. 9 is a time chart showing how at least one of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. 9A shows an execution period of a predetermined AT state, FIG. 9B shows a period in which the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the initial position, and FIG. 9C shows a stop order notification device 71. 9D shows a period in which the reels are arranged at the notification time position, FIG. 9D shows a period in which the stop order notification device 71 can execute the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and FIG. The period during which the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be executed in the image display device 67 is shown.

First, a case will be described in which the stop order notification device 71 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R but the image display device 67 notifies the stop order.

At a timing of t1, a predetermined AT state (specifically, ART state) is started as shown in FIG. In this case, a main controller 80, which will be described later, starts a waiting period in which the game is advanced and a new game is started based on the operation of the player. By thus temporarily stopping the progress of the game, it becomes possible to let the player recognize that the predetermined AT state is about to start. Further, in this AT state, since the stop order notification device 71 does not notify the stop order, the movement toward the notification time position is started as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C. Instead, the stop order notification device 71 is maintained in the state of being arranged at the initial position.

After that, when the waiting period elapses at the timing of t2, the period in which the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be executed in the image display device 67 is started as shown in FIG. 9(e). Then, the period ends at the timing of t3. In this case, a main controller 80, which will be described later, starts a waiting period in which the game is advanced and a new game is started based on the operation of the player. By temporarily stopping the progress of the game in this way, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined AT state has ended. Thereafter, the standby period elapses at the timing of t4, whereby the predetermined AT state ends as shown in FIG. 9(a).

Next, a case will be described in which both the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 execute notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

At a timing of t5, a predetermined AT state (specifically, an addition state) is started as shown in FIG. 9A. In this case, a main controller 80, which will be described later, starts a waiting period in which the game is advanced and a new game is started based on the operation of the player. By thus temporarily stopping the progress of the game, it becomes possible to let the player recognize that the predetermined AT state is about to start. In the middle of the waiting period, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, the stop order notification device 71 starts moving from the initial position toward the notification time position, and before the timing when the waiting period ends. Arrangement of the stop order notification device 71 at the notification time position is completed at the timing of t6 which is the timing of. Thereby, it becomes possible to arrange the stop order notification device 71 at the notification time position by utilizing the waiting period.

After that, as the standby period elapses at the timing of t7, a period in which the stop order notification device 71 can execute the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as shown in FIG. 9D is started. As shown in FIG. 9E, the period in which the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be executed in the image display device 67 is started. Then, these periods end at the timing of t8. In this case, a main controller 80, which will be described later, starts a waiting period in which the game is advanced and a new game is started based on the operation of the player. By temporarily stopping the progress of the game in this way, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined AT state has ended. In the middle of the waiting period, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, the stop order notification device 71 starts moving from the notification position to the initial position and before the end of the waiting period. The arrangement of the stop order notification device 71 at the initial position is completed at the timing of t9 which is the timing of. Thereby, it becomes possible to arrange the stop order notification device 71 at the initial position by utilizing the waiting period.

As described above, the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the displaceable stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position. As a result, the difference between the situation in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the situation in which the stop order is not notified can be caused by a physical movement such as a change in the position of the stop order notification device 71. It is possible to give unexpectedness to. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the stop order notification device 71 is displaced and is arranged at the notification time position, the stop order notification device 71 is notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, thereby making the player pay attention to the stop order notification device 71. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the stop order notification device 71, the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged at the notification time position, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is arranged in the condition where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged at the initial position. Notification is not executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the situation in which the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the situation in which the notification is not executed, at the position of the stop order notification device 71. Becomes

The notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed by the image display device 67 and also by the stop order notification device 71. This makes it possible to diversify the locations where the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed, and prevent the situation where the notification is executed from becoming uniform. ..

In both the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71, a situation in which the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed only by the image display device 67 of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71. There are situations and situations in which they occur. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the notification in a manner suitable for each situation.

In the configuration in which the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 are provided as the display means for performing the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop order notification device 71 is displaceably provided. On the other hand, the image display device 67 is provided so as not to be displaced. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a clear difference in the presence or absence of physical movement between the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71.

The stop order notification device 71 performs notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a state of being opposed to the display area of the image display device 67. As a result, in a situation in which the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the player can be made to pay attention to the stop order notification device 71 rather than the image display device 67. Further, in a configuration in which the image display device 67 is fixedly arranged at a position easily visible to the player, the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at a position easily visible to the player, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Can be notified. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, when the player confirms the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 confirms the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Since it is not necessary to shift, the visibility can be improved.

Even when the stop order notification device 71 arranged at the notification time position notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the image display device 67 displays the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Notification is executed. As a result, a failure occurs in the stop order notification device 71 itself or the configuration for displacing the stop order notification device 71, and the stop order notification device 71 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Alternatively, even if the stop order notification device 71 is not placed at the notification time position, the image display device 67 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, even in the situation where the above failure occurs, it is possible to inform the player of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

When the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in the image display device 67, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged in a region facing the stop order notification device 71 from behind. The notification of the stop order is executed. Accordingly, when the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the visibility of the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 67 is reduced. Is possible. Therefore, even when the stop order notification device 71 arranged at the notification time position notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the image display device 67 stops the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In the configuration in which the order notification is executed, the player's attention to the stop order notification device 71 can be increased.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 80 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 80 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main controller 80 includes a main control board 81 and a payout control board 85 housed in a board box. When the substrate box is opened, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and when the fastening state is released, a breakage point occurs. By checking the presence or absence of the breakage portion, it becomes possible to easily check whether or not the substrate box is opened.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 80. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 67 in the front door 12 in an overlapping manner. The effect control device 90 controls the speaker unit 65, the effect light emitting unit 66, and the image display device 67 based on the command received from the main control device 80. The effect control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box, like the main control device 80.

<Electrical configuration of the slot machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

The main controller 80 includes a main control board 81 that executes a lottery process of winning combinations, a game state transition management, and the like, and a payout control board 85 that executes control for giving a game medium to a player. There is. The main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 are arranged side by side so that the element mounting surface and the back surface thereof do not face each other in one board box. The board box is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies. These case bodies are colorless and transparent so that the main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 in the board box can be visually recognized from the outside of the board box. It is colored and transparent. In this case, since the main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 are provided side by side as described above, the state of each plate surface of the main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 is set to the other state. It is possible to visually check from the outside of the board box while being not disturbed by the control boards 81 and 85.

The MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84 is built in, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in. It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 82 has an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 82, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects a medal that is inserted from the medal insertion port 45 and guided to the hopper device 53 when the medal acceptance is permitted, A credit insertion detection sensor 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49, a reset detection sensor 56a for detecting an operation of the reset button 56, and a setting key inserted in the setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as the setting key detection sensor 57a for detecting the fact are connected, and the signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 82.

To the output side of the MPU 82, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the special display unit 63, the effect control device 90, etc. are connected. As described above, the selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after the acceptance medal detection sensor 45a detects if acceptance is permitted, and inserts medals when acceptance is prohibited. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the detection sensor 45a. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permission state and the acceptance prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is located at the acceptance permission position. And the position of the reception prohibition. The MPU 82 switches the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permitted state and the acceptance prohibited state by switching the output state and the stopped state of the drive signal to the selector driving unit 52a.

Further, the MPU 82 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and causes at least one of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the command is transmitted to the effect control device 90, the display control of the special display unit 63 is executed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 is performed by the effect control device 90, while the direct display control of the special display portion 63 is performed by the MPU 82. That is, with respect to the image display device 67 that is the target of the relatively complicated display control, direct display control is executed by the effect control device 90, and the special display unit 63 that is the target of the relatively simple display control is executed. For, the display control is directly executed in the MPU 82. As a result, it is possible to perform both the display that emphasizes the improvement of the degree of attention to the effect and the display that emphasizes the reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 82.

An MPU 86 is mounted on the payout control board 85. The MPU 86 is a ROM 87 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 86 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 87 is executed. A RAM 88 is built in, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in. It is not essential that the ROM 87 and the RAM 88 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 86, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 86 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 86, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R makes one rotation) and the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are individually detected. Various sensors such as the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a, the settlement detection sensor 51a for detecting the operation of the settlement button 51, and the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 are connected, and the signals from these sensors are connected to the MPU 86. Is entered.

On the output side of the MPU 86, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a credit display section 61, an award number display section 62, and the like. It is connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 86, and the drive control of the hopper device 53 is performed by the MPU 86 when the small winning combination is established and the medals are paid out. Done by. Further, when the display control of the credit display unit 61 is performed by the MPU 86 so that the number of stored and stored virtual medals is displayed, and when the winning of the winning combination corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established as a result of the game. The display control of the number-of-addition display unit 62 is controlled by the MPU 86 so that the number of game media to be given is displayed.

Here, the main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 are electrically connected in the board box of the main controller 80, and a command is issued between the MPU 82 of the main control board 81 and the MPU 86 of the payout control board 85. It is exchanged by two-way communication. In the following description, the MPU 82, the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 of the main control board 81 are referred to as the main MPU 82, the main ROM 83 and the main RAM 84, and the MPU 86, the ROM 87 and the RAM 88 of the payout control board 85 are the payout side MPU 86 and the payout side. The side ROM 87 and the payout side RAM 88.

For details of the configuration relating to the electrical connection between the main control board 81 and the payout control board 85, the main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 are electrically connected using the first signal line group 101. A command is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the payout MPU 86 by using the first signal line group 101. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the first signal line group 101 has a signal line 102 for serial command data transmission and each unit data included in the command data (for example, 1-bit data). At least a signal line 103 for a clock signal for identifying the signal and a signal line 104 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of the transmission start and the transmission end of one command are included. A signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be provided separately.

Further, the main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 are electrically connected using the second signal line group 105, and the payout side MPU 86 to the main side MPU 82 are utilized by using the second signal line group 105. Command is sent to. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 105 includes the signal line 106 for serial command data transmission and each unit data included in the command data (for example, 1-bit data). At least a signal line 107 for a clock signal for identifying the signal and a signal line 108 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of the transmission start and the transmission end of one command are included. A signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be provided separately.

The first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 105 are collectively provided in one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one ends of the first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 105 are aggregated, and a connector in which the other ends are aggregated, and one connector is the main control unit. The connector of the board 81 is detachably attached to the connector, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the payout control board 85.

The communication method between the main MPU 82 and the payout MPU 86 is not limited to serial communication and may be parallel communication. Alternatively, the first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 105 may be provided as separate connection units.

Bidirectional communication between the main MPU 82 and the payout MPU 86 controls the progress of the game. The details of the information to be bidirectionally communicated and the details of the process for controlling the progress of the game will be described later.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the main MPU 82 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main MPU 82 and the payout MPU 86, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage applied to the unit is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the main MPU 82. The main MPU 82 receives the power failure signal, executes the power failure process, and enables the return to the processing state before the power failure after the power recovery. Further, when the main MPU 82 receives the power failure signal, it sends a power failure command to the payout MPU 86. The pay-out MPU 86 receives the power failure command, executes the power failure process, and enables the return to the processing state before the power failure after the power restoration.

The power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power cutoff for supplying backup power to the main side RAM 84 and the payout side RAM88 as power during power cutoff in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. There is. As a result, even when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, in the situation where the backup power can be supplied in the power supply unit during the power interruption (for example, one day or two days), the main RAM 84 and the payout side are provided. Data is stored and held in the RAM 88. However, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is pressed, the data stored and held in the main RAM 84 and the payout RAM 88 are stored and held. Existing data is initialized.

The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for executing various notifications and various effect execution controls. An MPU 92 is mounted on the production control board 91. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip. Further, the RAM 94 is configured such that the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 even though the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power interruption of the power supply device 54 in a situation where the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off. Good.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the main MPU 82 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 and receives various commands from the main MPU 82. To the output side of the MPU 92, the speaker unit 65, the effect light emitting unit 66, and the image display device 67 are connected. The MPU 92 executes the sound output control of the speaker unit 65, the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66, and the display control of the image display device 67 on the basis of the command received from the main MPU 82, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. To be done. By the way, when controlling the display of the image display device 67, the drawing data is created by setting the image data in the frame buffer provided on the effect control board 91, and the image signal according to the drawing data is output to the image display device 67. By doing so, the image display device 67 is caused to display the image corresponding to the drawing data. When setting image data in the frame buffer, various parameter information such as coordinate information and size information is applied to the image data. An initial position detection sensor 76 and a notification time position detection sensor 78 in the stop order notification device 71 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and a rotation drive unit 74 of the stop order notification device 71 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. And the stop order display portions 79a to 79c are connected. The MPU 92 controls the displacement of the stop order notification device 71 between the initial position and the notification time position, and the display control of the stop order notification device 71 is executed. In the following description, the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are referred to as the effect-side MPU 92, the effect-side ROM 93, and the effect-side RAM 94.

<Main processing of main MPU 82>
Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 82 and the payout MPU 86 will be described. First, the main processing started in the main MPU 82 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization processing, the interruption by the timer interruption processing is permitted, and further various kinds of initial settings are made to the register group and the I/O device in the main MPU 82.

After the initialization process is completed, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the ON operation is performed (step S102). If the ON operation is performed (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 is not turned on when the power switch 55 is turned on (step S103: NO), a partial clear process is executed. If the reset button 56 is turned on when the power switch 55 is turned on (step S104) (step S103: YES), a clear all process is executed (step S105). That is, when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed without performing the operation for initializing the main RAM 84, a partial clearing process is executed, and the operation for initializing the main RAM 84 is performed. If it is done, the clearing process is executed.

In the partial clear processing, some areas in the main RAM 84 are initialized, and in the all clear processing, all areas in the main RAM 84 are initialized. In the partial clearing process, an area in the main RAM 84 in which data indicating whether or not the BB state is stored, an area in which data indicating the total number of game media added in the BB state is stored, and whether or not in the AT state Each of the main side RAM 84 except an area in which data indicating that the data is stored, an area in which data for specifying the termination condition of the AT state is stored, and an area in which data indicating the type of lottery mode described later is stored. Clear the area to "0". In this case, the area in which the winning combination is stored is cleared to "0". In the all clear processing, all areas of the main side RAM 84 are cleared to "0" including the areas that are excluded from the execution target of "0" clear in the partial clear processing. As a result, the BB state, the AT state, and the lottery mode are maintained in the state before the power was cut off even if the partial clear processing was executed, and when the all clear processing was executed, regardless of the state before the power shutdown. It becomes a normal game state.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above, and when the power is cut off in the BB state and a part of the clear processing is executed, the BB state may not be set. When the power supply is cut off in the first RT mode or the second RT mode, which will be described later, the partial clear processing may be performed when the power is cut off in the case where the partial clear processing is executed when the power is cut off. When executed, the RT mode may not be set. Further, even if the partial clearing process is executed, the area in which the data indicating that the winning combination of BB is won is not cleared to "0".

After executing the processing of step S104 or step S105, the winning probability setting processing is executed (step S106). In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the special display portion 63 provided on the game panel 20. The special display unit 63 is a display unit for executing a corresponding notification when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71. Also used for displaying values. In addition, immediately before the winning probability setting process, the area for storing the setting value data in the main RAM 84 is surely initialized, so the setting value displayed on the special display portion 63 corresponds to "setting 1". It is "1". In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the special display portion 63. When the reset button 56 is operated in the situation where the setting value is "setting 6", the setting value is updated to "setting 1". If the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process is ended. In this case, the display of the set value on the special display portion 63 is ended.

After executing the winning probability setting process, the clear command is transmitted to the payout side MPU 86 (step S107). When the payout side MPU 86 receives the clear command, it clears all areas of the payout side RAM 88 to "0". Then, it shifts to normal processing (Step S108). The normal processing will be described later in detail.

When the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S109 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off.

In the power recovery process, the main side RAM 84 is checked to determine whether the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal (step S109). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the setting value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and abnormal when it is "0" or "7" or more. If the set value is normal, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S110). The power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 84, and when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is stopped and a predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S111). Specifically, the checksum value in the main RAM 84 is checked to see if the value is normal.

When a positive determination is made in all of steps S109 to S111, it means that the power failure process at the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 84 is written in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 to restore the stack state to the state before the power was cut off (step S112). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S113). After that, a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process is transmitted to the payout side MPU 86 and the production side MPU 92 (step S114), and then the process returns to the address before the power shutdown (step S115).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S109 to S111, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the next timer interrupt process is prohibited (step S116), and all the output ports of the main MPU 82 are cleared to "0" to turn off all the actuators connected to the output port (step S116). (S117), error notification processing for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S118). The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S105).

<Main processing of payout MPU 86>
Next, the main process started in the payout MPU 86 when the supply of the operating power to the payout MPU 86 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, when the clear command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S201: YES), the clear process is executed (step S202). In the clearing process, all areas of the payout side RAM 88 are cleared to "0". The payout side RAM 88 stores a virtual medal counter 88a for storing information on the number of virtual medals, and information on the number of game media to be awarded when a winning corresponding to the award of game media is established. A grant target counter 88b is provided. By clearing the virtual medal counter 88a to "0" by the clearing process, even if one or more virtual medals are stored and stored immediately before the power interruption, the virtual medal counter 88b is erased and the granting target counter 88b is set to " By clearing "0", even if the number of game media to be granted is 1 or more immediately before the power interruption, it is erased. When the clear process is executed, the process proceeds to step S204 and subsequent steps.

In the main process, if the clear command has not been received (step S201: NO), it is determined in step S203 whether a power recovery command has been received from the main MPU 82. When the power recovery command has not been received (step S203: NO), the process returns to step S201. That is, the payout MPU 86 receives the clear command or the power recovery command transmitted when the supply of the operating power is started and when the main MPU 82 executes various processes at the start of the supply of the operating power. The process for controlling the application of the game medium and the process for controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which will be described later, stand by without becoming executable. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each processing described above may be executed even if the corresponding command is not received from the main MPU 82 at the time of starting the supply of operating power. Further, after the start of supplying the operating power, the payout side MPU 86 pays out when the process for controlling the application of the game medium and the process for controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become executable. A predetermined command is transmitted from the side MPU 86 to the main MPU 82, and when the main MPU 82 receives the predetermined command, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) and the normal process (FIG. 15) described later are ready to be executed. It may be configured.

When the process of step S202 is executed, or when the power recovery command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S203: YES), the initialization process is executed (step S204). In the initialization processing, various initial settings are performed on the register group, the I/O device, and the like in the payout MPU 86.

After that, the interruption by the timer interruption processing is permitted (step S205), and the interruption permission in step S205 is repeatedly executed until the power failure command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S206: NO). When the power failure command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S206: YES), the power failure process is executed (step S207). In the power failure process, by clearing the output state of the output port of the payout side MPU 86, even if the drive signal is output to the hopper device 53 to execute the payout of medals, it is stopped, Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, they are stopped. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the supply of operating power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

<Timer interrupt processing of main MPU 82>
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register saving process (step S301), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 82 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 84. In step S302, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1". When the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S303 and the power failure process is executed.

The power failure flag is set to "1" when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 82. In the power failure process, first, a power failure command is transmitted to the payout MPU 86. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the command transmission is completed. If the transmission is not completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 is stored in the main RAM 84. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 82 is cleared and all the actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main side RAM 84 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored in the main side RAM 84, and subsequent access to the main side RAM 84 is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the supply of operating power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set in step S302, various processes after step S304 are performed. In step S304, the watchdog timer is cleared to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction. In step S305, an interrupt end declaration process that enables the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 82 is performed. In step S306, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not the reading result is normal. In step S307, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed.

In step S308, a signal for causing the game hall management computer to recognize the number of game media bet in each game, and a game hall management computer for recognizing whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. An external output process for externally outputting a signal and a signal for causing the management computer in the game hall to recognize whether the front door 12 is open or not is executed.

In step S309, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the payout side MPU 86 or the production side MPU 92 is performed. In step S310, port output processing for outputting the data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port is performed. In step S311, the value of each register saved in the main side RAM 84 in the previous step S301 is restored to the corresponding register in the main side MPU 82. After that, in step S312, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes ends.

<Timer interrupt processing of payout side MPU 86>
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the payout MPU 86 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 2 msec.

In step S401, a corresponding process at the time of insertion, which is a process for increasing or decreasing the number of virtual medals according to the insertion of medals into the medal insertion slot 45 or the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49, is executed. In step S402, the reel index sensor of the reel unit 31, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, the adjustment detection sensor 51a of the adjustment button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, and the like. A sensor monitoring process for monitoring the state of the sensor is executed.

In step S403, settlement processing is executed. In the account settlement process, when the account settlement button 51 is operated in a situation in which the stored and stored virtual medals can be paid out as medals, the number of pieces of information stored in the virtual medal counter 88a of the payout side RAM 88 is stored. The hopper device 53 is drive-controlled so that the medals corresponding to the above are paid out to the medal tray 59. The situation in which the virtual medal can be paid out as a medal is a situation in which the game is not being executed and a replay prize has not been established in the previous game.

In step S404, a reel control process for performing control for generating a trigger for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, control for generating a trigger for stopping rotation, control corresponding to a winning result after the rotation is stopped, and the like. Execute. In step S405, stepping motor control processing for driving the respective stepping motors to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed.

In step S406, a medium giving process for giving the number of game media corresponding to the winning result is executed. In step S407, a signal for causing the management computer of the game hall to recognize the number of medals settled as virtual medals, and the number of medals paid out from the hopper device 53 when the winning is established, the management computer of the game hall. An external output process for externally outputting a signal or the like to be recognized by is executed. Here, as already described, the external output processing is executed not only by the payout MPU 86 but also by the main MPU 82. That is, the external output to the management computer of the game hall is directly executed without the control of the other control means in the main MPU 82, and without the control of the other control means in the payout MPU 86. It is executed directly.

In step S408, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port is performed. In step S409, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes ends.

<Normal processing of main MPU 82>
Next, a normal process executed by the main MPU 82 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S501), and then a display clear process is executed (step S502). In the display clear process, if the special display section 63 is display-controlled so that a predetermined display is performed in the previous game, the predetermined display is erased. As a result, the special display portion 63 is in the off state in which nothing is displayed.

After that, a start waiting process is executed (step S503). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay prize has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay prizes has occurred, the bet number is set to the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. If no replay prize has occurred, it is determined whether or not a medal has been inserted or the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If any of the above is performed, an input handling process for changing the bet number and the like is performed, and the start waiting process is ended.

Here, the input handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When the insertion medal detection sensor 45a detects insertion of one medal (step S601: YES), the total number of the values of the first bet counter and the second bet counter provided in the main RAM 84. It is determined whether or not is equal to or more than the maximum specified number of betting of game media in this game (step S602). The first bet counter is a counter for measuring the number of game media for which bet setting has been made based on the fact that a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and a second bet counter. The counter is a counter for counting the number of game media for which bet settings have been made with virtual medals based on the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49. Further, in the slot machine 10, the maximum specified number of bets that can be bet is set as a fixed number (specifically, “3”) regardless of the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and bets can be made. The maximum specified number may be changed according to the game state.

When the total number of the values of the respective bet counters is less than the maximum prescribed number (step S602: NO), the value of the first bet counter is incremented by 1 because the game media can be bet (step S603). When the total number of the bet counter values is equal to or larger than the maximum specified number (step S602: YES), a medal insertion command is set (step S604). The medal insertion command is a command for causing the payout side MPU 86 to recognize that the number of virtual medals should be incremented by 1, and is transmitted to the payout side MPU 86 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). It

The processing contents of the payout side MPU 86 when the medal insertion command is received will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing at the time of insertion executed in step S401 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the payout MPU 86. When the medal insertion command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S701: YES), the value of the virtual medal counter 88a of the payout RAM 88 is incremented by 1 (step S702). As a result, the medals inserted this time are stored and stored as virtual medals. If the value of the virtual medal counter 88a after adding 1 is equal to or more than the upper limit storage number (specifically, “50”) (step S703: YES), it indicates that the number of virtual medals reaches the upper limit storage number. The upper limit storage command is transmitted to the main MPU 82 (step S704).

Returning to the description of the handling process (FIG. 16) in the main MPU 82, in the handling process, when the upper limit storage command is received from the payout MPU 86 (step S605: YES), the upper limit storage flag provided in the main RAM 84. Is set to "1" (step S606). The upper limit storage flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the number of virtual medals measured in the payout MPU 86 is the upper limit storage number. In this way, when the value of the virtual medal counter 88a becomes equal to or more than the upper limit storage number, the payout MPU 86 transmits the upper limit storage command to the main MPU 82, and the main MPU 82 sets the upper limit storage flag when the upper limit storage command is received. With the configuration in which “1” is set, even if the payout side MPU 86 is configured to measure the number of virtual medals, whether or not the number of virtual medals is the upper limit storage number or more is determined by the main MPU 82. Can be specified. In addition, when the process of adding the value of the second bet counter in the main RAM 84 is executed in step S612 described later, the upper limit storage flag is cleared to "0".

In the insertion support process, when any of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is operated (step S607: YES), the value of the first bet counter of the main RAM 84 corresponds to the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 operated this time. If the number of virtual medals to be inserted is less than the instructed number (step S608: NO), the necessary insertion number calculation process is executed (step S609). In the calculation process of the required insertion number, if the first credit insertion button 47 is operated this time, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the first bet counter from the maximum prescribed number is set as the required insertion number, and the second credit insertion button 48 is set. If it is operated this time, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the first bet counter from "2" is set as the required insertion number, and if the third credit insertion button 49 is operated this time, "1" is the required insertion number. And Then, the credit insertion command in which the value corresponding to the required insertion number calculated in step S609 is set is set as the transmission target. The credit input command is a command for causing the payout side MPU 86 to recognize the required number of inputs, and is transmitted to the payout side MPU 86 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

The processing contents of the payout side MPU 86 when the credit input command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17 again. When the credit insertion command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S705: YES), it is determined whether the value of the virtual medal counter 88a of the payout RAM 88 is 1 or more (step S706).

When the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is 1 or more (step S706: YES), the subtraction process of the virtual medal counter 88a is executed (step S707). In the subtraction process, when the required insertion number set in the credit insertion command is equal to or smaller than the value of the virtual medal counter 88a, the required insertion number is subtracted from the value of the virtual medal counter 88a. When the required insertion number is larger than the value of the virtual medal counter 88a, the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is cleared to "0". In the subtraction process, the information of the value subtracted from the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is stored in the register of the payout side MPU 86. On the other hand, when the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is "0" (step S706: NO), the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is held as it is, and "0" is set in the register of the payout side MPU 86 as the subtraction information. (Step S708).

When the process of step S707 or step S708 is executed, the credit-corresponding command is transmitted to the main MPU 82 (step S709). The credit corresponding command is a command for causing the main MPU 82 to recognize whether or not the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is subtracted, and when the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is subtracted. When the process of step S707 is executed, the information of the value subtracted from the virtual medal counter 88a is set in the credit-corresponding command, and when the process of step S708 is executed, the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is subtracted. Is set in the credit-compatible command.

Returning to the explanation of the handling process (FIG. 16) in the main MPU 82, in the handling process, when the credit handling command is received from the payout MPU 86 (step S611: YES), the addition process of the second bet counter is executed. (Step S612). In the addition processing, when the information of the value subtracted from the virtual medal counter 88a is set in the credit-corresponding command, the value is added to the second bet counter. As a result, the virtual medals corresponding to the value subtracted from the virtual medal counter 88a are bet. On the other hand, in the addition processing, the value of the second bet counter is maintained as it is when the information indicating that the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is not subtracted is set in the credit-corresponding command. When the value of the second bet counter is added in the addition process, the upper limit storage flag is cleared to "0" regardless of whether the upper limit storage flag is set to "1".

In the insertion support process, the total number of the first bet counter value and the second bet counter value of the main RAM 84 is equal to or more than the maximum specified number of bettable game media in the current game, and the upper limit storage of the main RAM 84 is performed. When the flag is set to "1" (step S613: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S614). In the acceptance prohibition process, the output of the drive signal to the selector driver 52a is stopped to set the selector 52 in the acceptance prohibition state. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. If the reception is already prohibited, the state is maintained.

On the other hand, if the total number of the first bet counter value and the second bet counter value of the main RAM 84 is less than the maximum bettable number of game media in this game, or "1" is set in the upper limit storage flag. When it is not set (step S613: NO), the acceptance permission process is executed (step S615). In the acceptance permission process, the selector 52 is set to the acceptance permission state by starting the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. As a result, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. If the reception permission state has already been entered, that state is maintained.

Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 15 ), after the start waiting process (step S503) is executed, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached the specified number (“3” in the present embodiment). (Step S504), if the bet number has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process (Step S503). In the slot machine 10, the prescribed number is constant and the prescribed number=maximum prescribed number in any gaming state. That is, in order to start the game, it is necessary to bet the maximum specified number of game media in any game state. When the bet number has reached the specified number (step S504: YES), it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated (step S505). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S503).

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated (step S505: YES), the main line ML is activated, and then the acceptance prohibition process is executed in the same manner as step S614 in the closing handling process (FIG. 16) (step S605). S506). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. If the reception is already prohibited, the state is maintained.

Then, in step S507, a lottery process for performing a lottery of the winning combination in this game is executed. The lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a random number used when determining whether or not to win a winning combination is obtained (step S801). In the present slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number of “0 to 65535”, and the main MPU 82 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 84 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for determining whether the winning combination is valid or not is read from the main ROM 83 (step S802). Here, in the slot machine 10, six-stage winning probabilities from “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared in advance, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. By carrying out, it is possible to set which of the winning probabilities the lottery process is to be executed on. It should be noted that “setting n+1” has a winning probability more advantageous to the player than “setting n”. Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 82 even if the setting values are at the same stage: the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Further, as a game state, a BB state exists in addition to the state of each of these lottery modes. In step S802, the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current game state is selected.

The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode will be described by taking the case of “setting 3” as an example. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. Note that in the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 20 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 19, an index value IV is set in the normal mode lottery table, and each winning index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV. The point value PV defines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free-run counter.

Specifically, for the index value IV=1, the second bell winning data, the first compensation winning data, the fifth compensation winning data, and the ninth compensation winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the first supplemental prize, the fifth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the first supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur.

In the slot machine 10, reel control capable of sliding up to 4 symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed until the specified time (190 msec) has elapsed after the stop buttons 42 to 44 were operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to easily achieve the winning corresponding to the winning combination, and also to prevent the winning corresponding to the non-winning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the slidable reels 32L, 32M, 32R is limited as described above, one reel 32L, 32M, 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbol may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the phenomenon is also called “missing”). Say). The first to twelfth supplementary prizes, the first to second watermelon prizes, and the BB prizes are prize modes in which the dropout may occur.

As shown in FIG. 19, the index value IV=2 is set with the second bell winning data, the second compensation winning data, the fourth compensation winning data, and the ninth compensation winning data. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The second bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur.

As shown in FIG. 19, the index value IV=3 is set with the second bell winning data, the second compensation winning data, the sixth compensation winning data, and the seventh compensation winning data. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The second bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize and the seventh supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize may occur.

As shown in FIG. 19, the index value IV=4 is set with the second bell winning data, the third compensation winning data, the fifth compensation winning data, and the seventh compensation winning data. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The second bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, any one of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize and the seventh supplementary prize may be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize will occur.

For the index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 19, the first bell winning data, the first compensation winning data, the third compensation winning data, the fourth compensation winning data, and the fifth compensation winning data, The eighth compensation winning data and the ninth compensation winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. However, in other cases, any of the first supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability of this omission is lower than in the case of index values IV=1 to 4.

For the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 19, the first bell winning data, the first compensation winning data, the second compensation winning data, the fourth compensation winning data, and the sixth compensation winning data, The eighth compensation winning data and the ninth compensation winning data are set. When the index value IV=6 is won, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. However, in other cases, any of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability of this omission is lower than in the case of index values IV=1 to 4.

As shown in FIG. 19, the index value IV=7 includes the first watermelon winning data, the second watermelon winning data, the tenth compensation winning data, the eleventh compensation winning data, and the twelfth compensation winning data. It is set. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize can be established. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the first watermelon prize nor the second watermelon prize will be won. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any of the tenth supplementary prize, the eleventh supplementary prize and the twelfth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the tenth supplementary prize, the eleventh supplementary prize and the twelfth supplementary prize will occur.

Bell replay win data is set in the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 20, the bell replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. ..

As shown in FIG. 19, the index value IV=9 is set with the first cherry replay winning data. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first cherry replay prize is surely achieved. appear.

As shown in FIG. 19, the second cherry replay winning data is set in the index value IV=10. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second cherry replay prize is surely won. appear.

As shown in FIG. 19, BB winning data is set in the index value IV=11. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 20, a BB winning may occur regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the BB winning may not occur. Here, the winning data other than the BB winning data is erased in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is achieved, and is not carried over to the games subsequent to the winning game. On the other hand, the BB winning data is stored and held until the BB winning is established even in the games subsequent to the winning game, except when the main RAM 84 is cleared. In this case, in a game in which the BB winning data is carried over, the index value IV value corresponding to the BB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored even though the BB winning data is already stored and held, and a plurality of BB winning data are not accumulated and stored. It becomes possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 19, the index value IV=12 to 15 is set with the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data. In this case, when the winning is the index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 20, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In some cases, the first RT replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. In addition, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=14, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 19 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the winning when the index value IV=3. And the probability of being won when the index value IV=4 is about 1/9.3, and the probability of being won when the index value IV=5 and when the index value IV=6. The probability of winning is about 1/12.9, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 is about 1/66.8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8. Is about 1/122, the probability of being won when the index value IV=9 is about 1/212, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/423. The probability of winning when IV=11 is about 1/218, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13, and the index value IV=14. The probability of winning in the case and the probability of winning in the case of the index value IV=15 are about 1/28.0, respectively.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as already described, as the winning data of the index values IV=12 to 15, the first RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 19). The probability of winning any of these index values IV=12 to 15 is about 1/7.0. When the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=12 to 15, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped corresponding to the winning combination in the stop order of the first stop, the second stop and the third stop. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 18) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, the first RT mode lottery table selected in the case of “setting 3” and the first RT mode will be described. 21 and 22 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first RT mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21, the winning combination data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 11 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the normal mode lottery table (FIG. It is the same as 19). In this case, the winning combination data and winning probabilities set for each of the index values IV=1 to 7 are set to the winning combinations that allow the game media to be awarded. Since they are the same, the types of winning combinations that allow the game media to be awarded and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, BB winning data is set to the index value IV=11 similarly to the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning the BB combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV=12 is different from that in the normal mode. In detail, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21, as the winning data of the index values IV=12 to 15, the second RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV=12 to 15 is about 1/1.10. When the index value IV=12 is won, as shown in FIG. 22, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second RT replay prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the normal replay prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=13, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a normal replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=14, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the second RT replay prize is It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a normal replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=15, the second RT replay prize is won when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a normal replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In the first RT mode, the winning order is any one of the index values IV=12 to 15, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop corresponds to the winning combination. In the case of, the second RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 18) becomes the second RT mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21, as the winning data of the index values IV=16 to 21, the first falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV=16 to 21 is about 1/10.9.

If the index value IV=16 is won in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 22, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, the first falling replay prize is the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It certainly occurs regardless of. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=17, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In the case where the index value IV=18 is won, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In the case where the index value IV=19 is won, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=20, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=21, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 18) becomes the normal mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=22. The probability of winning at the index value IV=22 is set higher than the probability of winning other winning combinations, and specifically, the winning is about 1/6.7. If the index value IV=22 is won, the normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. ..

In the first RT mode lottery table, a role that allows the replay prize to be established is set for the index values IV=8 to 10 and 12 to 22. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already described, the winning probability (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probability) of the winning combination that enables the establishment of the replay prize in the first RT mode is about 1. It is /2.8. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.3. That is, the first RT mode is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than in the normal mode.

Next, the second RT mode lottery table selected in the case of “setting 3” and the second RT mode will be described. 23 and 24 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 23, the winning combination data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 11 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 19) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 21). In this case, the winning combination data and winning probabilities set for each of the index values IV=1 to 7 are set to the winning combinations that allow the game media to be awarded. Since they are the same, the types of winning combinations that allow the game media to be awarded and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set to the index value IV=11 similarly to the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. It is the same. That is, the probability of winning the BB combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV=12 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 23, as the winning data of the index values IV=12 to 17, the second falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. .. The probability of winning any of these index values IV=12 to 17 is about 1/5.5.

If the index value IV=12 is won in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 24, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the second fall replay prize is associated with the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. It certainly occurs regardless of. In the case where the index value IV=13 is won, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=15, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is the index value IV=16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=17, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize certainly occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 18) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=18. The probability of winning at the index value IV=18 is set higher than the probability of winning other winning combinations, and specifically, the winning is about 1/6.3. When the index value IV=18 is won, the normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. ..

In the second RT mode lottery table, a role that allows the replay prize to be established is set for the index values IV=8 to 10 and 12 to 18. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities as described above, the winning probability of the roles (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probability) that enables the establishment of the replay prize in the second RT mode is about 1 It is /2.8. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.3. That is, the second RT mode is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/2.8. That is, the second RT mode has the same replay probability as the first RT mode. However, the replay probability in the first RT mode is not limited to the same configuration as the replay probability in the second RT mode. The second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, and the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

The normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the set value is high. The winning probability of the BB combination becomes higher, but the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of the set value. In addition, in a situation where a BB combination is won, the BB combination is excluded from the lottery target in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode so that the BB combination is not repeatedly won. .. In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 83 also refers to the BB lottery referenced in the lottery process (FIG. 18) when the BB state is set. The table is stored. In the BB lottery table, only two types of winning combinations, the second bell winning combination and the first watermelon winning combination, are set, and the winning probability of the second bell winning combination is set to about 1/1.1. The winning probability of the first watermelon combination is set to about 1/50. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media provided per unit number of games becomes higher than in the other game states.

Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 18 ), after selecting the lottery table (step S802), the index value IV is set to “1” (step S803), and the determination value DV used when determining the winning or losing of the winning combination is set. (Step S804). In the determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S801 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to "1" which is the current index value IV is added to this random number value. A new determination value DV is set.

Then, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid (step S805). In the winning/non-winning judgment of the winning combination, it is judged whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds “65535”. If the number exceeds "65535", the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 84 is executed (step S806). In the winning data acquisition process, all of the winning data set for the current index value IV in the reference lottery table is set in the main RAM 84. If the winning data is set, if the winning data is data other than the BB winning data, it is cleared to "0" after the end of the current game regardless of whether or not there is a win corresponding to the winning data. If it is winning data, "0" is cleared when the winning is achieved.

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S805: NO), it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S807), and it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not to win (step S808). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether or not the winning or hitting is determined, the process returns to step S804, and the winning or hitting determination of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S804, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the winning combination has been won, to obtain a new determination value DV, In step S805, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is valid based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S806 is executed, or when the negative determination is made in step S808, it means that the winning/judging determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the lottery corresponding process for executing the process corresponding to the current lottery result is executed (step S809). The lottery handling process will be described in detail later. Then, the lottery result command is set (step S810). The lottery result command is a command transmitted to the payout side MPU 86 in order to grasp the result of the winning/non-winning judgment of the winning combination, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the result of the winning/non-winning judgment of the winning combination. The lottery result command set here is transmitted to the payout side MPU 86 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

After that, the effect content determination process is executed (step S811). In the effect content determination processing, processing for determining the content of the outline of the effect executed in the speaker section 65, the effect light emitting section 66, and the image display device 67 in the current game is executed. As the content of the outline, high-expectancy content, medium-expectancy content, and low-expectancy content are set so that the degree of expectation that various profits will be generated gradually decreases. Various profits include transition to the BB state, transition to the AT state described later, transition to the additional state described later, and acquisition of trigger points described later. In the process of determining the effect contents, the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the winning combination in this game and the process result of the immediately preceding lottery corresponding process (step S809) is used to make the outline of the effect. Is decided by lottery. In this case, for example, even in a game in which a winning combination of BB is won, any of the high-expectation content, the medium-expectation content, and the low-expectation content can be selected, but the high-expectation content has the highest probability of being selected. The medium-expectancy content has the next highest probability of being selected, and the low-expectancy content has the lowest probability of being selected.

The information corresponding to the outline contents determined in the effect content determination processing is set in the game start command, and the game start command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S812). The game start command is a command for causing the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has started, and is for causing the production-side MPU 92 to recognize the outline content of the production determined by the main-side MPU 82. It is a command, and is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, in the game start response process (step S1602) in the command response process (FIG. 37) described later, the outline of the effect in the current game is grasped from the game start command. Then, the detailed contents of the effect are determined by lottery in a manner according to the grasped outline of the effect. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94, and the sound output control of the speaker section 65, the light emission control of the effect light emitting section 66, and the image display device according to the read data table. The display control of 67 is executed.

Here, in the effect content determination processing in the main MPU 82, the effect content lottery processing is executed in the same manner no matter which of the index values IV=1 to 6 wins in all game states. Regardless of whether or not the index value IV=12 or later is won, the lottery processing of the effect contents is executed in the same manner. Then, except when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the special display portion 63, in the case where any of the index values IV=1 to 6 and the index value IV=12 or later is won. The information that allows the individual index value IV to be specified is not transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the production MPU 92. As a result, although the special display unit 63 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the reels in the effect execution means such as the image display device 67 directly controlled by the effect-side MPU 92. It is possible to prevent the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R from being notified.

After that, the notification control process is executed (step S813). In the notification control process, which will be described in detail later, a process for controlling the display of the special display unit 63 is executed, and a notification corresponding to the display content on the special display unit 63 is displayed by the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71. Processing is executed so that at least one of the above is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the normal process (FIG. 15), after executing the lottery process (step S507), while the rotation end command is not received from the payout side MPU 86 (step S509: NO), the in-game monitoring process is executed. If the rotation end command is received (step S508) (step S509: YES), the process proceeds to step S510 and subsequent steps. Here, in the slot machine 10, the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed by the payout side MPU 86, and the drive side of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed by the payout side MPU 86. The MPU 82 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S508 and S509.

<Reel control process of payout side MPU 86>
The reel control process executed by the payout MPU 86 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The reel control process is executed in step S404 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In the reel control process, when one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not rotating, and the wait is not waiting to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S901 and step S902: NO). ), on the condition that the lottery result command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S903: YES), a stop information first setting process for setting stop information for reel stop control is executed (step S904). In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the lottery process result. For example, in the situation where the winning is achieved in any one of IV=1 to 7 and 12 to 15 in the normal mode, the stop information corresponding to the relationship between the stop order and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 20 is set.

If the process of step S904 has been executed, or if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are waiting for the start of rotation (step S902: YES), the rotation start process is executed (step S905). In the rotation start processing, if this time is the first processing time of the rotation start processing after the previous game ends, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the result of the lottery processing (FIG. 18) of the winning combination in the previous game. It is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of No. 1 is started, and if not, the remaining wait time is set. The wait time is subtracted every time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is started. Further, by setting the wait time, an affirmative determination is made in step S902. On the other hand, in the rotation start processing, if this time is not the first processing time of the rotation start processing after the previous game ends, it is determined whether the wait time has elapsed, and if the wait time has not elapsed, Ends the main rotation start process without starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the wait time has elapsed, the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the payout side RAM 88. As a result, the stepping motor control process of step S405 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating.

When any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating (step S901: YES), it is determined whether or not it is during the acceleration period (step S906). The period from the start of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R until the rotation speed becomes constant at a predetermined rotation speed corresponds to the acceleration period. If it is the acceleration period (step S906: YES), the present reel control process is ended as it is. As a result, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated during the acceleration period. When it is not in the acceleration period (step S906: NO), the processing from step S907 is executed. When the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the payout-side MPU 86 can generate a stop command by illuminating and displaying lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The player is notified of the fact.

In step S907, it is determined whether or not it is a situation in which control for stopping one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R needs to be performed. When the stop control is not being performed (step S907: NO), the stop operation is performed on condition that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated (step S908: YES). A process for stopping the rotation of the target reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed.

Specifically, first, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the base point position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S909). Specifically, the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input confirms the symbol number of the arrival symbol reaching the base point position. After that, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the payout side RAM 88 (step S910).

In the present slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, a stop mode for stopping the reaching symbol reaching the base point position as it is, Stopping mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, stopping mode after sliding for 2 symbols, stopping mode for stopping after sliding for 3 symbols, and stopping after sliding for 4 symbols Five patterns of stop modes, which are the stop mode to be performed, are prepared. Therefore, in step S910, one of the values "0" to "4" is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 84. After the number of slips is determined, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol which is actually stopped at the base point position (step S911).

Then, the stop command command is transmitted to the main MPU 82 (step S912). The stop command command is a command transmitted to the main MPU 82 to know which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop command. Note that the stop command command may be transmitted to the main MPU 82 when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that is the target of the stop command is stopped. The main MPU 82 monitors whether or not the stop command command is received from the payout MPU 86 in the in-game monitoring process of step S508 in the normal process (FIG. 15), and when the stop command command is received, responds to it. Execute the process.

For details of the in-game monitoring process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, when a stop command command is received from the payout MPU 86 (step S1001: YES), whether the current gaming state is the AT state or the BB state. It is determined (step S1002). The AT state means the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second bell winning when the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=1 to 4 in the normal mode, the first RT mode or the second RT mode. In the state in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first bell winning is notified when the stop order of the reels is notified and the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=5-6. is there. Further, in the AT state, when the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=12 to 15 in the normal mode, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first RT replay prize is notified, In the case where the index value IV=12 to 15 is won in the first RT mode, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second RT replay winning is notified, and the index value in the first RT mode is set. When the winning is achieved in any one of IV=16 to 21, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the establishment of the first falling replay prize is notified, and the index value IV=12 in the second RT mode. When any one of the items 1 to 17 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R for avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay prize is informed. The state in the AT state and the second RT mode corresponds to the ART state.

If it is in the AT state or the BB state (step S1002: YES), the regular stop command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S1004). If neither the AT state nor the BB state (step S1002: NO), it is not the situation in which the stop instruction to the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is generated while the left reel 32L is rotating (step S1003: NO), it is normal. A stop command is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 92 (step S1004), and in this situation (step S1003: YES), an irregular stop command is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 92 (step S1005).

The regular stop command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the regular stop order, and the non-regular stop command is for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a command for causing the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that the stop order is an irregular stop order. When these commands are set, they are transmitted to the performance side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

When the production side MPU 92 receives the regular stop command, in the other processing (step S1629) in the command corresponding processing (FIG. 37) described later, the execution contents of the production in the corresponding game are set to the one reel 32L, 32M, which is being rotated. A process for switching the 32R in response to the occurrence of the stop operation is executed. On the other hand, when the production-side MPU 92 receives the non-regular stop command, first, a process for displaying a warning image on the image display device 67 for notifying the player that the non-regular stop operation has been performed. And a process for outputting a warning sound from the speaker unit 65 for notifying the player that an irregular stop operation has been performed. Then, after displaying the warning image and outputting the warning sound for a predetermined period, the normal effect is restored. In addition, when an irregular stop operation is performed, the main MPU 82 may be configured to externally output a corresponding signal to the game hall management computer. This allows the management computer in the game hall to recognize that an unauthorized stop operation has been performed.

Here, when the rotation of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped before the left reel 32L in a situation other than the AT state and the BB state, the condition for shifting to the AT state is not established, There is a possibility of shifting to the 1RT mode or the second RT mode. On the other hand, when an irregular stop operation is performed, the notification as described above is executed so that the player can be prompted to stop the irregular stop operation. At the same time, it becomes possible to inform the manager of the game hall that an irregular stop operation is being performed. However, even if an irregular stop operation is performed, the above-mentioned notification is only executed, and the processing for making the player disadvantageous is not executed. Further, in a game after the game in which the non-regular stop operation is performed, the process for coping with the non-regular stop operation is not executed. Accordingly, even if the player leaves the seat immediately after performing the irregular stop operation, it is possible to prevent the influence of the irregular stop operation from reaching the player thereafter.

Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 25 ), when the stop symbol is determined in step S911, an affirmative determination is made in step S907 in the next processing time, and the flow proceeds to step S913. In step S913, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stopping symbol are equal (step S913), and if they are equal, that reel 32L. , 32M, 32R are stopped to perform reel stop processing (step S914). Then, it is determined whether or not all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S915). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is executed (step S916). In the stop information second setting process, the stop information stored in the payout side RAM 88 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process is changed after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. .. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning data that has been set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop result of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. To do.

When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (step S915: YES), winning determination processing is executed (step S917). The winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the winning determination process, first, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML on the left reel 32L, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML on the middle reel 32M, and the main line ML on the right reel 32R. The type of the stopped symbols is grasped (steps S1101 to S1103). When grasping the type of symbol, the 2-byte data set for each symbol type is read from the payout side ROM 87. Then, as the logical operation process of the symbol combination, the 2-byte data corresponding to the symbol combination is derived by ANDing the respective 2-byte data grasped in steps S1101 to S1103 with bits having the same order. Step S1104).

After that, it is determined whether the 2-byte data derived in step S1104 corresponds to any winning data (step S1105). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, a prize-winning process is executed (steps S1106 to S1110).

In the prize-winning process, if the winning that has occurred this time corresponds to the award of a game medium (step S1106: YES), the payout side RAM 88 is provided with information on the number of awarding game media set for the award. It is set in the addition target counter 88b (step S1107). Then, display control of the award number display unit 62 is performed so that the affix number of the game medium is displayed (step S1108). The content displayed on the number-of-addition display unit 62 is erased when the next game is started.

When the information on the number of game media to be provided is set in the award target counter 88b of the payout side RAM 88, the game medium corresponding to the number of awards is provided in the medium affixing process (step S406) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Be seen. The medium adding process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the grant target counter 88b is 1 or more (step S1201: YES), if the value of the virtual medal counter 88a of the payout side RAM 88 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1202: YES), the value of the virtual medal counter 88a. Is incremented by 1 (step S1203), and the value of the assignment target counter 88b is decremented by 1 (step S1204). If the value of the virtual medal counter 88a after adding 1 is equal to or more than the upper limit storage number (step S1205: YES), the upper limit storage command is transmitted to the main MPU 82 (step S1206). When receiving the upper limit storage command, the main MPU 82 sets “1” in the upper limit storage flag of the main RAM 84. The conditions for clearing the upper limit storage flag to "0" are as already described.

When the value of the grant target counter 88b is 1 or more and the value of the virtual medal counter 88a is the upper limit storage number or more (step S1201: YES, step S1202: NO), the drive signal is output to the hopper device 53 and the medal is displayed. It is determined whether or not is being paid (step S1207). If the medal is not being paid out (step S1207: NO), the output of the drive signal to the hopper device 53 is started to start the payout of the medal (step S1208). When the medals are being paid out (step S1207: YES), whether the payout of one medal is specified by the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 in the sensor monitoring process (step S402) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not (step S1209). When the payout of one medal is specified (step S1209: YES), the value of the grant target counter 88b is decremented by 1 (step S1210).

As a result of executing the processing of step S1204 or step S1210, when the value of the assignment target counter 88b is "0" (step S1211: YES), the rotation end command is transmitted to the main MPU 82 (step S1212). The rotation end command causes the main MPU 82 to recognize that the rotations of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped and further the processing on the payout side MPU 86 corresponding to the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has ended. This command is a command, and information about the number of game media to be given in this game is set in the rotation end command. When the medal payout operation is being executed in the hopper device 53 (step S1213: YES), the payout operation is stopped by stopping the output of the drive signal to the hopper device 53 (step S1214). ).

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (FIG. 27 ), when the currently generated winning does not correspond to the addition of the game medium (step S1106: NO), the information corresponding to the current winning result is set in the rotation end command ( Step S1109). Then, the rotation end command in which the information corresponding to the winning result is set is transmitted to the main MPU 82 (step S1110). On the other hand, when the winning combination of the winning combination has not occurred in the current game (step S1105: NO), the rotation end command corresponding to the non-winning of the winning combination is transmitted to the main MPU 82 (step S1110).

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 15 ), when the rotation end command is received from the payout side MPU 86 (step S509: YES), the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed (step S510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the progress standby counter 84a provided in the main RAM 84 is "0" (step S511: YES). The progress standby counter 84a is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not a situation of waiting for the progress of the game based on the operation of the player and the start of a new game is awaited. A value is set in the progress standby counter 84a by a predetermined process described later, and the set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process of step S307 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. Then, when the value of the progress standby counter 84a is 1 or more, by waiting in the process of step S511, the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player are awaited. If the value of the progress standby counter 84a is "0", the process proceeds to step S512.

In step S512, it is determined whether any replay prize has occurred in the current game. When no replay prize has occurred in the current game (step S512: NO), the acceptance permission process is executed in the same manner as step S615 of the insertion handling process (FIG. 19) (step S513). As a result, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. On the other hand, if any replay prize has occurred in the current game (step S512: YES), the acceptance permission process is not executed. As a result, the selector 52 is maintained in the reception prohibited state, and even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. It

<Corresponding processing at the end of the game>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29, the corresponding process at the end of the game executed in step S510 of the normal process (FIG. 15) will be described.

If the game is not in the BB state (step S1301: NO) and is not in the AT state (step S1302: NO), the RT mode transition process (step S1303) and transition management process (step S1304) are executed. To do. In the RT mode transition processing, when it is determined that the first RT replay prize is generated in this game based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and in the current game When it is specified that the second RT replay prize has been generated, the mode is shifted to the second RT mode. In addition, in the transition processing of the RT mode, when it is determined that the second falling replay prize is generated in this game based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, the transition to the first RT mode is performed, When it is specified that the first falling replay prize has occurred in the game, the game mode is shifted to the normal mode.

In the transition management process, which will be described in detail later, a process for monitoring whether or not the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied and transitioning to the AT state when the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied To execute. In the process for shifting to the AT state, "1" is set in the AT state counter provided in the main RAM 84. The AT state counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the AT state is present, and to specify the stay mode in the AT state when the main MPU 82 is in the AT state. In the non-AT state, the value of the AT state counter is "0", and in the AT state, the value of the AT state counter is 1 or more. By setting the AT state counter to "1", the ART preparation state process (step S1306) described later will be executed in the next processing time of the corresponding process at the end of the game. Further, in the processing for shifting to the AT state, the value of the initial continuous game number for one execution of the ART state is set in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 84, and the remaining number provided in the main RAM 84 is set. The value of the remaining execution times of the ART state is set in the ART execution counter. The ART game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in one execution time in the ART state, and the remaining ART execution counter is the main MPU 82 for the remaining execution time in the ART state. This is a counter for specifying.

When the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more, it means that the state is the AT state. Therefore, a positive determination is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1305. In step S1305, the value of the AT state counter is grasped, and the process corresponding to the grasped value is executed. Specifically, if the value of the AT state counter is "1", the ART preparation state process is executed (step S1306), and if the value of the AT state counter is "2", the ART state process is executed (step S1307). ), if the value of the AT state counter is "3", the addition state process is executed (step S1308), and if the value of the AT state counter is "4", the ART end branch process is executed (step S1309). Each of these processes will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S1304 is executed, or when the process of any of steps S1306 to S1309 is executed, whether or not a BB winning is generated in this game based on the content of the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86. It is determined (step S1310). If a BB prize has occurred in the current game (step S1310: YES), or if the current game has been executed in the BB state (step S1301: YES), the BB process is executed (step S1311). ).

In the process for BB, if a BB winning is generated in this game, the game state is shifted to the BB state by setting "1" to the BB state flag provided in the main RAM 84. As a result, the BB lottery table will be referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 18) in the next and subsequent games. In addition, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has been entered to the effect MPU 92, the speaker unit 65, the effect light emitting unit 66, and the image display device 67 start the effect for the BB condition. When the BB state is entered, the BB winning data is erased from the main RAM 84 to release the BB winning state.

In the BB process in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the game medium is added in the current game based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, and when the game medium is added, The number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total provided number counter provided in the main RAM 84. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total added number counter after the addition is greater than or equal to the value corresponding to the end reference number. If it is less than the value corresponding to the termination reference number, the BB process is terminated as it is. If the value is equal to or more than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB state is cleared by clearing the BB state flag of the main RAM 84 to "0". Further, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the effect side MPU 92, the effect for the BB state in the speaker section 65, the effect light emitting section 66 and the image display device 67 is ended.

When the BB state is finished, the lottery mode becomes the normal mode regardless of which mode is the lottery mode before the start of the BB state. Further, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparatory state process described below is executed after the BB state ends regardless of the state before the start of the BB state. When the AT state is changed to the BB state, the value of the remaining ART execution counter, which will be described later, is incremented by 1 in order to increase the number of times of execution of the ART state by one. Further, when the BB state is started in the add-on state described later, the add-on state transition flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" to cause the transition to the add-on state again after the BB state is finished. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S1310, or if the process of step S1311 is executed, the game end command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S1312). The game end command is a command for causing the effecting MPU 92 to recognize that one game has ended, and the command is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). It

<Processing contents for shifting to AT state ST5>
Next, the content of processing for shifting to the AT state ST5 will be described. First, the flow of the game in which the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG.

In the gaming state that is neither the AT state ST5 nor the BB state, the opportunity point lottery process is executed when the opportunity point acquisition opportunity occurs, and the opportunity point provided in the main RAM 84 when the acquisition point is obtained. The value of the trigger point acquired this time is added to the counter 84b. The trigger for the acquisition of the trigger point occurs when the winning combination is achieved by any of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination in the main MPU 82. The trigger point counter 84b is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the value of the trigger point that has been acquired. The minimum possible value of the trigger point counter 84b is "0" and the maximum possible value is "5". When the value of the trigger point is added to the trigger point counter 84b, the lottery group information is stored in the information storage area 111 provided in the main RAM 84.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the information storage area 111. The information storage area 111 is provided with a first storage area 112a, a second storage area 112b, a third storage area 112c, a fourth storage area 112d and a fifth storage area 112e. Each of the first to fifth storage areas 112a to 112e is an area for storing one lottery group information. These storage areas 112a to 112e are provided by the same number as the maximum value that can be taken by the trigger point counter 84b, and one lottery group information is created each time the value of the trigger point counter 84b is incremented by one. It is stored in the storage areas 112a to 112e. In this case, the lottery group information is stored in the order of the first storage area 112a→the second storage area 112b→the third storage area 112c→the fourth storage area 112d→the fifth storage area 112e. When the value of the trigger point counter 84b is incremented by 2, the lottery group information is stored in each of the two storage areas 112a to 112e.

The lottery group information is information that determines the probability of being an AT win in the AT transition lottery processing that determines whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5. As will be described later in detail, as the lottery group information, the first group information, the second group information, the third group information, the fourth group information, and the fifth group information are set, and the first group information is set. In the order of →second group information→third group information→fourth group information→fifth group information, the probability of becoming an AT win increases in the AT transfer lottery process. The lottery group information stored in the information storage area 111 when the trigger points are added is the first group information. Then, when the promotion challenge state ST3 described later occurs, promotion to any one of the second to fifth group information may occur.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30, when the number of games exhausted is 100 in a situation in which the opportunity points can be acquired, if the value of the opportunity point counter 84b is 1 or more and 4 or less, the first transition challenge. State ST2 occurs. The first transition challenge state ST2 is a state in which the AT transition lottery process is executed a number of times corresponding to the value of the trigger point counter 84b. That is, basically, a period during which the opportunity points can be acquired over 100 games (hereinafter, this period is referred to as an acquisition challenge state ST1) is set, and when the opportunity points are acquired during the 100 games, the first transition is made. The state shifts to the challenge state ST2, and the AT shift lottery process is executed for the number of times corresponding to the value of the trigger point acquired in the last 100 games.

Here, an example of the display content of the image display device 67 in the acquisition challenge state ST1 and the first transition challenge state ST2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b). FIG. 32A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of display contents of the image display device 67 in the acquisition challenge state ST1. As shown in FIG. 32(a), the image display device 67 displays the effect display area 121 in which various effect images including the effect character G4 are displayed, and the number of remaining continuous games in the acquisition challenge state ST1. The game number display area 122 in which the image shown is displayed, the point number display area 123 in which the image showing the value of the acquired trigger point is displayed, and the acquisition challenge executed without the transition to the AT state ST5. The number of laps display area 124 in which an image showing the number of laps in the state ST1 is displayed is set.

In the effect display area 121, effects corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination and effects corresponding to the winning result are executed in each game in the acquisition challenge state ST1. In the number-of-games display area 122, "100 games remaining" is displayed when a new lap in the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started, and thereafter, "remaining N games" each time the game is consumed in the acquisition challenge state ST1. Is subtracted by one.

In the point number display area 123, the number of unit display areas 125 corresponding to the maximum possible value of the trigger point counter 84b is displayed. Then, the display content in the unit display areas 125 corresponding to the number of acquired trigger points is the display content corresponding to the first group information, and the display content in the other unit display areas 125 is the lottery group information. The displayed content corresponds to the fact that it does not exist. More specifically, each time the trigger point is acquired, the display content is sequentially changed from the left unit display area 125 to the display content corresponding to the first group information. In the case of FIG. 32A, since the value of the trigger point counter 84b is “2”, the two unit display areas 125 from the left in the point number display area 123 are the display contents corresponding to the first group information. The remaining three unit display areas 125 have display contents corresponding to that lottery group information is not stored.

In the number of laps display area 124, when the AT state ST5 ends and the acquisition challenge state ST1 is newly started, "0th lap" is displayed, and the AT state of the acquired challenge state ST1 after one lap has ended When the next lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started without the transition to ST5, M of “Mth lap” is incremented by 1. In the slot machine 10, when the one lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 occurs 10 times without the transition to the AT state ST5, the AT state is surely established regardless of the presence or absence of the lottery group information and the content of the lottery group information. Transition to ST5 occurs. In this case, the player can confirm the number of laps display region 124 by displaying the number of laps of the acquisition challenge state ST1 executed without the transition to the AT state ST5 in the number of laps display region 124. Thus, it becomes possible to grasp the number of games required for the AT state ST5 to occur reliably.

FIG. 32B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of display contents of the image display device 67 in the first transition challenge state ST2. As shown in FIG. 32B, even in the first transition challenge state ST2, in the image display device 67, as in the acquisition challenge state ST1, the effect display area 121, the game number display area 122, and the point number. The display area 123 and the number of turns display area 124 are set. In the number-of-games display area 122, an image of "remaining 0 game" is displayed because the first lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 has already ended and the first transition challenge state ST2 has occurred. In the number-of-points display area 123, the display content in the unit display area 125 corresponding to the number of trigger points acquired until the current first transition challenge state ST2 occurs corresponds to the first group information. It is displayed. Further, in the number-of-laps display area 124, an image showing the number of laps of the acquisition challenge state ST1 executed without the transition to the AT state ST5 before the current first transition challenge state ST2 occurs is displayed. It

In the effect display area 121, a plurality of (specifically, three) symbols G5 to G7 are displayed, and an effect character G4 is displayed behind the symbols G5 to G7. For details of the display contents of the symbols G5 to G7, three cubic base symbol images G8 to G10 are displayed side by side in the lateral direction, and numerical symbols G5 to G7 are displayed in front of each of the base symbol images G8 to G10. Is displayed. Then, the base symbol images G8 to G10 rotate in the vertical direction around the rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the center of the base symbol images G8 to G10, and the front face of each of the base symbol images G8 to G10 is accompanied by the rotation. The symbols G5 to G7 displayed in are changed.

In the first transition challenge state ST2, the AT transition lottery processing is executed over the number of times corresponding to the value of the trigger point acquired in the immediately preceding 100 games, as described above. In this case, the AT transfer lottery process is executed once for each execution of one game. In detail, as shown in FIG. 31, an execution area 113 is provided in the information storage area 111 of the main RAM 84, and the execution area 113 is changed from the first storage area 112a each time a new game is started. The lottery group information is shifted, and at the same time, the lottery group information is shifted from the nth storage area to the (n-1)th storage area. Then, the AT transfer lottery process is executed using the lottery group information stored in the execution area 113 in each game. As described above, the AT transition lottery process is executed once for the execution of one game, so that the number of games corresponding to the value of the trigger point is executed in the first transition challenge state ST2.

In the configuration, when one game is started in the first transition challenge state ST2 and the AT transition lottery process is executed, the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7 in the effect display area 121 and the content of the stop result after the variable display. The lottery result of the AT transfer lottery process is notified by. Specifically, when the result of the AT transfer lottery process is a deviation result, the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7 started upon execution of the AT transfer lottery process is a combination of symbols different from the combination of the same symbols. It will be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the AT transfer lottery process is AT winning, the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7 started by the execution of the AT transfer lottery process is terminated by stopping the display of the same symbol combination. Further, the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 may be executed a plurality of times for one AT transition lottery process, and in this case, the main RAM 84 when the game corresponding to the AT transition lottery process is finished. By setting a value in the progress standby counter 84a, the progress of the game based on the player's operation and the start of a new game are in a standby state, and the symbols G5 to G7 are used by using those games and the standby period. The variable display times are executed multiple times. As described above, the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 are executed a plurality of times regardless of whether the result of the AT transfer lottery process is a miss result or the AT win. Then, in the case of the result of deviation, in the last variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7, the variable display of the central symbol G6 is displayed with the symbols of the same type as the left symbol G5 and the right symbol G7 being stopped and displayed. The reach variation display is performed, and finally, in the state where a symbol different from the symbol forming the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed as the left symbol G5 and the right symbol G7 is stopped and displayed. The variable display of the symbol G6 is finished. On the other hand, in the case of AT winning, the variable display of the central symbol G6 is displayed with the symbols of the same type as the left symbol G5 and the right symbol G7 stopped and displayed in the variable display times of the last symbols G5 to G7. Reach variation display is performed, and finally, in the state where the same symbols as the symbols forming the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed as the left symbol G5 and the right symbol G7 are stopped and displayed. The variable display of the symbol G6 is finished.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30, when AT win is selected in the AT shift lottery processing executed in the first shift challenge state ST2, shift to the AT state ST5 occurs. In this case, even if the value of the trigger point is still 1 or more, if the AT is won, the AT transition lottery process is executed with the lottery group information corresponding to the value of the remaining trigger points as a trigger. Without this, the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs. When the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs in the situation where the value of the trigger point is 1 or more, when the AT state ST5 ends, the first transition challenge state ST2 does not occur but the acquisition challenge state ST1. The AT transfer lottery process is executed, which is triggered by the lottery group information corresponding to the values of the remaining trigger points.

As described above, the transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 occurs when 100 games are exhausted in the acquisition challenge state ST1. However, even if 100 games are not exhausted in the acquisition challenge state ST1 When the value of the point counter 84b reaches the maximum value "5" on the way, the promotion challenge state ST3 is entered, and finally the first transition challenge state ST2 is entered. In this case, since the transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 may occur without exhausting 100 games, the first transition challenge state ST2 is set by setting the value of the trigger point counter 84b to “5” which is the maximum value. It is possible to reduce the number of digestion games required for the transition. Then, the trigger point is acquired when the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination. In other words, it is possible to reduce the number of digestive games required to shift to the first shift challenge state ST2 according to the game content based on the player's operation. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the acquisition challenge state ST1.

Particularly, in a configuration in which the number of executions of the AT transition lottery process executed in the first transition challenge state ST2 increases as the number of trigger points increases, when the value of the trigger point counter 84b reaches the maximum value of "5", By adopting a configuration in which the number of digestive games required to shift to the 1st transition challenge state ST2 is reduced, when the situation in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the AT state ST5 becomes high occurs, until the 1st transition challenge state ST2 This will reduce the number of digestion games required. As a result, it is possible to obtain a plurality of types of profits by setting the value of the trigger point counter 84b to the maximum value, and it is possible to increase the attention to obtaining the trigger points.

In the promotion challenge state ST3, the promotion lottery process of the lottery group information is executed a number of times corresponding to the maximum value of the trigger point counter 84b. In the promotion lottery process, although details will be described later, whether or not to promote the first group information to any of the second to fifth group information is determined by a lottery, and in the case of promotion, the second to fifth groups are selected. Which of the information is promoted is determined by lottery. The promotion lottery process is executed once for each game execution. Therefore, in the promotion challenge state ST3, the number of games corresponding to the maximum value of the trigger point counter 84b is executed.

33A and 33B are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of display contents of the image display device 67 in the promotion challenge state ST3. As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, even in the promotion challenge state ST3, as in the acquisition challenge state ST1 and the first transition challenge state ST2, the image display device 67 includes the effect display area 121. The game number display area 122, the point number display area 123, and the number of laps display area 124 are set. In the number-of-games display area 122, an image of “remaining 0 game” is displayed because one round of the acquisition challenge state ST1 has already ended and the promotion challenge state ST3 has occurred. Further, in the lap count display area 124, an image showing the number of laps of the acquisition challenge state ST1 executed without the transition to the AT state ST5 before the current promotion challenge state ST3 occurs is displayed.

In the point number display area 123, at the start of the promotion challenge state ST3, as shown in FIG. 33A, all the display contents of the five unit display areas 125 are the display contents corresponding to the first group information. Has become. After that, every time one game is executed, the promotion lottery process is executed in order from the lottery group information corresponding to the unit display area 125 on the right side. When the promotion is won, the unit display area 125 which is the promotion winning The display content of is changed to the display content corresponding to the lottery group information of the promotion destination as shown in FIG. For example, the first group information corresponds to white, the second group information corresponds to blue, the third group information corresponds to yellow, the fourth group information corresponds to green, and the fifth group information corresponds to red. At the start of promotion challenge state ST3. If there is, all of the five unit display areas 125 are set to white as shown in FIG. Then, for example, when the promotion lottery processing corresponding to the third game in the promotion challenge state ST3 determines that promotion has been won and promotion to the fourth group information has been decided, as shown in FIG. The display content of the eye unit display area 125 is changed from white corresponding to the first group information to green corresponding to the fourth group information. This allows the player to clearly recognize what number of lottery group information has been promoted and which group information the lottery group information has been promoted to. can do.

In the effect display area 121, as shown in FIG. 33(a), an image for clearly indicating to the player that the promotion challenge state ST3 is in progress is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 33B, an image showing which lottery group information is the lottery group information that is the target of the promotion lottery process in each game in the promotion challenge state ST3 is an effect display area 121. And the result of each promotion lottery process is displayed in the effect display area 121.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30, when the five games are executed in the promotion challenge state ST3 and the promotion lottery processing is executed for all the five lottery group information, the promotion challenge state ST3 ends and the first transition challenge. Transition to state ST2. Then, in the first transition challenge state ST2, the AT transition lottery process is performed on the lottery group information that was the target of the promotion lottery process in the promotion challenge state ST3.

If the value of the trigger point counter 84b is 1 or more when 100 games are exhausted in the acquisition challenge state ST1, the process proceeds to the first transition challenge state ST2 as described above, but the value of the trigger point counter 84b. Is 0, the state shifts to the second shift challenge state ST4. The second transition challenge state ST4 is a state that continues for 10 games, and the AT transition lottery process is executed regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination in each game, and the AT is won. If so, the state shifts to the AT state ST5. Further, even if the AT winning is not obtained in the AT transfer lottery processing, if the winning is any one of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the lottery processing (FIG. 18) of the game, the conversion lottery processing is performed. When the conversion lottery process is executed and the conversion win is achieved, the AT win is converted. The degree of expectation that the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs in the second transition challenge state ST4 is 25%. This transition expectation is higher than the expectation that transition to the AT state ST5 will occur in the first transition challenge state ST2 that has occurred when the value of the trigger point counter 84b is “1”, and the value of the trigger point counter 84b Is lower than the expectation that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur in the first transition challenge state ST2 that occurs in a situation where is 2 or more. As a result, in the acquisition challenge state ST1, the player has the fact that, in the situation where the opportunity point is “1”, the number of exhausting games is 100, and the number of exhausting games is 100 with the opportunity point being “0”. You will expect it. Therefore, the objects that the player expects in the acquisition challenge state ST1 are diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the processing executed in each of the acquisition challenge state ST1, the first transition challenge state ST2, the promotion challenge state ST3, and the second transition challenge state ST4 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the lottery correspondence processing executed by the main MPU 82. The lottery correspondence process is executed in step S809 in the lottery process (FIG. 18). Since the lottery process (FIG. 18) is executed at the start of the game, the lottery corresponding process is also executed at the start of the game, that is, before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started.

In the lottery correspondence process, not the AT state ST5 (step S1401: NO), but also “1” is set to all of the promotion challenge flag, the second transition challenge flag, and the first transition challenge flag provided in the main RAM 84. If not (step S1402 to step S1404: NO), the process proceeds to step S1405. The first transition challenge flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is in the first transition challenge state ST2, and the second transition challenge flag is in the second transition challenge state ST4. Is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify, and the promotion challenge flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the promotion challenge state ST3.

In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the winning has been achieved by any of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the current lottery processing (FIG. 18). When the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=7 to 11 (step S1405: YES), the lottery table for the trigger points corresponding to the current gaming state and the current winning combination is transferred from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Reading (step S1406), using the lottery table for the trigger points, it is determined whether or not the trigger points are acquired, and when the trigger points are acquired, the value of the trigger points to be acquired is determined. A lottery process for executing is executed (step S1407).

FIG. 35(a) and FIG. 35(b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the lottery table for trigger points. In the acquisition challenge state ST1, there are a low probability state in which acquisition of trigger points is relatively unlikely to occur and a high probability state in which acquisition of trigger points is relatively likely to occur. FIG. 35(a) corresponds to the low probability state, and FIG. 35(b) corresponds to the high probability state.

When the index values IV=7 to 11 are compared, the larger the index value IV is, the lower the probability of being won in the lottery process (FIG. 18) is. In this case, in both of the low-probability state and the high-probability state, the index value IV, which has a low probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 18), has a higher probability of acquiring the trigger point. It is set and the expected acquisition value of the trigger point is a large value. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning a winning combination with a low winning probability.

The difference between the low-probability state and the high-probability state will be described. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV=11, that is, when the BB winning data is set, 100% of the trigger points are acquired in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, in the low probability state, 1 point and 2 points are set as trigger points to be acquired, whereas in the high probability state, only 2 points are set as trigger points to be acquired. Also, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=9 or 10, 100% of the trigger points are acquired in the high probability state, whereas the acquisition of the trigger points is not generated in the low probability state. There is. In addition, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=7 or 8, the acquisition of the trigger points may not occur in both the low probability state and the high probability state, but the high probability state has the lower probability state. It is easier to obtain the opportunity points. In addition, the probability that two trigger points will be acquired is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state regardless of the index value IV=7 to 10. With the above configuration, the expected acquisition value of the trigger points per unit game number is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

When a new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started, the high probability state is surely set. Then, the transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state does not occur until the predetermined reference number of games (for example, 30 games) are exhausted in the new orbiting acquisition challenge state ST1. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity to acquire one or more trigger points in the acquisition challenge state ST1. In particular, when the new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started without the transition to the AT state ST5 after the predetermined lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is completed, the transition to the AT state ST5 does not occur. On the other hand, the player may be disappointed and may be less motivated to continue the game. On the other hand, when a new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started, the high-probability state is surely set for a predetermined number of games, so that the acquisition challenge state ST1 of the current lap ends. The player can be expected to shift to the AT state ST5 later, and the motivation for continuing the game can be prevented from diminishing.

In step S1406, the high probability state corresponds to the high probability state, and the lottery table for the trigger points corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (FIG. 18) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. In the low probability state, the lottery table for the trigger points corresponding to the low probability state and corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of this time is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Then, in step S1407, the value of the opportunity point lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the opportunity point lottery table read in step S1406. To do.

When the result of the trigger point lottery process is the acquisition winning of the trigger point (step S1408: YES), “1” is set to the acquisition winning flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1409), and at the same time, in the main RAM 84. The addition processing to the trigger point counter 84b is executed (step S1410). The acquisition winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the acquisition of the opportunity point has occurred in this game. In step S1410, as a result of the trigger point lottery process (step S1407), when one point is selected as the trigger point acquisition target, “1” is added to the trigger point counter 84b to acquire the trigger point acquisition target. When 2 points are selected as, the trigger point counter 84b is incremented by "2".

Here, in step S811 of the lottery process (FIG. 18), as already described, the effect content determination process for determining the outline content of the effect content in the current game is executed. In the determination process, in the acquisition challenge state ST1, the probability of selecting the high expectation content is higher when the acquisition of the trigger points occurs than when the acquisition of the trigger points does not occur. The higher the target value is, the higher the probability that the high-expectation content will be selected than the case where the target value is small. Then, a game start command corresponding to the result of the effect contents determination processing is transmitted to the effect MPU 92 (step S812).

The contents of the processing executed by the rendering MPU 92 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect control process repeatedly executed in the effect side MPU 92 in a short cycle (for example, 2 msec). In the effect control process, when a new command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S1501: YES), a command corresponding process is executed (step S1502). In the command handling process, the control table corresponding to the received command is read from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 so that the production corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 82 can be executed. A large number of pointer information is set in the control table, and information for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 65 and light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 are associated with each of the pointer information. A combination of information and information for performing display control of the image display device 67 is set. The production-side MPU 92 updates the pointer information to be referenced by one each time the performance control process is newly executed, and refers to the combination of the above-described information corresponding to the updated pointer information in the new execution time. By doing so, the sound output control of the speaker unit 65, the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66, and the display control of the image display device 67 are executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501 or when the process of step S1502 is executed, the sound output control process (step S1503), the light emission control process (step S1504), the image control process (step S1505), and the drive control of the movable object. The process (step S1506) is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed by referring to the sound output control information corresponding to the current pointer information of the reference target in the control table currently read in the effect side RAM 94. .. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed by referring to the light emission control information corresponding to the current pointer information of the reference target in the control table currently read in the effect side RAM 94. In the image control process, the display control of the image display device 67 is executed by referring to the information for display control corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target in the control table currently read in the effect side RAM 94.

In the drive control process of the movable object, when the information for moving the stop order notification device 71 from the initial position to the notification time position is set, the stop order arranged in the notification time position by the notification time position detection sensor 78 is set. The drive signal is output to the rotation drive unit 74 so that the stop order notification device 71 moves toward the notification time position until the notification device 71 is detected. In addition, in the drive control process of the movable object, when the information for moving the stop order notification device 71 from the notification position to the initial position is set, the stop order arranged in the initial position by the initial position detection sensor 76 is set. The drive signal is output to the rotation drive unit 74 so that the stop order notification device 71 moves toward the initial position until the notification device 71 is detected.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the command corresponding process executed in step S1502 of the effect control process (FIG. 36). In the command handling process, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S1601: YES), the game start handling process is executed (step S1602). In the game start handling process, based on the game start command received this time, it is specified which of the high-expectation content, medium-expectation content, and low-expectation content the outline content of the effect content is. Then, the effect lottery process for determining the details of the effect is executed in a manner in accordance with the content of the specified outline, and the control table corresponding to the result of the effect lottery process is read from the effect ROM 93 to the effect RAM 94.

As described above, in the acquisition challenge state ST1, the main MPU 82 executes the effect content determination process in a manner corresponding to the presence or absence of acquisition of the opportunity point and the value of the opportunity point that is the acquisition target, and the effect content. A game start command corresponding to the result of the determination process of is transmitted from the main MPU 82. Therefore, in the acquisition challenge state ST1, when an effect having a high degree of expectation is executed as an effect executed on the image display device 67 or the like, the player acquires an opportunity point and a large value of the opportunity point. You will expect that.

Next, the migration management process executed by the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The migration management process is executed in step S1304 in the game end process (FIG. 29). Since the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game, the shift management process is also executed at the end of the game, that is, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped.

In the migration management process, if "1" is not set in any of the promotion challenge flag, the second migration challenge flag, and the first migration challenge flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1701 to step S1703: NO), the process proceeds to step S1704. Then, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the acquisition winning flag of the main RAM 84. As described above, the acquisition winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the acquisition of the trigger points has occurred in the current game, and the trigger point lottery process (step 34) in the lottery correspondence process (FIG. 34). In step S1407, "1" is set when the opportunity point acquisition is won. If the acquisition winning flag is set to "1" (step S1704: YES), the trigger point update process is executed (step S1705).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the process of updating the trigger points. In the process of updating the trigger point, first, the acquisition winning flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1801). After that, the value of the trigger point counter 84b of the main RAM 84 is read (step S1802). Then, among the first to fifth storage areas 112a to 112e of the information storage area 111, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value of the trigger point counter 84b and the lottery group information to which the lottery group information has not yet been set. The first group information is set as information (step S1803). For example, when the lottery group information is already set in the first storage area 112a and the second storage area 112b and the lottery group information is not set in the other storage areas 112c to 112e, the value of the trigger point counter 84b is " 3”, the lottery group information needs to be set in the first storage area 112a to the third storage area 112c, so the first group information is set in the third storage area 112c as lottery group information. Further, for example, in a situation where the lottery group information is already set in the first storage area 112a and the second storage area 112b, and the lottery group information is not set in the other storage areas 112c to 112e, the value of the trigger point counter 84b When the number is “4”, the lottery group information needs to be set in the first storage area 112a to the fourth storage area 112d, so that the lottery group is set in each of the third storage area 112c and the fourth storage area 112d. The first group information is set as the information.

After that, the point acquisition command is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 92 (step S1804). The point acquisition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new opportunity point has been acquired, and the command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Sent. Further, in the point acquisition command, information on the value currently set in the trigger point counter 84b is set.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the point acquisition command from the main side MPU 82, an affirmative judgment is made in step S1603 in the command corresponding process (FIG. 37), and the control table corresponding to the point acquisition command received this time is read (step S1604). ). The sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed according to the control table to output a sound corresponding to the acquisition of the trigger point, and the light emission control of the performance light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table to generate the trigger. A luminous effect corresponding to the point acquisition is executed. Further, by controlling the image display device 67 according to the control table, the number of points corresponding to the value of the trigger point counter 84b set in the point acquisition command is set in the point number display area 123 of the image display device 67. The display content of the unit display area 125 is the display content corresponding to the first group information. Further, in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67, the display effect corresponding to the new acquisition of the trigger point is executed.

In the process of updating the trigger point, when the value of the trigger point counter 84b is the maximum value of "5" (step S1805: YES), the process for shifting to the promotion challenge state ST3 in steps S1806 to S1809. To execute. The processing of these steps S1806 to S1809 will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the transition management process (FIG. 38 ), “1” is set in the promotion challenge flag of the main RAM 84 when a negative determination is made in step S1704 or as a result of the process of updating the trigger point (step S1705). If not (step S1706: NO), the state transition process is executed (step S1707). In the state transition process, a process for transitioning a state between a high-probability state having a relatively high probability of acquiring a trigger point and a low-probability state having a relatively low probability is executed.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the state transition process. In the state transition process, first in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle measurement counter 84c provided in the main RAM 84 is less than a predetermined reference value. The cycle measurement counter 84c is a counter for the main side MPU 82 to specify the end timing of one lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 and corresponds to the number of cycle games when a new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started. "100", which is the value to be set, is set, and 1 is subtracted each time one game is consumed in the acquisition challenge state ST1. The predetermined reference value is set to "70". When the value of the cycle measurement counter 84c is larger than the predetermined reference value, a negative determination is made in step S1901 and this state transition process ends without executing the processes of step S1902 and subsequent steps. As already described, when the new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started, the high probability state is set without fail. By executing the processing of step S1901, the transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state does not occur until the predetermined reference number of games (30 games) are exhausted in the new lap acquisition challenge state ST1. It becomes possible to do so.

When the value of the cycle measurement counter 84c is equal to or smaller than the predetermined reference value (step S1901: YES), it is determined whether the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1902). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify which of the high-probability state and the low-probability state is set in the acquisition challenge state ST1, and the high-probability flag is set to "1". The case where the high probability flag is present corresponds to the high probability state, and the case where “1” is not set in the high probability flag corresponds to the low probability state.

When "1" is set to the high probability flag (step S1902: YES), the low probability transition lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the low probability state is executed (step S1903). In the low-probability transition lottery process, the low-probability transition lottery table corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 18) is read. The low-probability transition lottery table is set so that the lower the probability of a low-probability transition winning is, the lower the winning percentage is in the lottery process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that a low-probability transition win is constant may be constant regardless of the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination. When the low-probability transition lottery process results in a low-probability transition win (step S1904: YES), the high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1905). Then, the low-probability shift command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S1906). The low-probability transition command is a command for causing the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that the transition has been made to the low-probability state, and the command is transmitted to the production-side MPU 92 by command output processing (step S309) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13). Sent.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives the low-probability shift command from the main-side MPU 82, the production-side MPU 92 executes the display mode lottery processing in the other processing (step S1629) of the command handling processing (FIG. 37). In the acquisition challenge state ST1, three types of display modes are set as the display contents displayed in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67. Specifically, there are a first display mode, a second display mode, and a third display mode as display modes. These display modes include the contents of the background image and the character image displayed in front of the background image. The contents are different. In the high probability state, the selection rate in the first display mode is the highest, the selection rate in the second display mode is the next highest, and the selection rate in the third display mode is the lowest. On the other hand, in the low probability state, the selectivity of the third display mode is the highest, the selectivity of the second display mode is the next highest, and the selectivity of the first display mode is the lowest. In the display mode lottery process, the display mode is selected by lottery using the lottery table corresponding to the low probability state. Then, the control table corresponding to the selected display mode is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the selected display mode is displayed in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67. By thus selecting the display mode, it is possible to make the player predict which of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set through the display mode.

Returning to the explanation of the state transition process (FIG. 40 ), when “1” is not set in the high probability flag (step S1902: NO), a high-probability transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the high probability state. The process is executed (step S1907). In the high-accuracy transition lottery process, the high-accuracy transition lottery table corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 18) is read. The high-probability transition lottery table is set such that the higher the probability of being in the high-probability transition winning is, the higher the winning combination is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the high-probability transition win is constant may be constant regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. If the high-probability transition lottery process results in a high-probability transition win (step S1908: YES), the high-probability flag is set to "1" (step S1909). Then, the high-accuracy shift command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S1910). The high-accuracy transition command is a command for causing the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that the transition to the high-probability state has occurred. Sent.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives the high-accuracy transition command from the main-side MPU 82, the display-side lottery process is executed in the other process (step S1629) of the command corresponding process (FIG. 37). In the display mode lottery process, a display mode is selected by lottery using a lottery table corresponding to a high probability state. Then, the control table corresponding to the selected display mode is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the selected display mode is displayed in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67. By thus selecting the display mode, it is possible to make the player predict which of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set through the display mode.

Even when neither the low-probability transition command nor the high-probability transition command has been received, the production side MPU 92 executes the display mode lottery process when the transition win is achieved in the display mode transition lottery process. However, the display mode selected in the lottery process may be changed. In this case, in the lottery process in the display mode, the lottery table corresponding to the low probability state may be used in the low probability state, and the lottery table corresponding to the high probability state may be used in the high probability state.

Returning to the explanation of the transition management process (FIG. 38), after executing the state transition process (step S1707), the value of the cycle measurement counter 84c of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S1708). If the value of the cycle measurement counter 84c after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1709: YES), the value of the cycle counter 84d provided in the main RAM 84 is incremented by 1 (step S1710). The cycle counter 84d is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times one round of the acquisition challenge state ST1 has been executed without the transition to the AT state ST5. If the value of the cycle counter 84d is a value corresponding to the number of ceilings (specifically, “10”) when one round of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is completed, the main MPU 82 determines whether or not there is lottery group information, and Processing for shifting to the AT state ST5 is executed regardless of the contents of the lottery group information. When the value of the cycle measurement counter 84c becomes "0" (step S1709: YES), this means that one round of the acquisition challenge state ST1 has ended, and therefore the value of the cycle counter 84d is incremented by 1 (step S1710). ..

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the trigger point counter 84b of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S1711). When the value of the trigger point counter 84b is 1 or more (step S1711: YES), "1" is set to the first transition challenge flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1712). As a result, the state shifts to the first shift challenge state ST2. In addition, the first transition challenge generation command is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 92 (step S1713). The first transition challenge generation command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 has occurred, and the command is a command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives the first transition challenge generation command from the main-side MPU 82, an affirmative decision is made in step S1605 in the command response process (FIG. 37), and the control table corresponding to the first transition challenge state ST2 is displayed. It is read (step S1606). By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the first transition challenge state ST2 is output, and by performing the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 according to the control table. The light emission effect corresponding to the 1-shift challenge state ST2 is executed. Further, by controlling the image display device 67 according to the control table, the display effect corresponding to the first transition challenge state ST2 is executed in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67.

In the migration management process (FIG. 38), after executing the process of step S1713, the first standby value is set in the progress standby counter 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1714). As described above, the progress standby counter 84a is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the game is in a state of waiting for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player. The value set in the progress standby counter 84a is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process of step S307 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. When the value of the progress standby counter 84a is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S511 in the normal process (FIG. 15) to wait for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the player's operation. You will have to wait. Thereby, when the transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 occurs, the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player are continued for a predetermined period (for example, 5 sec) corresponding to the first standby value. Will be waited for. Therefore, it becomes possible to start the first transition challenge state ST2 after making the player clearly recognize that the transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 occurs.

<Processing Content Regarding First Transition Challenge State ST2>
Hereinafter, the processing content executed in the first transition challenge state ST2 will be described. In the first shift challenge state ST2, the first shift challenge flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", so that in the lottery handling process (FIG. 34), a positive determination is made in step S1404 and the first shift is in progress. A setting process is executed (step S1414). FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the setting process during the first transition. Since the lottery-corresponding process (FIG. 34) is executed at the start of the game as already described, the first-in-progress setting process is also started at the start of the game, that is, before the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate. To be executed.

In the first transitional setting process, first, a lottery group information shift process is executed (step S2001). Specifically, in the information storage area 111, the lottery group information stored in the first storage area 112a is shifted to the execution area 113, and then stored in the second storage area 112b to the fifth storage area 112e. The lottery group information is shifted from the nth storage area to the (n-1)th storage area. Further, the value of the trigger point counter 84b of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S2002).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter 84d of the main RAM 84 is the ceiling corresponding value (specifically, "10") (step S2003). That is, it is determined whether or not the first transition challenge state ST2 this time is a transition to the AT state ST5 after one round of the acquisition challenge state ST1 has occurred after the number of ceilings has occurred. When the value of the cycle counter 84d is the ceiling-corresponding value (step S2003: YES), “1” is set to the AT winning occurrence flag provided in the main RAM 84 without executing the AT transition lottery process described later ( Step S2007). The AT winning occurrence flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the condition for shifting to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the current game. In this way, by setting the AT winning occurrence flag to "1" without executing the AT transition lottery process, one lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 does not occur without transition to the AT state ST5, and the number of ceilings ( When it occurs 10 times, specifically, the transition to the AT state ST5 will surely occur regardless of the presence or absence of the lottery group information and the content of the lottery group information.

When the value of the cycle counter 84d is a ceiling-corresponding value, the first game in the first transition challenge state ST2, that is, even when a plurality of lottery group information is stored in the information storage area 111, Transition to the AT state ST5 is triggered by the lottery group information of. In the first transition challenge state ST2, when a plurality of lottery group information is stored in the information storage area 111, the lottery group information is sequentially referred to, and when the lottery group information remains, it is first referred to. When the transition to the AT state ST5 is triggered by the lottery group information, the first transition challenge state ST2 occurs after the AT state ST5 ends, and the AT transition lottery process is executed for the remaining lottery group information. .. In this case, when the value of the cycle counter 84d is the ceiling-corresponding value, the transition to the AT state ST5 is generated by using the first lottery group information as a trigger, so that the first transition challenge state is generated after the AT state ST5 ends. It is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of ST2. Therefore, the advantage that the value of the cycle counter 84d reaches the ceiling corresponding value can be increased.

On the other hand, when the value of the cycle counter 84d is not the ceiling-corresponding value (step S2003: NO), the type of lottery group information stored in the execution area 113 of the information storage area 111 and the lottery processing for the current winning combination (FIG. 18). ) The lottery table for the first AT transfer lottery corresponding to the result of () is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S2004). Then, the AT transfer lottery process is executed using the read out lottery table for the first AT transfer lottery (step S2005).

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the lottery table for the first AT transfer lottery. As shown in FIG. 42, when the lottery table for the first AT transfer lottery is compared with the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the same winning combination, the larger the value of the lottery group information is, the more the AT win is selected in the AT transfer lottery process. When the same lottery group information is compared and the winning probability is set to be higher, the more winning the winning combination with the lower winning probability in the lottery process (FIG. 18), the more the AT transfer lottery process is performed. It is set to increase the probability of winning. Specifically, in the fifth group information, regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination, the probability of being an AT win in the AT transfer lottery process is 100%. As a result, when the promotion from the first group information to the fifth group information occurs in the promotion challenge state ST3, the transition to the AT state ST5 surely occurs.

Comparing the first group information to the fourth group information in the case where the result other than the result of being won by the index value IV=11 in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination is compared, the first group information→the second group information In the order of information→third group information→fourth group information, the probability of winning the AT in the AT transfer lottery process increases. As a result, the player expects that the promotion challenge state ST3 in which the promotion of the lottery group information may occur occurs, and also that the promotion to the lottery group information having a larger value occurs in the promotion challenge state ST3. To do. Further, regardless of any of the first group information to the fourth group information, in the case where the winning result in which the winning combination is not won in any of the winning combinations of the winning combinations (FIG. 18) and the index values IV=7 to 11 other than When the winning is achieved, the probability of being the AT winning is the lowest, and in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination, the probability of becoming the AT winning is set to be higher as the index value IV having a lower winning probability is won. In this case, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=11, that is, when the winning combination for which the BB winning data is set is won, the probability of being AT winning in the AT transfer lottery process is 100% regardless of the type of lottery group information. ing. As a result, when the BB winning occurs in the first transition challenge state ST2, the transition to the AT state ST5 is surely generated.

In step S2004, as described above, for the first AT transfer lottery corresponding to the lottery group information stored in the execution area 113 of the information storage area 111 and corresponding to the result of the lottery processing (FIG. 18) of this time. The lottery table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Then, in step S2005, the value of the lottery counter for AT transition lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the obtained value is stored in the lottery table for the first AT transition lottery read in step S2004. Match against.

When the result of the AT transfer lottery processing is AT winning (step S2006: YES), "1" is set to the AT winning occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2007). As a result, the AT state ST5 is entered when the current game ends.

Here, when the setting process for the first transition is executed, in the determination process of the content of effect in step S811 of the lottery process (FIG. 18), it is determined whether the AT winning occurrence flag is set to "1" or not. The outline effect content is determined in this manner, and the game start command set as the transmission target to the effect-side MPU 92 in step S812 includes not only the outline effect content information but also the first transition challenge state ST2. Information indicating that there is is set. When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, in the game start response process (step S1602) in the command response process (FIG. 37), the image display device is displayed based on the outline effect contents set in the game start command. The production execution mode including the variable display modes of the symbols G5 to G7 (see FIG. 32B) in the production display area 121 of 67 is determined by lottery, and the control table corresponding to the determination result is generated from the production side ROM 93. It is read to the effect side RAM 94. However, the variable display mode of the symbols G5 to G7 determined in this case does not include the variable display mode in which the same symbols are all stopped and displayed as a result of stopping the three symbols G5 to G7. By determining the effect contents in this way, the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7 is executed on the image display device 67 in each game in the first transition challenge state ST2.

Next, the first transition challenge process will be described. The first migration challenge process is executed in step S1720 when "1" is set in the first migration challenge flag of the main RAM 84 in the migration management process (FIG. 38) (step S1703: YES). .. Since the transition management process (FIG. 38) is executed at the end of the game, the first transition challenge process is also executed at the end of the game, that is, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the process for the first transition challenge.

When the AT winning occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the AT winning occurrence flag is cleared to "0" (step S2102). After that, the setting process for shifting to the AT state is executed (step S2103). In the setting process for shifting to the AT state, the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and the ART game number counter of the main RAM 84 is further set. "50" is set as a value corresponding to the initial number of games in one run in the ART state. The value to be set in the remaining ART execution counter may be determined by lottery, or the initial number of games for one execution in the ART state to be set in the ART game number counter may be determined by lottery.

Then, the second standby value is set in the advance standby counter 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2104). As described above, the progress standby counter 84a is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the game is in a state of waiting for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player. The value set in the progress standby counter 84a is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process of step S307 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. When the value of the progress standby counter 84a is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S511 in the normal process (FIG. 15) to wait for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the player's operation. You will have to wait. As a result, when the AT winning occurs in the predetermined game in the first transition challenge state ST2, the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player correspond to the second standby value for a predetermined period (for example, It will be waited for 10 seconds).

After that, the AT transfer confirmation command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2105). The AT transition confirmation command is a command for causing the effecting MPU 92 to recognize that the AT winning has occurred in the current game, and the command is the command output processing (step S309) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13). It is transmitted to the MPU 92. The AT transition confirmation command set in step S2105 is set with information indicating the first transition challenge state ST2.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the AT transition confirmation command corresponding to the first transition challenge state ST2 from the main side MPU 82, it makes an affirmative decision in step S1607 in the command handling process (FIG. 37), and the first transition challenge state ST2. In step S1608, the control table corresponding to the occurrence of the AT win is read out. In the control table, information on the execution mode of the effect including the variable display mode of the symbols G5 to G7 (see FIG. 32B) in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67 is set. The variable display mode of the symbols G5 to G7 in this case is a variable display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of stopping the three symbols G5 to G7.

That is, in the game in which the AT winning occurs in the first transition challenge state ST2, the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 occur a plurality of times in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67. Further, the plurality of variable display times are the period until the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the game in which the AT winning occurs, and the next time after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. The game is executed over both a predetermined period corresponding to the second standby value until the game can be started. Then, in the variable display times before the last variable display time, the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed as the stop result of the symbols G5 to G7, and the stop result of the symbols G5 to G7 in the last variable display time. The combination of the same symbols will be stopped and displayed. As described above, since the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 occur a plurality of times in one game, it is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation for the transition to the AT state ST5.

The sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed according to the control table to output a sound corresponding to the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. Thereby, the light emission effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7 is executed. Further, in a configuration in which the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 occur a plurality of times, the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7 is executed so that the first variable display time ends at the timing when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops. The period is adjusted in the production side MPU 92, and the next variable display time is a predetermined period corresponding to the second standby value after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped until the next game can be started. Is executed.

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the AT winning occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2101: NO), the type of lottery group information stored in the execution area 113 of the information storage area 111 and the current winning combination. The pseudo effect lottery table corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S2106). Then, the pseudo effect lottery process is executed by using the read out lottery table for pseudo effect (step S2107). The lottery table for pseudo effect is set such that, when compared with the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) for the same winning combination, the larger the value of the lottery group information, the higher the probability of being a pseudo effect win in the pseudo effect lottery process. In addition, when compared with the same lottery group information, the higher the probability of being a pseudo effect win in the pseudo effect lottery process is, the higher the winning combination is in the lottery process (FIG. 18). Is set. In the pseudo effect lottery process, the value of the pseudo effect lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the pseudo effect lottery table read in step S2106. To do.

When the result of the pseudo effect lottery process is the pseudo effect winning (step S2108: YES), the second standby value is set in the progress standby counter 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2109). As described above, the progress standby counter 84a is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the game is in a state of waiting for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player. The value set in the progress standby counter 84a is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process of step S307 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. When the value of the progress standby counter 84a is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S511 in the normal process (FIG. 15) to wait for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the player's operation. You will have to wait. As a result, even if the AT win does not occur in the predetermined game in the first transition challenge state ST2, if the pseudo effect win occurs, the progress of the game based on the operation of the player and the start of the new game are The device will be on standby for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to the two standby values.

After that, the pseudo effect generation command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2110). The pseudo effect generation command is a command for causing the effect MPU 92 to recognize that the pseudo effect winning has occurred in the current game in the first transition challenge state ST2, and the command is the command output process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). In (step S309), it is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the pseudo production generation command from the main side MPU 82, the production side MPU 92 makes an affirmative decision in step S1609 in the command handling process (FIG. 37), and that the pseudo production win has occurred in the first transition challenge state ST2. The corresponding control table is read (step S1610). In the control table, information on the execution mode of the effect including the variable display mode of the symbols G5 to G7 (see FIG. 32B) in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67 is set. The variable display mode of the symbols G5 to G7 in this case is a variable display mode in which the same symbol is not stopped and displayed as a result of stopping the three symbols G5 to G7.

That is, in the game in which the pseudo effect winning has occurred in the first transition challenge state ST2, as in the game in which the AT winning has occurred in the first transition challenge state ST2, the symbols G5 to G7 in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67. The variable display times of will occur multiple times. Further, the plurality of variable display times are the period until the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the game in which the pseudo effect winning is generated, and the period after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. The game is executed over both the predetermined period corresponding to the second standby value until the game can be started. Then, in each of the plurality of variable display times, the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed as a stop result of the symbols G5 to G7. In this way, even if the game is not AT-winning, a plurality of variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 occur in one game, so that the game is not AT-winning even if the game is not AT-winning. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for things.

The sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed according to the control table to output a sound corresponding to the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. Thereby, the light emission effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7 is executed. Further, in a configuration in which the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 occur a plurality of times, the variable display of the symbols G5 to G7 is executed so that the first variable display time ends at the timing when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops. The period is adjusted in the production side MPU 92, and the next variable display time is a predetermined period corresponding to the second standby value after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped until the next game can be started. Is executed.

Returning to the description of the first transition challenge process (FIG. 43 ), if the process of step S2105 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S2108, or if the process of step S2110 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2111. It is determined whether or not the value of the trigger point counter 84b of the side RAM 84 is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game in the first transition challenge state ST2. When the value of the trigger point counter 84b is "0" (step S2111: YES), the first shift challenge flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2112). As a result, the first transition challenge state ST2 ends.

By the way, even if the setting process for AT state transition is executed in step S2103, the value of the trigger point counter 84b is not cleared to "0", and unless the value of the trigger point counter 84b becomes "0". The first transition challenge flag is not cleared to "0". Further, even if the setting process for AT state transition is executed in step S2103, the information in the first to fifth storage areas 112a to 112e of the information storage area 111 is maintained as it is. As a result, when the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs in a situation where the reference target lottery group information still remains in the first transition challenge state ST2, the first transition challenge state ST2 is set after the end of the AT state ST5. After returning, the AT transfer lottery processing is executed for the remaining lottery group information. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of shifting to the AT state ST5.

After that, the end command of the first transition challenge is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2113). The end command of the first transition challenge is a command for causing the effecting MPU 92 to recognize that the first transition challenge state ST2 has ended, and the command is a command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives the end command of the first transition challenge from the main-side MPU 82, it makes an affirmative decision in step S1611 in the command handling process (FIG. 37) and reads the corresponding control table (step S1612). A sound corresponding to the end of the first transition challenge state ST2 is output by executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. Thus, the light emission effect corresponding to the end of the first transition challenge state ST2 is executed. Further, by controlling the image display device 67 according to the control table, the display effect corresponding to the end of the first transition challenge state ST2 is executed in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67.

If the control command corresponding to the AT transition confirmation command or the pseudo production generation command is read in the production side RAM 94 as the execution target, and the end command of the first transition challenge is received, the AT transition confirmation command or the pseudo production is received. After the execution control of the effect according to the control table corresponding to the generated command is completed, the execution control of the effect according to the control table corresponding to the end command of the first transition challenge is started. In addition, when the ending command of the first transition challenge is received in a situation where the transition to the AT state ST5 does not occur, the production side MPU 92 performs the execution control of the production corresponding to the end of the first transition challenge state ST2. , Performs execution control of the effect corresponding to the start of a new one lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1. On the other hand, when the end command of the first transition challenge is received in the situation where the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs, the production side MPU 92 performs the execution control of the production corresponding to the end of the first transition challenge state ST2. , Execution control of the effect corresponding to the AT state ST5 is performed.

After the end command of the first transition challenge is set as the transmission target to the effecting MPU 92, the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is "0" (step S2114: YES), that is, this time. On the condition that the AT winning has not occurred in the first transition challenge state ST2, "100" which is a value corresponding to the number of continuous games in one round in the acquired challenge state ST1 is set in the cycle measurement counter 84c of the main RAM 84. Yes (step S2115). As a result, one new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started. Also, "1" is set to the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2116). As a result, when a new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started, the state of the acquisition probability of the trigger points becomes the high probability state.

Next, how the first transition challenge state ST2 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 44A shows the execution period of the first transition challenge state ST2, FIG. 44B shows the state of the trigger point counter 84b of the main RAM 84, and FIG. 44C shows the execution period of one game. 44(d) shows a period during which the game is on standby, FIG. 44(e) shows a timing at which the AT winning occurs, and FIG. 44(f) shows an execution period of the AT state ST5.

First, a case where the transition to the AT state ST5 does not occur will be described.

At the timing of t1, the first transition challenge state ST2 is started as shown in FIG. 44(a). In this case, the value of the trigger point counter 84b is “2” as shown in FIG. 44(b), and therefore there are two pieces of reference target lottery group information, and in the first transition challenge state ST2 of this time, Will be executed at most twice. Further, at the timing of t1, the first standby value is set in the progress standby counter 44c of the main RAM 84, so that the progress of the game is on standby as shown in FIG. 44(d).

Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the period in which the progress of the game is on standby as shown in FIG. 44(d) elapses, so that the game is started based on the operation of the player as shown in FIG. 44(c). .. In this case, since the AT transfer lottery process is executed for the first lottery group information, the value of the trigger point counter 84b is decremented by 1 as shown in FIG. It becomes. No AT win occurs in the AT transfer lottery process. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44(c) at the timing of t3, even if the current game ends, the transition to the AT state ST5 does not occur, and the first transition challenge state ST2 continues. In addition, the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 are executed once in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67 from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3.

Then, at the timing of t4, a new game is started based on the operation of the player as shown in FIG. 44(c). In this case, since the AT transfer lottery processing is executed for the next lottery group information, the value of the trigger point counter 84b is decremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 44(b), and the value of the trigger point counter 84b becomes It becomes "0". No AT win occurs in the AT transfer lottery process. However, the pseudo effect lottery process results in a pseudo effect win. Therefore, when the game ends as shown in FIG. 44(c) at the timing of t5, the second standby value is set in the progress standby counter 44c of the main RAM 84, and as shown in FIG. 44(d). The game is in a waiting state. In this case, in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67, the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 are executed once from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, and the progress of the game is waited for at t5. The variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 are executed once from the timing to the timing of t6. At the timing of t6 when the state where the game is on standby is released, the first transition challenge state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 44(a).

Next, a case where the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs will be described.

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the first transition challenge state ST2 is started. In this case, the value of the trigger point counter 84b is "4" as shown in FIG. 44(b), so there are four pieces of reference lottery group information, and in the first transition challenge state ST2 of this time, the game is performed. Will be executed up to 4 times. Further, at the timing of t7, the first standby value is set in the progress standby counter 44c of the main RAM 84, so that the progress of the game is on standby as shown in FIG. 44(d).

After that, at the timing of t8, the period in which the progress of the game is on standby as shown in FIG. 44(d) elapses, so that the game is started based on the operation of the player as shown in FIG. 44(c). .. In this case, since the AT transfer lottery processing is executed for the first lottery group information, the value of the trigger point counter 84b is decremented by 1 as shown in FIG. It becomes. No AT win occurs in the AT transfer lottery process. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44(c) at the timing of t9, even if the current game ends, the transition to the AT state ST5 does not occur and the first transition challenge state ST2 is continued. Note that the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 are executed once in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67 from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9.

Then, at the timing of t10, a new game is started based on the operation of the player as shown in FIG. 44(c). In this case, since the AT transfer lottery processing is executed for the next lottery group information, the value of the trigger point counter 84b is decremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 44(b), and the value of the trigger point counter 84b becomes It becomes "2". In the AT transfer lottery process, an AT win occurs. Therefore, when the game ends as shown in FIG. 44(c) at the timing of t11, the second standby value is set in the progress standby counter 44c of the main RAM 84, so that as shown in FIG. 44(d). The game is on standby. In this case, in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67, the variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 are executed once from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, and the progress of the game is waited for at t11. The variable display times of the symbols G5 to G7 are executed once from the timing to the timing t12. At the timing of t12 when the state where the game is on standby is canceled, the first transition challenge state ST2 is ended as shown in FIG. 44(a), and the AT state ST5 is set as shown in FIG. 44(f). Be started.

Further, in this case, the transition to the AT state ST5 has occurred with the reference target lottery group information remaining. Therefore, when the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 44(f) at the timing of t13, the first transition challenge state ST2 is restarted as shown in FIG. 44(a). Then, in the restarted first transition challenge state ST2, the AT transition lottery processing is executed for the remaining lottery group information.

<Processing contents regarding promotion challenge state ST3>
Next, the processing content regarding the promotion challenge state ST3 will be described. First, the processing content for shifting to the promotion challenge state ST3 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 again. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the trigger point update process executed in step S1705 in the migration management process (FIG. 38).

As described above, the process of updating the opportunity points is executed at the end of the current game when the acquisition of the opportunity points is won at the start of the current game. When it is determined that the value of the trigger point counter 84b of the main RAM 84 is the maximum value "5" in the process of updating the trigger point (step S1805: YES), the promotion shown in steps S1806 to S1809. A process for shifting to the challenge state ST3 is executed.

First, "1" is set to the promotion challenge flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1806). As a result, the state changes to the promotion challenge state ST3. The value of the cycle counter 84d of the main RAM 84 is incremented by 1 (step S1807), and the value of the cycle measurement counter 84c of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1808). After that, the command to generate the promotion challenge is set as a transmission target to the effecting MPU 92 (step S1809). The promotion challenge generation command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the transition to the promotion challenge state ST3 has been made, and the command is generated by the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). It is transmitted to the MPU 92.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives the promotion challenge generation command from the main-side MPU 82, the production-side MPU 92 makes an affirmative decision in step S1613 in the command response process (FIG. 37) to read the control table corresponding to the promotion challenge state ST3 (step S1614). ). The sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed according to the control table to output the sound corresponding to the promotion challenge state ST3, and the emission control of the performance light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table to raise the promotion challenge state. The light emission effect corresponding to ST3 is executed. Further, by controlling the image display device 67 according to the control table, the display effect corresponding to the promotion challenge state ST3 is executed in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67.

By setting the promotion challenge flag of the main RAM 84 to "1" as described above, an affirmative decision is made in step S1402 in the lottery correspondence processing (FIG. 34) and the promotion setting processing is executed (step S1412). FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the promotion setting process. Since the lottery corresponding process (FIG. 34) is executed at the start of the game as already described, the promotion setting process is also executed at the start of the game, that is, before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. ..

In the promotion setting process, first, a process of selecting lottery group information to be promoted is executed (step S2201). In the promotion challenge state ST3, the promotion lottery process is executed on one lottery group information for each game in order from the lottery group information stored in the first storage area 112a of the information storage area 111. In this case, since five pieces of lottery group information have been acquired when the promotion challenge state ST3 is started, the promotion challenge state ST3 continues for five games, and the first storage area 112a→the first storage area 112a in each game. The lottery group information to be executed for the promotion lottery process is changed in the order of the second storage area 112b→the third storage area 112c→the fourth storage area 112d→the fifth storage area 112e. In step S2201, if this time is the start game of the promotion challenge state ST3, the lottery group information stored in the first storage area 112a is selected as the execution target of the promotion lottery process, and if it is the second game to the fifth game. The lottery group information stored in the storage areas in the next order is selected as the execution target of the promotion lottery processing with respect to the storage area for which the promotion lottery processing was executed in the previous game.

After that, the promotion lottery table corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of this time is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S2202). Then, using the read promotion lottery table, the promotion lottery process is executed (step S2203).

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the promotion lottery table. As shown in FIG. 46, the promotion lottery table is set so that the higher the probability of winning a promotion in the promotion lottery process is, the higher the winning combination is in the lottery process (FIG. 18). In addition, in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination, it is set so that promotion to the lottery group information of a type having a higher advantage for the player is more likely to occur as the winning combination has a lower winning probability. .. Specifically, the probability of being a promotion win is the lowest when the winning result is that no win is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 18), and when the win is a value other than the index value IV=7 to 11. Even if the promotion is elected, the promotion to the second group information or the third group information may occur, but the promotion to the fourth group information and the fifth group information does not occur. In addition, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=7 or 8, there may be a case where the winning is not promoted, and when the winning is promoted, promotion to any one of the second group information to the fifth group information is performed. Occurs. Also, if the index value IV=9 to 11 is elected, the promotion win is definitely generated, and if the index value IV=10 is elected, the promotion to the third group information or more is confirmed, Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV=11, that is, when the winning combination in which the BB winning data is set is won, the promotion to the fifth group information is surely generated.

In step S2202, as described above, the promotion lottery table corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of this time is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Then, in step S2203, the value of the lottery counter for promotion lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is obtained, and the obtained value is collated with the promotion lottery table read in step S2202.

If the result of the promotion lottery process is a promotion win (step S2204: YES), "1" is set to the promotion occurrence flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2205). The promotion occurrence flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that promotion of lottery group information has occurred in this game. When the promotion occurrence flag is set to "1", the transition to the promotion challenge state ST3 is made when the current game ends.

After setting the promotion occurrence flag to "1", promotion processing of lottery group information is executed (step S2206). In the promotion process, in the information storage area 111, the type of lottery group information stored in the storage areas 112a to 112e that are the targets of the promotion lottery process of this time is set to the lottery group of the type selected in the promotion lottery process. Execute the process of rewriting to information. As a result, the lottery group information which is the target of the promotion lottery process this time is promoted.

Here, when the promotion setting process is executed, in the effect content determination process in step S811 of the lottery process (FIG. 18), the outline frame is displayed in a manner corresponding to whether the promotion occurrence flag is set to "1" or not. While the effect contents are determined, in the game start command set as the transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 in step S812, not only the information on the effect contents of the outline but also the information indicating that the promotion challenge state ST3 is set. To be done. When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, in the game start response process (step S1602) in the command response process (FIG. 37), the image display device is displayed based on the outline effect contents set in the game start command. The execution mode of the effect in the effect display area 121 of 67 is determined by lottery, and the control table corresponding to the determination result is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94. By determining the effect contents in this way, in the promotion challenge state ST3, an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the promotion of the lottery group information on the image display device 67 is executed in each game.

Next, the process for promotion challenge will be described. The process for promotion challenge is executed in step S1718 when “1” is set in the promotion challenge flag of the main RAM 84 in the migration management process (FIG. 38) (step S1701: YES). Since the transition management process (FIG. 38) is executed at the end of the game, the promotion challenge process is also executed at the end of the game, that is, after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the process for promotion challenge.

When "1" is set to the promotion occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2301: YES), the promotion occurrence flag is cleared to "0" (step S2302). After that, the promotion generation command is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 92 (step S2303). The promotion generation command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the lottery group information that is the target of the promotion lottery process in this game has been promoted to a lottery group information of a kind more advantageous to the player. The promotion occurrence command includes information indicating in which order the lottery group information targeted for promotion this time is the lottery group information, and information indicating which type of lottery group information the lottery group information has been promoted to. Is set. The promotion generation command is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

When the production-side MPU 92 receives the promotion generation command from the main-side MPU 82, an affirmative decision is made in step S1615 in the command handling process (FIG. 37), and the control table corresponding to the contents of the promotion generation command this time is read out (step S1616). In the control table, information for executing a display effect indicating that the lottery group information that is the target of the promotion lottery process in the current game in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67 has been successfully promoted is provided. In addition to being set, information for executing a display effect indicating which type of lottery group information has been promoted is set. Further, in the control table, the display content of the unit display area 125 corresponding to the lottery group information that is the target of the promotion lottery process in the current game in the point number display area 123 of the image display device 67 is the type after promotion. The information for changing to the display content corresponding to the lottery group information of is set. It should be noted that the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed according to the control table to output the sound corresponding to the promotion of the lottery group information, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. Thus, the light emission effect corresponding to the promotion of the lottery group information is executed.

Returning to the description of the process for promotion challenge (FIG. 47 ), if a negative determination is made in step S2301 or if the process of step S2303 is executed, there is lottery group information that is not the execution target of the promotion lottery process. It is determined whether or not (step S2304). Specifically, it is determined whether the lottery group information targeted for the promotion lottery process this time is the lottery group information stored in the fifth storage area 112e in the information storage area 111. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2304, the promotion challenge flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2305), and the first transition challenge flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2306). ). As a result, the promotion challenge state ST3 ends and the first transition challenge state ST2 is entered.

After that, the generation command of the first transition challenge is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2307). The processing contents to the effect side MPU 92 when the generation command of the first transition challenge is received are as already described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the first transition challenge state ST2 is started.

Next, how the promotion challenge state ST3 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 48(a) shows the execution period of the promotion challenge state ST3, FIG. 48(b) shows the number of pieces of lottery group information that are not targets for execution of the promotion lottery processing, and FIG. 48(c) shows the execution of one game. FIG. 48(d) shows the execution timing of the promotion lottery process, and FIG. 48(e) shows the execution timing of the effect indicating that the promotion has occurred.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the lottery group information is newly acquired, and the number of the lottery group information becomes 5, which is the maximum acquisition number, as shown in FIG. 48(a). The promotion challenge state ST3 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the game is started based on the operation of the player as shown in FIG. 48(c). At this timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 48(d), the promotion lottery process is executed for the lottery group information corresponding to the current game. By the promotion winning in the promotion lottery process, it is indicated that the lottery group information corresponding to the current game has been promoted as shown in FIG. 48E at the timing t3 when the current game ends. The performance is executed. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the lottery group information has been promoted. Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the number of remaining lottery group information to be executed for the promotion lottery process becomes four.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48C, the game is executed at each of the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, and the timing of t10 to the timing of t11. As shown in FIG. 48(d), the promotion lottery process is executed for each lottery group information at the start of each game. That is, one game is executed in association with one lottery group information, and the promotion lottery process is executed for the corresponding lottery group information in each game. Then, at the timing of t11 when all the games corresponding to each of the five lottery group information are finished, the promotion challenge state ST3 is finished as shown in FIG. 48(a). In this case, the first shift challenge state ST2 is entered. Since the promotion lottery process executed at the timing of t8 is also a promotion win, the promotion occurrence effect is executed at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 48(d).

By executing one game in association with each lottery group information as described above, promotion lottery processing in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery processing (FIG. 18) for each individual lottery group information Can be executed. As a result, a situation in which the game is executed while expecting the promotion win and the lottery group information of a more advantageous type for the player occurs for the number of lottery group information. Therefore, it is possible to generate many situations in which the game is executed with a sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the promotion challenge state ST3. In addition, by executing one game corresponding to each lottery group information, it becomes possible to easily recognize which lottery group information is in a situation in which the promotion lottery process is executed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 49, how the number of games required until the first transition challenge state ST2 occurs due to the promotion challenge state ST3 decreasing will be described. FIG. 49(a) shows the timing of digesting 100 games in the acquisition challenge state ST1, FIG. 49(b) shows the acquisition timing of trigger points (that is, the acquisition timing of lottery group information), and FIG. The execution period of the 1-shift challenge state ST2 is shown, and FIG. 49(d) shows the execution period of the promotion challenge state ST3.

At the timing of t1, 100 games are consumed in the acquisition challenge state ST1 as shown in FIG. 49(a). As a result, at the timing of t1, the state shifts to the first shift challenge state ST2 as shown in FIG. 49(c). The first transition challenge state ST2 ends at the timing of t2 without the transition to the AT state ST5. In this case, one new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started.

In the newly started acquisition challenge state ST1 of one lap, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the trigger points are acquired at the timings of t3 and t4, respectively, and the lottery group information is newly acquired. Then, at the timing of t5, 100 games are consumed in the acquisition challenge state ST1 as shown in FIG. 49(a). As a result, at the timing of t5, the first transition challenge state ST2 is entered as shown in FIG. 49(c). The first transition challenge state ST2 ends at the timing of t6 without the transition to the AT state ST5. In this case, one new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started.

In the newly started acquisition challenge state ST1 of one lap, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the trigger point is 1 at each of the timing of t7, the timing of t8, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, and the timing of t11. Points are acquired, and lottery group information is acquired one by one. In this case, at the timing of t11 when the value of the trigger point becomes the maximum value, the promotion challenge state ST3 is entered as shown in FIG. 49(d). Then, the promotion challenge state ST3 continues for 5 games, and when the promotion challenge state ST3 ends at the timing of t12, the transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 is performed as shown in FIG. 49(c).

In the case where the transition to the promotion challenge state ST3 does not occur as described above, it is necessary to consume 100 games in order to transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 which enables the transition to the AT state ST5. When the transition to the promotion challenge state ST3 occurs, the game proceeds to the first transition challenge state ST2 without exhausting 100 games. For example, a maximum of 2 trigger points are acquired at one time, and since the value of the trigger point becomes “5” which is the maximum value, the promotion challenge state ST3 is entered, and thus the promotion challenge state ST3 is entered. The minimum number of games required for is 3 games. The promotion challenge state ST3 continues for 5 games. Therefore, the shortest number of games required to shift to the first shift challenge state ST2 via the promotion challenge state ST3 is eight games. The eight games are less than 100 games, which is the number of continuous games in the acquisition challenge state ST1. As a result, when the transition to the promotion challenge state ST3 occurs, the number of games required to transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to further reduce the number of games required to shift to the first shift challenge state ST2 through acquisition of the trigger points that trigger the execution of the AT shift lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the opportunity points will be acquired.

In particular, when transitioning to the promotion challenge state ST3, the promotion lottery process of the lottery group information is executed. In other words, by shifting to the promotion challenge state ST3, not only the advantage that the lottery group information can be promoted is given, but also the advantage that the number of games required to shift to the first shift challenge state ST2 is shortened. Will be granted. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the opportunity points will be acquired.

<Processing Content Regarding Second Transition Challenge State ST4>
Next, the processing content regarding the second transition challenge state ST4 will be described. First, the processing content for shifting to the second shift challenge state ST4 will be described with reference to FIG. 38 again. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the migration management process.

In the migration management process, as described above, when the value of the cycle measurement counter 84c of the main RAM 84 after subtraction is “0” (step S1709: YES), the value of the cycle counter 84d of the main RAM 84 is set to 1 After the addition (step S1710), it is determined whether or not the value of the trigger point counter 84b of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S1711). When the value of the trigger point counter 84b is 1 or more, the process for shifting to the first shift challenge state ST2 is executed as described above. On the other hand, when the value of the trigger point counter 84b is “0”, that is, when no lottery group information is acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1 of the immediately preceding lap, a transition to the second transition challenge state ST4 is made. Execute the process.

As the process, first, "1" is set to the second transfer challenge flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1715). As a result, the state shifts to the second shift challenge state ST4. Further, a value "10" corresponding to 10 games, which is the number of continuous games in the second transition challenge state ST4, is set in the continuous game number counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1716). The continuous game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining continuous games in the second transition challenge state ST4. After that, the generation command of the second transition challenge is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1717). The second transition challenge generation command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the second transition challenge state ST4 has been entered, and the command is a command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the second transition challenge generation command from the main side MPU 82, an affirmative decision is made in step S1617 in the command response process (FIG. 37), and the control table corresponding to the second transition challenge state ST4 is displayed. It is read (step S1618). By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the second transition challenge state ST4 is output, and by performing the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 according to the control table, The light emission effect corresponding to the 2-shift challenge state ST4 is executed. Further, by controlling the image display device 67 according to the control table, the display effect corresponding to the second transition challenge state ST4 is executed in the effect display area 121 of the image display device 67.

Since "1" is set to the second transfer challenge flag of the main RAM 84 as described above, an affirmative determination is made in step S1403 in the lottery correspondence process (FIG. 34), and the second intermediate transfer setting process is executed. (Step S1413). FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the second mid-transition setting process. Since the lottery-corresponding process (FIG. 34) is executed at the start of the game as already described, the second transition setting process is also started at the start of the game, that is, before the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate. To be executed.

In the second mid-transition setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter 84d of the main RAM 84 is the ceiling corresponding value (specifically, "10") (step S2401). That is, it is determined whether or not the second transition challenge state ST4 of this time is the transition to the AT state ST5 after one round of the acquisition challenge state ST1 has occurred after the number of ceilings has occurred. When the value of the cycle counter 84d is the ceiling-corresponding value (step S2401: YES), "1" is set to the AT winning occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 without executing the AT transition lottery process of step S2403 (step S2405). ). As described above, the AT winning occurrence flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the current game. In this way, by setting the AT winning occurrence flag to "1" without executing the AT transition lottery process, one lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 does not occur without transition to the AT state ST5, and the number of ceilings ( When it occurs 10 times, specifically, the transition to the AT state ST5 will surely occur regardless of the presence or absence of the lottery group information and the content of the lottery group information.

Further, when the value of the cycle counter 84d is the ceiling-corresponding value, the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs in the first game of the second transition challenge state ST4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second transition challenge state ST4 from being meaninglessly continued in a situation where it is determined that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, when the value of the cycle counter 84d is not the ceiling corresponding value (step S2401: NO), the lottery table for the second AT transfer lottery is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S2402). Then, the AT transfer lottery process is executed using the read out lottery table for the second AT transfer lottery (step S2403). Only one kind of lottery table for the second AT transition lottery is prepared, and the one kind of lottery table for the second AT transition lottery is irrespective of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination in the second transition challenge state ST4. Referenced. In the lottery table for the second AT transfer lottery, the winning probability is set so that the AT is won with a probability of 2%. In step S2403, the value of the lottery counter for AT transition lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is obtained, and the obtained value is compared with the lottery table for the second AT transition lottery read in step S2402. Collate.

When the result of the AT transfer lottery processing is AT winning (step S2404: YES), "1" is set to the AT winning occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2405). As a result, the AT state ST5 is entered when the current game ends.

If the result of the AT transfer lottery process is not an AT win (step S2404: NO), it is a condition that the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the hand lottery process (FIG. 18) (step S2404). (S2406: YES), and proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, the conversion lottery table corresponding to the current winning combination is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Then, the conversion lottery process is executed using the read conversion lottery table (step S2408). The conversion lottery process is a lottery process for determining again whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 in a game that has not been AT-winned in the AT transfer lottery process (step S2403). In the case of, the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs as in the case of winning the AT in the AT transition lottery process. The conversion lottery table is provided corresponding to each of the index values IV=7 to 11, and the more the winning combination with the lower winning probability in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination is converted, the conversion lottery process is performed. Is set so that the probability that The probability of being a converted win is that the probability of being an AT win in the AT transition lottery processing executed in each game in the second transition challenge state ST4 is 2%, and the index in the lottery processing of the winning combination (FIG. 18). In connection with the winning probability of the value IV=7 to 11, the degree of expectation that the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs in the second transition challenge state ST4 is set to be 25%. In the conversion lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for conversion lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the conversion lottery table read in step S2407.

When the result of the conversion lottery process is the conversion winning (step S2409: YES), "1" is set to the AT winning occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2410). As a result, the second transition challenge state ST4 is entered when the current game ends.

Here, in the case where the second mid-transition setting process is executed, in the effect content determination process in step S811 of the lottery process (FIG. 18 ), it is determined whether the AT winning occurrence flag is set to “1” or not. The outline effect content is determined in this manner, and the game start command set as the transmission target to the effect-side MPU 92 in step S812 includes not only the outline effect information but also the second transition challenge state ST4. Information indicating that there is is set. When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, in the game start response process (step S1602) in the command response process (FIG. 37), the effect is executed based on the outline effect contents set in the game start command. The mode is determined by lottery, and the control table corresponding to the determination result is read from the production-side ROM 93 to the production-side RAM 94. Then, according to the control table, the sound output control of the speaker unit 65, the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66, and the display control of the image display device 67 are executed.

Next, the process for the second transition challenge will be described. The second migration challenge process is executed in step S1719 when the migration management process (FIG. 38) sets the second migration challenge flag of the main RAM 84 to "1" (step S1702: YES). .. Since the transition management process (FIG. 38) is executed at the end of the game, the second transition challenge process is also executed at the end of the game, that is, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the process for the second transition challenge.

When "1" is set to the AT winning occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2501: YES), the AT winning occurrence flag is cleared to "0" (step S2502), and the second transition challenge flag of the main RAM 84 is set. Is cleared to "0" (step S2503). After that, the setting process for shifting to the AT state is executed (step S2504). In the setting process for shifting to the AT state, the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and the ART game number counter of the main RAM 84 is further set. "50" is set as a value corresponding to the initial number of games in one run in the ART state. The value to be set in the remaining ART execution counter may be determined by lottery, or the initial number of games for one execution in the ART state to be set in the ART game number counter may be determined by lottery.

After that, the AT transfer confirmation command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2505). The AT transition confirmation command is a command for causing the effecting MPU 92 to recognize that the AT winning has occurred in the current game, and the command is the command output processing (step S309) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13). It is transmitted to the MPU 92. Information indicating that the second transition challenge state ST4 is set in the AT transition confirmation command set in step S2505.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the AT shift confirmation command corresponding to the second shift challenge state ST4 from the main side MPU 82, it makes a positive determination in step S1607 in the command handling process (FIG. 37), and the second shift challenge state ST4. In step S1608, the control table corresponding to the occurrence of the AT win is read out. By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the AT winning in the second transition challenge state ST4 is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is performed according to the control table. Is executed, the light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the AT winning is executed in the second transition challenge state ST4, and the display control of the image display device 67 is executed according to the control table, whereby the second transition challenge state is executed. In ST4, the display effect corresponding to the occurrence of the AT winning is executed.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the AT winning occurrence flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2501: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S2506). Then, when the value of the continuous game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2507: YES), the second shift challenge flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2508). As a result, the second transition challenge state ST4 ends.

After that, the end command of the second transition challenge is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2509). The end command of the second transition challenge is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the second transition challenge state ST4 has ended, and the command is a command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives the end command of the second transition challenge from the main-side MPU 82, it makes an affirmative decision in step S1619 in the command handling process (FIG. 37) and reads the corresponding control table (step S1620). A sound corresponding to the end of the second transition challenge state ST4 is output by executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. Thus, the light emission effect corresponding to the end of the second transition challenge state ST4 is executed. Further, by controlling the image display device 67 according to the control table, the display effect corresponding to the end of the second transition challenge state ST4 is executed on the image display device 67. After performing the effect execution control corresponding to the end of the second transition challenge state ST4, the effect MPU 92 performs the effect execution control corresponding to the start of a new one lap in the acquisition challenge state ST1.

After the end command of the second transition challenge is set as the transmission target to the effecting side MPU 92, the period measurement counter 84c of the main side RAM 84 has a value "100" corresponding to the number of continuous games in the acquisition challenge state ST1 in one lap. Is set (step S2510). As a result, one new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started. Also, "1" is set to the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2511). As a result, when a new lap of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is started, the state of the acquisition probability of the trigger points becomes the high probability state.

As described above, in the second transition challenge state ST4, the AT transition lottery process is executed in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination, and when the AT is won, the AT state ST5 is entered. A transition occurs. As a result, in the second transition challenge state ST4, the player expects the transition to the AT state ST5 regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) for the winning combination.

In addition, in the case where the winning value is selected in any of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the lottery processing of the winning combination (FIG. 18 ), the conversion lottery processing is executed even if the AT transition lottery processing does not result in the AT win, and the conversion is performed. When the conversion win is obtained in the lottery process, a transition to the AT state ST5 occurs. As a result, when the AT transfer lottery process is executed irrespective of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) for each hand in each game, but the result of the lottery process for the relevant hand is a predetermined result, Even if the AT is not won, there is an opportunity to shift to the AT state ST5 again. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination.

<Processing contents in AT state ST5>
Next, the processing content in the AT state ST5 will be described.

As described above, the AT state AT5 is transitioned to when the AT win is achieved in the first transition challenge state ST2 or when the AT win or conversion win is performed in the second transition challenge state ST4. When the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs, first, the ART preparation state is entered, and in the ART preparation state, the lottery mode becomes the second RT mode, whereby the ART state or the addition state is entered.

In the ART state and the addition state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the fall of the lottery mode from the second RT mode is notified. When a winning combination in which a fall may occur is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in accordance with the notified stop order, so that the fall from the second RT mode is avoided. As a result, in the ART state or the added state, it is possible to maintain a state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode, and it is possible to reduce the number of game media required to digest the game. In addition, the ART state and the addition state are similar to the ART preparation state and the ART ending branch state described later, when the winning combination is one of the index values IV=1 to 4 in the lottery process (FIG. 18). Is notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell prize, and enables the establishment of the first bell prize when the index value IV=5 or 6 is won. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be activated is notified. As a result, in the ART state or the additional state, not only the replay probability becomes high, but also the game medium providing probability becomes high, and it becomes possible to increase the game medium.

Incidentally, when either the ART state or the additional state and the lottery mode is the second RT mode, the expected number of game media to be provided per game is larger than the number of game media required per game. On the other hand, in the normal game state, which is the non-AT state in the normal mode, the expected number of game media to be provided per game is one of the ART state and the additional state and the lottery mode is the second mode. Further, the expected number of game media to be provided per game is smaller than the number of game media required per game. In addition, the gaming state in the normal mode and the AT state ST5 has a larger expected number of game media to be provided per game than in the normal gaming state in the normal mode and the non-AT state, and in the ART state and the addition state. The expected number of game media to be provided per game is smaller than in the case where the lottery mode is the second mode.

In the ART state, addition of the number of continuous games in one execution of the ART state may occur, and addition of the number of executions in the ART state may occur. In addition, in the add-on state, an addition of the number of continuous games in one execution of the ART state may occur, and the average value of the addition of the number of continuous games in the add-on state is generated by one addition in the ART state. It is larger than the average number of games added. Further, in the addition state, the number of continuous games in the ART state is not subtracted. As a result, the added-on state becomes more advantageous to the player than the ART state, and the player will play the game while expecting not only the ART state to continue for a long time but also the addition state.

The addition state may be changed from the ART preparation state and may be changed from the ART state. Further, when the addition state is finished, the state shifts to the ART state. When one execution of the ART state is completed, the state is shifted to the ART end branch state. The processing executed in the ART preparation state, the ART state, the addition state, and the ART end branch state will be described below.

First, the lottery-corresponding process during AT executed in each of the ART preparation state, the ART state, the addition state, and the ART end branch state will be described. The lottery correspondence process during AT is executed in step S1411 when the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 in the lottery correspondence process (FIG. 34) is 1 or more (step S1401: YES). Since the lottery corresponding process (FIG. 34) is executed at the start of the game, the lottery corresponding process during AT is also executed at the start of the game, that is, before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the lottery correspondence processing during AT.

In the lottery handling process during AT, it is first determined whether or not the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is "3" (step S2601). As described above, the AT state counter specifies whether or not the AT state ST5 is in the main MPU 82, and when it is in the AT state ST5, the main MPU 82 identifies the stay mode in the AT state ST5. Counter. The case where the value of the AT state counter is 1 or more corresponds to the AT state ST5. Further, the case where the value of the AT state counter is "1" corresponds to the situation where the ART ready state process (step S1306) described below is executed in the ART ready state, and the value of the AT state counter is "2". A certain case corresponds to the situation where the ART state process (step S1307) described later is executed in the ART state process, and the case where the value of the AT state counter is "3" is the additional state process (step S1308) is executed, and when the value of the AT status counter is “4”, it corresponds to the situation where ART ending branch processing (step S1309) described later is executed in the ART ending branch state. There is. In this case, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the current state is the addition state by determining whether or not the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is "3".

If the value of the AT state counter is not "3" (step S2601: NO), that is, if it is one of the ART preparation state, the ART state, and the ART end branch state, the index in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of this time On condition that the value IV=7 to 11 has been won (step S2602: YES), the additional lottery process is executed (step S2603). In the additional lottery processing, first, the additional lottery table corresponding to the index value IV that has been won this time is read. The additional lottery table is provided corresponding to each of the index values IV=7 to 11, and the more the winning lottery process (FIG. 18) is, the more wins the winning combination is. It is set to increase the probability of winning. In the additional lottery processing, the value of the lottery counter for additional lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the additional lottery table read this time.

When the result of the addition lottery processing is addition addition (step S2604: YES), the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is not "4" (step S2605: NO), that is, the ART preparation state or ART. On condition that it is in the state, the addition type lottery process is executed (step S2606). The addition type lottery process is a process for deciding by a lottery which of the addition of the number of continuous games in one execution in the ART state and the addition of the execution number in the ART state to be executed as the addition in this time. In the addition type lottery process, the addition type lottery table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Only one type of addition type lottery table is provided, and it is set so that the number of continuous games is increased with a probability of 90% and the number of execution times in the ART state is increased with a probability of 10%. In the addition type lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for the addition type lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the obtained value is collated with the addition type lottery table.

When the addition of the number of continuous games is selected in the addition type lottery process (step S2607: YES), the game number addition flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2608). The game number addition flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the addition of the number of continuous games has occurred in the current game. After that, addition processing of the addition generation counter is executed (step S2609). In the addition processing, lottery processing for the number of additional games is executed. The number of additional games that can be selected in the lottery process is any of 10, 20, 40, 60 and 100 games. Then, the additional game number selected in the additional game number lottery process is added to the additional game generation counter provided in the main RAM 84. The addition occurrence counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of addition games that have occurred in the current game. The number of games to be added may not be determined by lottery but may be fixed to a predetermined number of games.

On the other hand, when the addition of the number of times of execution in the ART state is selected in the addition type lottery process (step S2607: NO), "1" is set to the set number addition flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2610). The set number addition flag is a flag for the main-side MPU 82 to specify that the execution times of the ART state have been added in the current game. After that, the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is incremented by 1. It should be noted that the number of execution times to be added in the ART state may be determined by lottery.

When the value of the AT state counter is "4" (step S2605: YES), that is, in the ART end branch state, the processes of steps S2610 and S2611 are executed without executing the addition type lottery process. .. As a result, in the case where it is in the ART end branch state, when the addition is won in the addition lottery processing, the execution times of the ART state are surely added.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the process of step S2609 is executed, or the process of step S2611 is executed, whether the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is "1" or "2". It is determined whether or not (step S2612). If the value of the AT state counter is "1" or "2" (step S2612: YES), that is, if it is in the ART preparation state or ART state, the transition lottery process to the addition state is executed (step S2613). In the transition lottery process to the addition state, first, the addition state transition lottery table corresponding to the index value IV that has been won this time is read. The transition lottery table is provided corresponding to each of the index values IV=7 to 11, and the more the winning combination with the lower winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 18), the higher the transition to the addition state. In the lottery process, it is set so that the probability of winning the transition to the additional state is high. In the transition lottery process to the addition state, the value of the lottery counter for the transition lottery which is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the addition state transition lottery table read this time. ..

When the result of the transition lottery process to the addition state is the transition winning (step S2614: YES), "1" is set to the addition state transition flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2615). The addition state transition flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the transition condition to the addition state is satisfied. By setting the addition state transition flag to "1", transition to the addition state occurs in the game in which the lottery mode transitions to the second RT mode in the ART preparation state, and the current game occurs in the ART state. When it ends, a transition to the add-on state occurs.

<Processing contents regarding ART preparation state>
Next, the ART preparation state process executed in step S1306 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29) will be described. Since the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game, the ART preparation state process is also executed at the end of the game, that is, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. .. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the ART preparation state process.

In the ART preparation state process, if the game number addition flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2701: YES), the game number addition flag is cleared to "0" (step S2702). After that, the game number addition command in which the information corresponding to the value of the addition generation counter of the main side RAM 84 is set is set as a transmission target to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S2703). The game number addition command is a command for causing the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition of the number of continuous games in one execution of the ART state has occurred, and the command is the command output process ((13)) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). In step S309), it is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the game number addition command from the main MPU 82, it reads the control table corresponding to the game number addition command received this time in the other process (step S1629) of the command corresponding process (FIG. 37). By performing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the addition of the number of continuing games is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is performed according to the control table. As a result, a light-emission effect corresponding to the addition of the number of continuous games is executed. Further, the display control of the image display device 67 is executed in accordance with the control table to execute the display effect corresponding to the addition of the number of continuous games, and the image corresponding to the number of additional games generated this time. Is displayed.

Returning to the description of the ART preparation state process (FIG. 53 ), after setting the game number addition command as the transmission target, the value set in the addition generation counter of the main RAM 84 is added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 84. Yes (step S2704). As a result, the number of continuous games in the ART state is added. After that, the value of the addition generation counter of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2705).

In the ART preparation state process, if the set number addition flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2706: YES), the set number addition flag is cleared to "0" (step S2707). After that, the command for adding the number of sets is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S2708). The set number addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition of the execution number in the ART state has occurred, and the command is the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). It is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the set number addition command from the main MPU 82, it reads the control table corresponding to the set number addition command in the other process (step S1629) of the command corresponding process (FIG. 37). By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the addition of the execution times in the ART state is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. As a result, the light emission effect corresponding to the addition of the number of times of execution in the ART state is executed. Further, the display control of the image display device 67 is executed according to the control table, so that the display effect corresponding to the addition of the execution times in the ART state is executed.

When the process of step S2705 is executed, when the negative determination is made in step S2706, or when the process of step S2708 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2709. In step S2709, based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, it is determined whether or not the second RT replay prize has occurred in the current game. When the second RT replay prize is generated (step S2709: YES), the condition for shifting to the additional state is satisfied by determining whether or not "1" is set in the additional state transition flag of the main RAM 84. It is determined whether or not (step S2710).

When "1" is not set in the addition state transition flag (step S2710: NO), "2" is set in the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 (step S2711). As a result, the game state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state. Further, in order to set the lottery mode to the second RT mode, the data of the main RAM 84 is set (step S2712). After that, on condition that the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 84 is "0" (step S2713: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S2714).

If a negative determination is made in step S2713, or if the processing of step S2714 is executed, an ART state generation command is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 92 (step S2715). The command to generate the ART state is a command for causing the production-side MPU 92 to recognize that the transition to the ART state has occurred, and the command is produced in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). It is transmitted to the side MPU 92.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives an ART state generation command from the main-side MPU 82, it reads the control table corresponding to the ART state generation command in the other processing (step S1629) of the command response processing (FIG. 37). By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the transition to the ART state is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. As a result, the light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the ART state is executed. Further, the display control of the image display device 67 is executed according to the control table, so that the display effect corresponding to the transition to the ART state is executed.

On the other hand, if the second RT replay winning has occurred (step S2709: YES), and the addition state transition flag of the main RAM 84 is set to “1” (step S2710: YES), the addition state transition flag is set. "0" is cleared (step S2716). After that, "3" is set to the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 (step S2717). As a result, the game state shifts from the ART preparation state to the addition state. Further, in order to set the lottery mode to the second RT mode, the data of the main RAM 84 is set (step S2718). After that, on condition that the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 84 is "0" (step S2719: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S2720).

If a negative determination is made in step S2719, or if the process of step S2720 is executed, a command to generate an additional state is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S2721). The add-on state generation command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the transition to the add-on state has occurred, and the command is produced by the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). It is transmitted to the side MPU 92.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives a command to generate an additional state from the main-side MPU 82, it makes an affirmative decision in step S1621 of the command handling process (FIG. 37) to execute the processes of steps S1622 and S1623. Specifically, in step S1622, the output start processing of the drive signal for position placement at the time of notification is executed. Accordingly, in the drive control process (step S1506) of the movable object in the effect control process (FIG. 36) of the effect-side MPU 92, the stop order notification device 71 is set to the initial position with respect to the rotation drive unit 74 of the stop order notification device 71. The output of the drive signal for setting the drive state to rotate to the notification time position is started from. The output of the drive signal is continued until it is determined that the stop order notification device 71 is located at the notification time position based on the detection result of the notification time position detection sensor 78. The time required to dispose the stop order notification device 71 from the initial position to the notification time position is 3 seconds.

Further, in step S1623, the control table corresponding to the command to generate the additional state is read. By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. As a result, the light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state is executed. Further, the display control of the image display device 67 is executed according to the control table, so that the display effect corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state is executed.

Returning to the description of the ART preparation state process (FIG. 53 ), when the process of step S2715 is executed or the process of step S2721 is executed, the third standby value is set in the progress standby counter 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2722). As described above, the progress standby counter 84a is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the game is in a state of waiting for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player. The value set in the progress standby counter 84a is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process of step S307 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. When the value of the progress standby counter 84a is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S511 in the normal process (FIG. 15) to wait for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the player's operation. You will have to wait. As a result, when the transition to the ART state occurs or the transition to the addition state occurs, the progress of the game based on the operation of the player and the start of the new game correspond to the third standby value for a predetermined period. (For example, 8 seconds) will be waited. During this standby period, various effects corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the ART state or the transition to the additional state in the speaker unit 65, the effect light emitting unit 66, and the image display device 67 are executed. In this way, the progress of the game is on standby and the production corresponding to the transition of the game state is executed using the standby period, so that the transition to the ART state occurs or the transition to the additional state occurs. It is possible for the player to clearly recognize what has been done.

Here, as described above, when the transition to the addition state occurs, the stop order notification device 71 is displaced from the initial position to the notification time position. In this case, the period required for the displacement is 3 sec, which is included in the waiting period in which the progress of the game is waited for when shifting to the additional state. Then, as already described, various effects corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state are executed in this standby period. This makes it possible to arrange the stop order notification device 71 from the initial position to the notification time position by utilizing the waiting period of the game for making the player clearly recognize that the transition to the addition state has occurred. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S2709, or if the process of step S2722 is executed, another RT mode transition process is executed (step S2723). In the other RT mode transition processing, when it is specified that the first RT replay prize has been generated based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode and the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86. When it is specified that the first falling replay prize has occurred based on the above, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the second falling replay prize has occurred based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, Switch to 1RT mode.

<Processing contents regarding ART state>
Next, the ART state process executed in step S1307 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29) will be described. Since the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game, the ART state process is also executed at the end of the game, that is, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ART state processing.

In the ART state process, first, the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S2801). After that, the addition support process is executed (step S2802). In the addition support processing, the same processing as the processing of steps S2701 to S2708 in the ART preparation state processing (FIG. 53) is executed. Accordingly, if the condition for adding the number of continuous games in the execution time of the ART state is satisfied at the start of the current game, the process corresponding to the satisfaction of the additional condition is executed, and the ART state is started at the start of the current game. When the addition condition of the execution times of is satisfied, the process corresponding to the satisfaction of the addition condition is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the transition condition to the additional state is satisfied by determining whether the addition state transition flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2803). When "1" is set to the addition state transition flag (step S2803: YES), the addition state transition flag is cleared to "0" (step S2804). After that, "3" is set to the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 (step S2805). As a result, the game state shifts from the ART state to the additional state. After that, the command to generate the additional state is set as a transmission target to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S2806). The add-on state generation command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the transition to the add-on state has occurred, and the command is produced by the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). It is transmitted to the side MPU 92.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives a command to generate an additional state from the main-side MPU 82, it makes an affirmative decision in step S1621 of the command handling process (FIG. 37) to execute the processes of steps S1622 and S1623. Specifically, in step S1622, the output start processing of the drive signal for position placement at the time of notification is executed. Accordingly, in the drive control process (step S1506) of the movable object in the effect control process (FIG. 36) of the effect-side MPU 92, the stop order notification device 71 is set to the initial position with respect to the rotation drive unit 74 of the stop order notification device 71. The output of the drive signal for setting the drive state to rotate to the notification time position is started from. The output of the drive signal is continued until it is determined that the stop order notification device 71 is located at the notification time position based on the detection result of the notification time position detection sensor 78. The time required to dispose the stop order notification device 71 from the initial position to the notification time position is 3 seconds.

Further, in step S1623, the control table corresponding to the command to generate the additional state is read. By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. As a result, the light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state is executed. Further, the display control of the image display device 67 is executed according to the control table, so that the display effect corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state is executed.

Returning to the description of the ART state process (FIG. 54 ), when the process of step S2806 is executed, the third standby value is set in the progress standby counter 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2807). As described above, the progress standby counter 84a is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the game is in a state of waiting for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player. The value set in the progress standby counter 84a is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process of step S307 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. When the value of the progress standby counter 84a is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S511 in the normal process (FIG. 15) to wait for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the player's operation. You will have to wait. As a result, when the transition to the additional state occurs, the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player are waited for a predetermined period (for example, 8 sec) corresponding to the third standby value. It will be. During this standby period, various effects corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state are performed by the speaker unit 65, the effect light emitting unit 66, and the image display device 67. In this way, the progress of the game is waited, and the waiting period is used to execute the effect corresponding to the transition to the gaming state, so that the player can clearly recognize that the transition to the additional state has occurred. It becomes possible.

Here, as described above, when the transition to the addition state occurs, the stop order notification device 71 is displaced from the initial position to the notification time position. In this case, the period required for the displacement is 3 sec, which is included in the waiting period in which the progress of the game is waited for when shifting to the additional state. Then, as already described, various effects corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the addition state are executed in this standby period. This makes it possible to arrange the stop order notification device 71 from the initial position to the notification time position by utilizing the waiting period of the game for making the player clearly recognize that the transition to the addition state has occurred. ..

On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the addition state transition flag (step S2803: NO), the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 84 is "0" (step S2808: YES), It is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is "0" and the lottery mode is the normal mode (step S2809). When a negative determination is made in step S2809, the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "4" (step S2810). As a result, the game state shifts from the ART state to the ART end branch state. After that, the generation command of the end branch state is set as the transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S2811). The command to generate the end branch state is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the transition to the ART end branch state has occurred, and the command is the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the ending branch state occurrence command from the main side MPU 82, it reads the control table corresponding to the ending branch state occurrence command in the other processing (step S1629) of the command handling processing (FIG. 37). By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the transition to the ART end branch state is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. As a result, the light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the ART end branch state is executed. Further, the display effect corresponding to the occurrence of the transition to the ART end branch state is executed by executing the display control of the image display device 67 according to the control table.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2809, the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2812). As a result, the AT state ST5 ends and returns to the normal game state. After that, the AT end command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S2813). The AT end command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended, and the command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). To be done.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the AT end command from the main side MPU 82, it reads the control table corresponding to the AT end command in the other process (step S1629) of the command corresponding process (FIG. 37). By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5 is output, and by performing the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 according to the control table. A light emission effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5 is executed. Further, the display control of the image display device 67 is executed according to the control table, so that the display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5 is executed.

After that, the third waiting value is set in the progress waiting counter 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2814). As described above, the progress standby counter 84a is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the game is in a state of waiting for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player. The value set in the progress standby counter 84a is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process of step S307 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. When the value of the progress standby counter 84a is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S511 in the normal process (FIG. 15) to wait for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the player's operation. You will have to wait. As a result, when the AT state ST5 ends, the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player are waited for a predetermined period (for example, 8 sec) corresponding to the third standby value. Become. During the standby period, the speaker unit 65, the effect light emitting unit 66, and the image display device 67 perform various effects corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5. In this way, the progress of the game is on standby and the production corresponding to the transition of the game state is executed using the standby period, so that the player can clearly recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. It will be possible.

If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the process of step S2811 is executed, or the process of step S2814 is executed, the RT mode transition process is executed (step S2815). In the transition processing of the RT mode, when it is specified that the first RT replay winning is generated based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86. When it is specified that the second RT replay prize has been generated, the mode is shifted to the second RT mode, and when it is specified that the first falling replay prize has been generated based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, it is switched to the normal mode. If it is specified that the second falling replay prize has occurred based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, the first RT mode is entered.

<Processing contents related to addition status>
Next, the processing content regarding the addition state will be described.

First, the flow of the addition state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 55(a) shows the execution period of the addition state, FIG. 55(b) shows the execution period of the continuation rate promotion state that occurs when the addition state is started, and FIG. 55(c) continues in the addition state. FIG. 55(d) shows the execution period of the game, and FIG. 55(e) shows the period of waiting for the progress of the game, which shows the execution period of the additional execution state that occurs after the rate promotion state ends.

At the timing of t1, the additional state is started as shown in FIG. 55(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 55( b ), the continuation rate promotion state, which is a part of the additional state, is set. The addition state includes a continuation rate promotion state set at the start of the addition state and an addition execution state that occurs after the end of the continuation rate promotion state. In the additional execution state, the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 18) is executed, is in a standby state. In this state, Each time the 1 credit insertion button 47 is operated, the lottery process for the number of additional games for the number of continuous games in one execution of the ART state is executed, and the continuous lottery process for the additional execution state is executed. Then, as long as the result of the continuous lottery process does not result in a deviation, the addition execution state continues, and the addition of the number of continuous games based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 occurs.

The probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process in the addition execution state (hereinafter, also referred to as continuous winning probability) has a predetermined initial value of 95% as the minimum probability, and depending on the game result in the continuous rate promotion state, The continuous winning probability may be higher than a predetermined initial value, with a predetermined maximum value (specifically 99%) being less than 100% as an upper limit. The continuation rate promotion state is a state in which it continues for a predetermined number of games (specifically, 20 games), and in each game, the index value IV=7 to 11 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 18). In the case where the winning is achieved in any one of the above cases, the continuation rate promotion lottery processing is executed and the continuation rate promotion is elected, so that the above continuation winning probability is increased. That is, in the addition state, the continuation winning rate probability that can raise the continuous winning probability higher than the predetermined initial value occurs first, and the addition execution state is determined according to the continuation winning probability corresponding to the result in the continuation winning rate promotion state. Will be executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the expected value of the number of additional games that can be acquired in the additional execution state according to the game result in the continuous rate promotion state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional state.

When the addition state is started at the timing of t1, the progress of the game is on standby as shown in FIG. 55(e). Then, the state of waiting for the progress of this game is canceled at the timing of t2. In the period in which the progress of this game is on standby, various effects corresponding to the start of the additional state are executed as described above, and the stop order notification device 71 is displaced from the initial position to the notification time position. ..

By releasing the state of waiting for the progress of the game at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 55(d), the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, and the timing of t6 to t7. A predetermined number of games (specifically, 20 games) including the timing of are executed in the continuation rate promotion state. In these games, as described above, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed when the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination, and the continuation rate promotion lottery process continues. With the rate promotion win, the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process executed in the additional execution state increases.

After that, at the timing of t7, the continuation rate promotion state ends as shown in FIG. 55(b), so that the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 18) as shown in FIG. 55(e). Execution of drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which is to be executed, is in a standby state, and the addition execution state is started as shown in FIG. 55(c). In the addition execution state, no new game is started, and as described above, each time the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the addition of the number of continuous games in one execution time in the ART state occurs. Further, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the continuous lottery processing is also executed, and while the continuous lottery processing is continuous winning, the addition execution state is continued and the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 is performed. On the basis of the above, the opportunity to add the number of continuous games is given.

After that, at the timing of t8, the continuous lottery process based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 does not result in continuous winning, so that the addition execution state is ended as shown in FIG. 55(c). The additional state is not yet finished at the timing of t8, and the state of waiting for the progress of the game is continued until the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 55(e). During the period in which the progress of the game is on standby, various effects corresponding to the end of the addition state are executed, and the stop order notification device 71 is displaced from the notification position to the initial position. Then, at the timing of t9, the state of waiting for the progress of the game as shown in FIG. 55(e) is released, and the addition state is finished as shown in FIG. 55(a).

The contents of the processing executed in the addition state will be specifically described below. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the lottery handling processing in the addition state. If the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is “3” corresponding to the added state in the lottery corresponding process during AT (FIG. 52), the lottery corresponding process in the additional state (step S2601: YES) is a step. It is executed in S2616. Since the lottery corresponding process during AT (FIG. 52) is executed at the start of the game, the lottery corresponding process during the addition state is also started at the start of the game, that is, before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Executed.

If it is the start timing of the addition state (step S2901: YES), the value of the continuation rate counter 84e provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2902), and the promotion provided in the main RAM 84 is performed. The period counter is set to "20" (step S2903). The continuation rate counter 84e is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery processing in the addition execution state, and can take a value of "0" to "4". When the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is "0", it corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 95%, and when the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is "1", it corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 96%. If the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is “2”, it corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 97%, and if the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is “3”, it corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 98%. The case where the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is "4" corresponds to the 99% continuous winning probability. By clearing the value of the continuation rate counter 84e to "0" at the start timing of the addition state, the continuation winning probability is set to 95% as an initial value. The promotion period counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining continuing games in the continuation rate promotion state, and the value of the promotion period counter is 1 every time one game is consumed in the continuation rate promotion state. Is subtracted. By setting the promotion period counter to “20” at the start timing of the addition state, the continuation rate promotion state will continue for 20 games.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or if the processing of step S2903 is executed, whether or not the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the lottery processing (FIG. 18) of the winning combination in this game. Is determined (step S2904). When the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV=7 to 11 (step S2904: YES), on the condition that the value of the continuation rate counter 84e of the main RAM 84 is not "4" (step S2905: NO), The continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed (step S2906).

In the continuation rate promotion lottery process, first, the continuation rate promotion lottery table corresponding to the index value IV that has been won this time is read. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the continuation rate promotion lottery table. The continuation rate promotion lottery table is provided in correspondence with each of the index values IV=7 to 11, and the continuation rate promotion lottery is performed as the winning combination of the winning probability in the lottery process (FIG. 18) is low. It is set so that the probability of winning the continuation rate promotion is high in the processing. Specifically, in the index values IV=7 to 11, the larger the value of the index value IV, the lower the winning probability in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 18) is set, but the larger the value of the index value IV is, It is set that the probability of winning the continuation rate promotion is high. In particular, with the index value IV=11 in which the BB winning data is set, the probability of winning the continuation rate promotion is set to 100%. In the continuation rate promotion lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for continuation rate promotion lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the continuation rate promotion lottery table read this time.

When the result of the continuation rate promotion lottery process is the continuation rate promotion win (step S2907: YES), "1" is set to the continuation rate promotion flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2908). The continuation rate promotion flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the continuation rate promotion has been elected. Then, the value of the continuation rate counter 84e of the main RAM 84 is incremented by 1 (step S2909). As a result, the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process in the addition execution state is increased by 1%.

Next, the addition state process will be described. The addition state process is executed in step S1308 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29). Since the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game, the addition state process is also executed at the end of the game, that is, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the addition state process.

When "1" is set to the continuation rate promotion flag of the main side RAM 84 (step S3001: YES), the continuation rate promotion flag is cleared to "0" (step S3002). After that, the continuation rate promotion command is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 92 (step S3003). The continuation rate promotion command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the continuation rate promotion is selected in the continuation rate promotion lottery process, and the command is a command output process (step) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) It is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in S309).

Here, as already described, the continuous winning probability is set to 95% at the start timing of the addition state. On the other hand, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 59A, the continuous winning probability at the start timing of the additional state displayed on the image display device 67 is 90%. That is, the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 at the start timing of the additional state is a value lower than the actual continuous winning probability. Then, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 until the continuation rate promotion state ends is the actual continuous winning probability.

The value of the continuation winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is added by 1% as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(b) when the continuation rate promoting lottery process results in continuation rate promoting win. , Even if the continuation rate promotion lottery process does not result in a continuation rate promotion win, if the display update lottery process results in an update win, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(b), 1% Is added. Further, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is obtained by adding 1% to the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 in all the remaining number of games in the continuous rate promotion state. In this case, 1% is added as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(b) in each game in the case of finally reaching the maximum value of the continuous winning probability of 99%. In this way, by starting to display the value of the continuous winning probability on the image display device 67 from a value lower than the actual continuous winning probability, the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 in the continuation rate promotion state is increased. However, at least a difference between those initial values will occur. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous winning probability has been increased in the continuation rate promotion state, and it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

The control of the display of the continuous winning probability in the image display device 67 as described above is executed in the case of the addition state (step S1624: YES) in the command corresponding process (FIG. 37) in the production side MPU 92, and is for the addition state control. The process is performed (step S1625). FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the control processing for the addition state.

In the control process for the addition state, when the continuation rate promotion command is received from the main MPU 82 (step S3101: YES), the actual continuation rate counter 94a provided in the production side RAM 94 as shown in FIG. 59(c). Is incremented by 1 (step S3102), and the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b provided in the effect side RAM 94 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 59(c) (step S3103). The actual continuation rate counter 94a is a counter for the actual-side winning probability to be specified by the effect-side MPU 82, and has a minimum value of "5" and a maximum value of "9". At the timing when the addition state is started, the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is set to "5" which is the minimum value. When the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is "5", it corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 95%, and when the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is "6", it corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 96%. When the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is "7", it corresponds to the continuation winning probability of 97%, and when the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is "8", the continuation probability is 98%. It corresponds to the winning probability, and the case where the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is "9" corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 99%.

The display continuation rate counter 94b is a counter for the production side MPU 82 to specify the value of the continuation winning probability displayed on the image display device 67, and the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "9". At the timing when the addition state is started, the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is set to the minimum value "0". When the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "0", it corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 90%, and when the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "1", it corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 91%. When the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "2", the continuous winning probability is 92%, and when the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "3", the continuation probability is 93%. It corresponds to the winning probability, the case where the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "4" corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 94%, and the case where the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "5". It corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 95%, the case where the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "6" corresponds to the continuous winning probability of 96%, and the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "7". When the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "8", the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b corresponds to the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b. Is 9 corresponds to a continuous winning probability of 99%.

After performing the processes of steps S3102 and S3103, a setting process for display is performed (step S3104). In the setting process for display, the image display device 67 is controlled so that the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 corresponds to the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b. The value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the device 67 is incremented by 1. That is, when the continuation rate promotion command is received, the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is incremented by 1, so that when the continuation rate promotion lottery process in the main MPU 82 results in continuation rate promotion win, the image display device 67 is displayed. The value of the continuous winning probability displayed at is incremented by 1.

In the control process for the addition state in the continuation rate promotion state, even if the continuation rate promotion command is not received from the main MPU 82 (step S3101: NO), the game end command is received from the main MPU 82. In that case (step S3105: YES), if the predetermined addition condition is satisfied, the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is added. Specifically, when the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is larger than the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b (step S3106: YES), the number of remaining continuing games in the continuation rate promotion state is "9". When it matches the value obtained by subtracting the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b from (step S3107: YES), the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is incremented by 1 (step S3108). Then, by performing the setting process for display similarly to step S3104 (step S3109), the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 corresponds to the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b. Thus, the image display device 67 is display-controlled, and the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is incremented by one. As a result, when 1% is added to the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 in all the games of the remaining continuous games in the continuous rate promotion state, it is finally the maximum value of the continuous winning probability. In each game when the situation becomes 99%, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is added by 1% regardless of the result of the continuous rate promotion lottery process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3107, display update lottery processing is executed (step S3110). In the display update lottery process, the lottery table for display update is read from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94. Only one type of lottery table for display update is provided, and the probability of winning the update is 50% in the lottery process for display update. In the display update lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for display update lottery that is regularly updated in the effect side RAM 94 is acquired, and the obtained value is collated with the display update lottery table.

When the result of the display update lottery process is the update winning (step S3111: YES), the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is incremented by 1 (step S3112). Then, by performing the setting process for display similarly to step S3104 (step S3113), the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 corresponds to the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b. The display of the image display device 67 is controlled as described above, and the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is incremented by one. As a result, even if the continuation rate promotion lottery process does not result in the continuation rate promotion win, if the display update lottery process results in the update win, the continuation win probability displayed on the image display device 67. Value of 1% is added.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 61, how the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is updated will be described. 61A shows the execution period of the continuation rate promotion state, FIG. 61B shows the execution period of the game, and FIG. 61C shows the states of the actual continuation rate counter 94a and the display continuation rate counter 94b. 61(d) shows the timing of the continuation rate promotion win in the continuation rate promotion lottery process, and FIG. 61(e) is the timing at which the display of the continuation win probability in the image display device 67 is updated so that 1 is added. Indicates. In FIG. 61(c), the state of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is shown by a chain double-dashed line, and the state of the display continuation rate counter 94b is shown by a solid line.

At the timing of t1, the continuation rate promotion state is started as shown in FIG. 61(a). In this case, the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is "5" and the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "0" as shown in FIG. 61(c). Therefore, although the actual continuous winning probability is 95%, 90% is displayed as the display of the continuous winning probability on the image display device 67.

After that, at the timing of t2 which is the end of the second game in the continuous rate promotion state, the continuous rate promotion lottery process in the main MPU 82 does not result in the continuous rate promotion lottery, but in the display update lottery process in the production side MPU 92. Renewal win. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61E, the display of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is increased by 1%. In this case, the display of the continuous winning probability is 91%. However, even in this situation, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is smaller than the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a.

Thereafter, at the timing of t3 which is the start time of the fifth game in the continuation rate promotion state, as shown in FIG. 61(d), the continuation rate promotion lottery process in the main MPU 82 results in the continuation rate promotion win. Therefore, at the timing of t4 when the fifth game ends, the display of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 as shown in FIG. 61(e) is increased by 1%. In this case, the continuous winning probability is displayed at 92%. However, even in this situation, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is smaller than the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a.

After that, at the timing of t5 which is the start time of the seventh game in the continuation rate promotion state, as shown in FIG. 61(d), the continuation rate promotion lottery process in the main MPU 82 results in the continuation rate promotion win. Therefore, at the timing of t6 when the seventh game ends, the display of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 as shown in FIG. 61(e) is increased by 1%. In this case, the display of the continuous winning probability is 93%. However, even in this situation, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is smaller than the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a.

Thereafter, at the timing of t7, which is the start time of the 13th game in the continuation rate promotion state, as shown in FIG. 61(d), the continuation rate promotion lottery process in the main MPU 82 results in the continuation rate promotion win. Therefore, at the timing of t8, which is the end of the 13th game, the display of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 as shown in FIG. 61(e) is increased by 1%. In this case, the display of the continuous winning probability is 94%. However, even in this situation, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is smaller than the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a.

After that, in the 16th game in the continuous rate promotion state, if the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is increased by 1% in all the remaining number of continuous games in the continuous rate promotion state, Eventually, the maximum winning probability will be 99%. That is, in the 16th game in the continuous rate promotion state, the number of remaining continuous games is 5. On the other hand, since the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is "4", the difference from the maximum value "9" is "5". In this situation, if the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is smaller than the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b, the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is incremented by 1 in each game, and the continuous winning in the image display device 67 is won. The probability value is added by 1%. Specifically, the figure is shown at each of the timing t9, the timing t10, the timing t11, and the timing t12, which are the end times of the 16th game, the 17th game, the 18th game, and the 19th game in the continuation rate promotion state. As shown in 61(e), the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is incremented by 1, and the value of the continuation winning probability in the image display device 67 is incremented by 1%. As a result, the continuation winning probability is displayed at 98%, which matches the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a.

After that, at the timing of t13, which is the time of the start of the 20th game in the continuous rate promotion state, as shown in FIG. Therefore, at the timing of t14 at the end of the 20th game, the display of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 as shown in FIG. 61(e) is increased by 1%. In this case, the display of the continuous winning probability is 99% which is the maximum value.

As described above, by starting to display the value of the continuous winning probability on the image display device 67 from a value lower than the actual continuous winning probability, the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 in the continuation rate promotion state is increased. However, at least a difference between those initial values will occur. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous winning probability has been increased in the continuation rate promotion state, and it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

When the continuation rate promotion lottery process in the main MPU 82 results in continuation rate promotion win, the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is incremented by 1 and the display of the continuation win probability on the image display device 67 is incremented by 1%. .. This makes it possible to prevent the difference between the actual value of the continuous winning probability and the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 from becoming larger than the difference between the initial values.

Even when the continuation rate promotion lottery process in the main MPU 82 does not result in a continuation rate promotion win, the actual continuation win probability value is higher than the continuation win probability value displayed on the image display device 67. If the value is large, the display-side MPU 92 performs an update win in the display update lottery process, so that the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b is incremented by 1 and the continuation win probability is displayed by 1% on the image display device 67. To be done. As a result, it is possible to irregularly generate a situation in which the display of the continuous winning probability is added by 1%.

When the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is increased by 1% in all the remaining games in the continuous rate promotion state, the maximum value of the continuous winning probability is finally 99%. In each of the above situations, the value is displayed on the image display device 67 regardless of the result of the continuation rate promotion lottery process, provided that the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is larger than the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b. The value of the continuous winning probability is increased by 1%. As a result, in the configuration in which the display of the continuous winning probability is updated only by 1% in one game to increase the frequency of update, the continuous winning probability is the maximum value 99. Even in the situation where the percentage is %, it is possible to set the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 as the value of the actual continuous rate counter 94a within the range of the continuous rate promotion state.

The value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is updated on condition that the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is larger than the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b. As a result, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 does not become larger than the value of the actual continuous winning probability. Therefore, the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is subtracted. Will never be updated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from being unnecessarily increased.

Returning to the description of the addition state process (FIG. 58) in the main MPU 82, if the negative determination is made in step S3001 or the process of step S3003 is executed, the value of the promotion period counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S3004). If the value of the promotion period counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3005: YES), it means that the continuation rate promotion state is finished and the addition execution state is started. The process for the addition execution state shown in is executed.

For details of the process for the add-on execution state, a start command of the add-on period is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 92 (step S3006). The add-on period start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the add-on execution state has been started, and the command is generated by the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). It is transmitted to the MPU 92.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives a start-up period start command from the main-side MPU 82, an affirmative decision is made in step S3114 in the control process (FIG. 60) for the addition-up state, and a control table corresponding to the start-up period start command is displayed. read out. The sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed in accordance with the control table to output a sound corresponding to the addition execution state, and the emission control of the performance light emitting unit 66 is executed in accordance with the control table to add the sound. A light emission effect corresponding to the execution state is executed. Further, the display control corresponding to the addition execution state is executed by executing the display control of the image display device 67 according to the control table. It should be noted that the image display device 67 displays a notification image that allows the player to recognize that the first credit insertion button 47 should be operated and that the addition of the number of continuous games will occur based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47. Is displayed.

Returning to the description of the add-on state process (FIG. 58), when the start lever 41 is not operated in the add-on execution state (step S3007: NO), the first credit insertion button 47 is operated (step S3008: YES). The lottery process for the number of additional games is executed (step S3009). In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the lottery table for the number of additional games is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Only one type of lottery table for additional games is provided. In the lottery table for the number of additional games, 1 game, 2 games, 3 games, 5 games and 10 games are set as the number of additional games that can be selected, and the probability of selecting 1 game is 50% and 2 games. Is selected so that the probability of being selected is 30%, the probability of selecting 3 games is 10%, the probability of selecting 5 games is 7%, and the probability of selecting 10 games is 3%. .. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the value of the lottery counter for the additional game number lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the obtained value is collated with the lottery table for the additional game number.

After that, the additional game number selected in the additional game number lottery process is added to the additional game counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3010). The add-on counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the total number of add-on games that have occurred in the add-on execution state. After that, the addition generation command is set as a transmission target to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S3011). The add-on occurrence command is a command for causing the effecting side MPU 92 to recognize that the add-on has occurred once when the add-on game number is added once in the add-on execution state, and the number of continuous games to be added. The command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on occurrence command from the main MPU 82, an affirmative decision is made in step S3116 in the add-on state control processing (FIG. 60), and the control table corresponding to the add-on occurrence command is read. By performing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the addition of the number of continuing games is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is performed according to the control table. As a result, a light-emission effect corresponding to the addition of the number of continuous games is executed. Further, the display control of the image display device 67 is executed in accordance with the control table to execute the display effect corresponding to the addition of the number of continuous games, and also to display the number of games to be added this time. The image shown is displayed.

In the addition state process (FIG. 58), after the process of step S3011, the continuous lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuation rate counter 84e of the main RAM 84 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3012). As described above, since the continuation rate counter 84e can take values of "0" to "4", the continuous lottery table is provided in a total of five types, with one-to-one correspondence with each value. The continuous lottery table corresponding to the case where the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is "0" is set so that the continuous winning probability is 95%, and corresponds to the case where the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is "1". The continuous lottery table is set to have a continuous winning probability of 96%, and the continuous lottery table corresponding to the case where the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is "2" has a continuous winning probability of 97%. When the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is "3", the continuous lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuation winning probability is 98%, and the value of the continuation rate counter 84e is "4". The continuous lottery table corresponding to the case is set such that the continuous winning probability is 99%.

Then, the continuous lottery process is executed (step S3013). In the continuous lottery processing, the value of the lottery counter for continuous lottery that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the continuous lottery table read in step S3012. As a result, the continuous lottery processing is executed according to the continuous winning probability determined in the continuous rate promotion state. When the result of the continuous lottery process is continuous winning (step S3014: YES), the process returns to step S3007. In this case, the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 is performed without the operation of the start lever 41, so that the processes of steps S3008 to S3014 are executed again. That is, while the continuous lottery process is a continuous winning, the lottery process for the number of additional games and the continuous lottery process based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 are repeated on condition that the start lever 41 is not operated. .. When the continuous lottery process does not result in the continuous winning (step S3014: NO), the process of ending the additional state for ending the additional state is executed (step S3019). The ending process will be described later.

Here, when the start lever 41 is not operated in the addition execution state and the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning, the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 is performed, and the steps S3009 to S3014 are executed. The process is repeated. The addition state process is executed as a part of the process (step S510) at the end of the game in the normal process (FIG. 15). Then, by repeating the processes of step S3009 to step S3014 in the additional state process, the progress of the normal process is awaited. That is, in the addition execution state, the execution of the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 18) is executed is in a standby state. This enables the player to pay attention to the occurrence of the addition of the number of continuous games in the addition execution state.

When the start lever 41 is operated in the add-on execution state (step S3007: YES), it means that the add-on execution state in which the addition of the number of continued games occurs based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 has been canceled. When the addition execution state is canceled, the number of compensation games is determined by the number-of-compensation-games lottery process, and the value of the number of compensation games is added to the value of the addition counter of the main RAM 84. As a result, when the addition execution state is canceled, the compensation game number lottery is performed with respect to the addition amount of the continuing games generated based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 until the cancellation operation is performed. The number of compensation games determined by the processing will be added.

For details of the process for determining the number of compensation games, first, the compensation lottery table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3015). The compensation lottery table is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the possible values of the continuation rate counter 84e. In other words, the compensation lottery table is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the possible winning probability of the continuous lottery process. As described above, since the continuation rate counter 84e can take values of "0" to "4", the compensation lottery table is provided in a total of five types, with one-to-one correspondence with each of these values. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each compensation lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the compensation lottery table corresponding to the case where the continuous winning probability is 95%, the number of compensatory games that can be selected is set to 33 to 40 games, and the continuous winning probability is 96%. The number of compensatory games that can be selected is set to 41 to 50 in the compensation lottery table corresponding to, and the number of compensatory games that can be selected is 55 in the compensation lottery table corresponding to the case where the continuous winning probability is 97%. In the compensation lottery table corresponding to the case where the continuous winning probability is 98%, the number of compensating games that can be selected is set to 82 games and 102 games, and the continuous winning probability is 99%. In the compensation lottery table corresponding to a certain case, the number of selectable compensation games is set to 164 to 204 games.

Due to the relationship with the selection mode of the additional game number in the additional game number lottery process (step S3009), the expected value of the additional game number generated when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in the additional execution state is 2.05. It's a game. Then, in the case where the cancel operation is performed at a predetermined timing in the addition execution state, assuming that the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 is continued without performing the cancel operation at the predetermined timing, the continuous winning probability is 95. If the percentage is %, 41 games are expected to be acquired as additional games, and if the continuous winning probability is 96%, approximately 51 games are expected to be acquired as additional games, and the continuous winning probability is 97%. If so, it is expected that about 68 games will be acquired as the number of additional games, and if the continuous winning probability is 98%, it will be expected that about 103 games will be acquired as the number of additional games, and the continuous winning probability will be 99%. In that case, it is expected that 205 games will be acquired as the number of additional games (hereinafter, each of these additional games is also referred to as an expected number of acquired games). On the other hand, the maximum value of the number of compensation games for each continuous winning probability is smaller than the corresponding expected number of acquisition games. As a result, in the configuration in which the predetermined number of compensation games is guaranteed when the cancel operation is performed, it is better to continue the addition execution state without performing the cancel operation than when the cancel operation is performed. Finally, it is possible to increase the number of additional games that can be finally acquired. Therefore, it becomes possible to urge the player to play a game by operating the first credit insertion button 47 in the addition execution state.

On the other hand, the minimum value of the number of compensation games of each continuous winning probability is 80% or more of the corresponding expected number of acquisition games. That is, 80% or more of the expected number of games to be acquired from the time of performing the cancel operation is guaranteed as the number of additional games. Therefore, even if the cancel operation is unintentionally performed, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

Also, the higher the continuous winning probability, the larger the number of compensation games. Specifically, the minimum value of the compensation game number when the continuous winning probability is (m+1)% is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the compensation game number when the continuous winning probability is m%. ing. As a result, if a cancel operation occurs with a high continuous winning probability, the number of compensation games will be greater than if a cancel operation occurs with a low continuous winning probability Even if a cancel operation is performed, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of disadvantage.

Further, when the cancel operation is performed, not only the number of compensation games is added as the number of additional games in the additional execution state, but the additional operation acquired based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 before the cancellation operation is performed. The number of compensation games will be added to the number of games. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the number of additional games generated based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 from being invalidated before the cancel operation is performed.

In step S3015 of the addition state process (FIG. 58), the compensation lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuation rate counter 84e of the main RAM 84 is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After that, the compensation game number lottery process is executed (step S3016). In the compensation game number lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for the number of compensation games that is regularly updated in the main RAM 84 is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the compensation lottery table read in step S3015. As a result, one of the compensation game numbers set in the compensation lottery table corresponding to the current continuous winning probability is selected. Then, the value of the compensation game number selected by the compensation game number lottery process is added to the value of the addition counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3017).

After that, the cancel occurrence command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S3018). The cancel occurrence command is the total number of games including the fact that the cancel operation occurs when the cancel operation occurs in the add-on execution state, and the number of additional games acquired before the cancel operation occurs and the number of compensation games generated by the cancel operation. It is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize the number. That is, the cancellation occurrence command is set with information corresponding to the value of the add-on counter after the addition processing is executed in step S3017. The cancel generation command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

When the production side MPU 92 receives the cancel occurrence command from the main side MPU 82, an affirmative decision is made in step S3118 in the control processing (FIG. 60) for the addition state, and the control table corresponding to the cancellation occurrence command is read. By executing the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 according to the control table, a sound corresponding to the cancellation operation of the addition execution state is output, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table. By doing so, the light emission effect corresponding to the cancellation operation of the addition execution state is performed. In addition, the display control corresponding to the cancel operation of the addition execution state is performed by executing the display control of the image display device 67 according to the control table, and is acquired before the cancel operation occurs. An image showing the total number of games including the number of additional games and the number of compensation games generated by the cancel operation is displayed.

Here, how the addition execution state is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 63. 63A shows the execution period of the addition execution state, FIG. 63B shows the operation timing of the first credit insertion button 47, FIG. 63C shows the operation timing of the start lever 41, and FIG. (D) shows the timing of the addition of the number of continuous games, and FIG. 63(e) shows how the number of additional games increases.

First, the case where the cancel operation is not performed will be described.

At the timing of t1, the addition execution state is started as shown in FIG. 63(a). In the add-on execution state, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the first credit insertion button is set at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t7, and the timing of t8. 47 is operated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the addition game number is acquired at each of the timing t2 to the timing t8, and the addition game acquired in the addition execution state as shown in FIG. 63(e). The number is increasing. In addition, at each of the timing of t2 to the timing of t7, the continuous execution is continued in the continuous lottery process executed by the main MPU 82, and the additional execution state is continued, while the first credit insertion button 47 is executed at the timing of t8. In the continuous lottery processing executed based on the above operation, continuous winning is not achieved. Therefore, at the subsequent timing of t9, the addition execution state ends as shown in FIG. 63(a).

Next, a case where a cancel operation is performed will be described.

At the timing of t10, the additional execution state is started as shown in FIG. 63(a). In the addition execution state, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the first credit insertion button 47 is operated at each of the timing t11, the timing t12, and the timing t13. In this case, as shown in FIG. 63(d), acquisition of the number of additional games occurs at each of the timing t11 to the timing t13, and as shown in FIG. 63(e), the additional game acquired in the additional execution state. The number is increasing. Further, at each of the timing of t11 to the timing of t13, the continuous execution lottery process executed by the main MPU 82 results in continuous winning, so that the additional execution state is continued.

Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the operation of the start lever 41, that is, the cancel operation is performed as shown in FIG. 63(c). In this case, the number of compensation games is acquired as the number of additional games as shown in FIG. 63(d), and the number of additional games acquired in the additional execution state is increased as shown in FIG. 63(e). Then, at the subsequent timing of t15, the addition execution state ends as shown in FIG. 63(a).

Returning to the description of the addition state processing (FIG. 58 ), if a negative determination is made in step S3014 or if the processing of step S3018 is executed, the addition state ending processing is executed (step S3019). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the addition state.

First, the value of the addition counter of the main RAM 84 is added to the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3201). As a result, the number of continuous games in one execution of the ART state is increased by the number of additional games generated in the additional state. After that, the value of the add-on counter of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3202). Further, "2" is set to the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3203). As a result, the game state shifts from the addition state to the ART state.

After that, the end command in the added state is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S3204). The add-on state end command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the add-on state has ended. Sent.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives the add-on end command from the main-side MPU 82, it makes an affirmative decision in step S1626 of the command handling process (FIG. 37) to execute the processes of steps S1627 and S1628. Specifically, in step S1627, output start processing of a drive signal for initial position return is executed. Thereby, when the movable order drive unit 74 of the stop order notification device 71 is notified of the stop order notification device 71 in the drive control process (step S1506) of the movable object in the effect control process (FIG. 36) of the effect side MPU 92. The output of the drive signal for setting the drive state of rotating from the position to the initial position is started. The output of the drive signal is continued until it is determined that the stop order notification device 71 is located at the initial position based on the detection result of the initial position detection sensor 76. The time required to dispose the stop order notification device 71 from the notification position to the initial position is 3 seconds.

In step S1628, the control table corresponding to the add-on end command is read. The sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed according to the control table to output a sound corresponding to the end of the addition state, and the light emission control of the effect light emitting unit 66 is executed according to the control table to add the addition. A light emission effect corresponding to the end of the state is executed. Further, display control of the image display device 67 is executed according to the control table, so that a display effect corresponding to the end of the addition state is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the addition end processing (FIG. 64 ), when the processing of step S3204 is executed, the third waiting value is set in the progress waiting counter 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S3205). As described above, the progress standby counter 84a is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the game is in a state of waiting for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player. The value set in the progress standby counter 84a is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process of step S307 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. When the value of the progress standby counter 84a is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S511 in the normal process (FIG. 15) to wait for the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the player's operation. You will have to wait. As a result, when the addition state ends, the progress of the game and the start of a new game based on the operation of the player are waited for a predetermined period (for example, 8 sec) corresponding to the third standby value. .. During this standby period, various effects corresponding to the end of the addition state are executed by the speaker unit 65, the effect light emitting unit 66, and the image display device 67. In this way, the progress of the game is waited, and the waiting period is used to execute the effect corresponding to the end of the addition state, so that the player can clearly recognize that the addition state has ended. Becomes

Here, as described above, when the addition state ends, the stop order notification device 71 is displaced from the notification position to the initial position. In this case, the period required for the displacement is 3 sec, which is included in the waiting period in which the progress of the game is waited for when the additional state ends. Then, as described above, during the waiting period, various effects corresponding to the end of the addition state are executed. As a result, it is possible to arrange the stop order notification device 71 from the notification time position to the initial position by using the game waiting period for making the player clearly recognize that the addition state has ended.

Returning to the description of the addition state process (FIG. 58 ), if a negative determination is made in step S3005 or if the process of step S3019 is executed, the RT mode transition process is executed (step S3020). In the transition processing of the RT mode, when it is specified that the first RT replay winning is generated based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86. When it is specified that the second RT replay prize has been generated, the mode is shifted to the second RT mode, and when it is specified that the first falling replay prize has been generated based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, it is switched to the normal mode. If it is specified that the second falling replay prize has occurred based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, the first RT mode is entered.

<Processing contents regarding ART end branch state>
Next, the ART end branch state will be described. The ART end branch state is a game state in which the player stays when one execution of the ART state is completed. In the ART end branch state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the winning of the bell prize is notified when the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV=1 to 6. Further, in the ART end branch state, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more, the state is finally returned to the ART state, and even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the ART state is set. Can return to. Here, since the transition to the ART end branch state is made when one execution of the ART state is completed, there is a high possibility that the lottery mode is the second RT mode at the timing of transition to the ART end branch state. In this case, even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, a transition from the second RT mode to the first RT mode is generated once, and then the second RT mode is transitioned again, so that the ART state is changed. A new run is started.

Even in the ART end branch state, when the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=1 to 6 as described above, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is notified. Therefore, the player is in an advantageous state. In this case, even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, at least until the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, the vehicle stays in the ART end branch state. On the other hand, in the second RT mode in the ART end branch state, the reels 32L, 32M for avoiding the occurrence of the second fall replay prize even if the winning combination that enables the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is won. The stop order of 32R is not notified. As a result, if the player's prediction hits in the ART end branch state and the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is avoided, the ART end branch state can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to continue the ART end branch state that is advantageous to the player by the player's own prediction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the ART end branch process executed in step S1309 in the game end process (FIG. 29). Since the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game, the ART end branch process is also executed at the end of the game, that is, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. ..

In the ART end branch processing, when it is specified that the second RT replay winning is generated based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86 (step S3301: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If there is (step S3302: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter is decremented by 1 (step S3303), and then the AT status counter of the main RAM 84 is set to "2" (step S3304). Further, in order to set the lottery mode to the second RT mode, the data of the main side RAM 84 is set (step S3305). As a result, the main MPU 82 will execute the ART state process (step S1307) in the next processing time in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29), and the game state will shift from the ART end branch state to the ART state. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the data of the main RAM 84 is set so that the lottery mode becomes the second RT mode without executing the processes of steps S3303 and S3304. (Step S3305).

Here, in the ART end branch state, when the winning combination that allows the generation of the second RT replay prize is won in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the reel 32L that enables the generation of the second RT replay prize. , 32M, 32R stop order is notified. As a result, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the player wins the second RT replay prize in the first RT mode, and thus the player can newly execute the ART state. Can be started easily. On the other hand, in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0", the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can generate the second RT replay winning are won even if the winning combination that enables the second RT replay winning is won. The stop order is not notified. Further, even if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the stop order that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning, the ART end branch state is only continued and the transition to the ART state does not occur.

In the ART end branch processing, when it is specified that the first falling replay prize has occurred based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86 (step S3306: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 84 is “0”. "(Step S3307: YES), the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3308). As a result, the AT state ends. Further, similar to step S2813 and step S2814 in the ART state process (FIG. 54), the AT end command is set as a transmission target to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S3309), and the advance waiting counter 84a of the main side RAM 84 is set to the third. A value corresponding to the standby value is set (step S3310). These processing contents are the same as those in steps S2813 and S2814 in the ART state processing (FIG. 54). If a negative determination is made in step S3307, or if the process of step S3310 is executed, data setting in the main RAM 84 is performed so that the lottery mode becomes the normal mode (step S3311).

Here, when the winning end replay prize is won in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more in the ART end branch state, the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is avoided. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be played is notified. As a result, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the player wins the first falling replay prize even if he/she wins the part that enables the generation of the first falling replay prize in the first RT mode. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence. Further, even if the first falling replay prize is generated in the situation, the ART end branch state is continued. As a result, in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, even if the first falling replay prize is generated due to an operation error of the player, the ART end branch state can be continued. ..

On the other hand, in the situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0", even if the winning combination that enables the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is won, the reels 32L, 32M for avoiding the occurrence of the first falling replay prize, 32R stop order is not notified. In this case, the player predicts the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that avoids the occurrence of the first falling replay prize, and performs the stop operation, and the predicted stop order causes the occurrence of the first falling replay prize. If the stop order can be avoided, the first falling replay prize does not occur. As a result, if the player's prediction hits in the ART end branch state and the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is avoided, the ART end branch state can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to continue the ART end branch state that is advantageous to the player by the player's own prediction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the ART end branch processing, other RT mode transition processing is executed (step S3312). In the other RT mode transition processing, when it is determined that the first RT replay prize has been generated based on the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode and the rotation end command received from the payout side MPU 86. When it is specified that the second falling replay prize has occurred based on the above, the first RT mode is entered.

<Notification control process>
Next, the notification control process executed in step S813 in the lottery process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 82 will be described. In the notification control process, the control for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed, and the winning combination or the second RT replay winning is possible in the first RT mode. The control for notifying that the winning combination has been won is executed. In this case, in the notification control process, a command setting process for causing various notifications to be performed on the image display device 67 is executed, and when the command setting process is executed, the notification content specified by the command is handled. A setting process for causing the special display section 63 to perform the display is executed. Prior to the description of the specific processing contents of the notification control processing, the special display section 63 will be described in detail.

FIG. 66A is a front view of the special display portion 63. The special display portion 63 is provided with seven display segments 131 to 137. Each of the display segments 131 to 137 has an individual light source including an LED, and by controlling the individual light sources to be turned on and off, only one arbitrary display segment 131 to 137 can be turned on. In addition to that, the display segments 131 to 137 in any combination can be turned on. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 131 to 137, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display segments 131 to 137 may be displayed in different colors, or the display segments 131 to 137 may be configured to display a plurality of colors. All of the first to seventh display segments 131 to 137 are linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 131 to 137 are arranged so as to form a so-called 7-segment display. Thereby, it is possible to display a plurality of types of characters such as numbers “1” to “9” and alphabet “H” on the special display unit 63. The special display unit 63 is not limited to the above-described segment display, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display as long as it can display a plurality of types of symbols, numbers, or characters. Other types of display devices such as devices, CRTs, dot matrices, etc. may be used.

In the slot machine 10, as described above, when the winning is achieved by any one of the index values IV=1 to 6, and when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the predetermined stop order, the bell prize is won. appear. Further, when the lottery process (FIG. 18) is executed using the normal mode lottery table (FIGS. 19 and 20), and when the winning is achieved by any one of the index values IV=12 to 15, the reel 32L. , 32M, 32R become a predetermined stop order, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery process (FIG. 18) is executed by using the first RT mode lottery table (FIGS. 21 and 22). In the case of winning in any of the index values IV=12 to 15, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop order, so that the second RT replay prize is established. Further, when the lottery process (FIG. 18) is executed by using the first RT mode lottery table (FIGS. 21 and 22), when the reel is won in any of the index values IV=16 to 21, the reel When the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the predetermined stop order, the normal replay prize is established, and in other cases, the first falling replay prize is established. In addition, when the lottery process (FIG. 18) is executed using the second RT mode lottery table (FIGS. 23 and 24 ), the reel is reeled if any of the index values IV=12 to 17 is won. When the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the predetermined stop order, the normal replay prize is established, and in other cases, the second falling replay prize is established.

In this way, in the configuration in which the winning mode is different corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be notified on the image display device 67 is the first stop. A stop order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R of the second stop and the third stop, which are the middle reel 32M, are arbitrary, and reels 32L and 32M of the second stop and the third stop, which are the right reel 32R and the first stop, respectively. , 32R are optional, a first stop is the left reel 32L, a second stop is the middle reel 32M, and a third stop is the right reel 32R, and a first stop is the left reel 32L. And the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. A certain stop order, a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the left. There is a stop order in which the reel 32L is the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. ing. There are eight stop orders in total.

Further, in the ART end branch state, if the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=12 to 17 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIGS. 23 and 24), it indicates that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Although the notification is executed by the image display device 67, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the occurrence of the second falling replay prize is not notified. Further, in the ART end branch state, when the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=12 to 15 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIGS. 21 and 22), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84. Is "0", the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is executed by the image display device 67, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for generating the second RT replay prize is notified. Not done. Further, in the ART end branch state, when the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV=16 to 21 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIGS. 21 and 22), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84. Is "0", the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is executed by the image display device 67, but the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped to avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay prize. The order is not announced.

In the above-described configuration, the special display section 63 displays a display corresponding to the content notified by the image display device 67 in relation to the winning combination. The display contents of the special display portion 63 will be described with reference to FIG. 66(b).

The display content of the special display section 63 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification content of the above eight kinds of stop orders in the image display device 67, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified. It is set in correspondence with the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Specifically, the number "1" is set as the display content in response to the notification that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is optional on the image display device 67. , The number "2" is set as the display content in response to the notification that the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is optional on the image display device 67, and the first stop Is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In response to the notification on the image display device 67, the number "3" is displayed. The image display device 67 is informed that the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. And the number "4" is set as the display content, and the image display device notifies that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The number "5" is set as the display content corresponding to what is done at 67, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The number "6" is set as the display content in response to the notification indicating that there is the image display device 67. The first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the left reel 32L. Yes The number "7" is set as the display content in response to the notification indicating that the third stop is the middle reel 32M on the image display device 67, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. Yes The number "8" is set as the display content in response to the notification indicating that the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L on the image display device 67. , The reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not notified of the stop order, but the character "H" is set as the display content in response to the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode performed on the image display device 67. ing.

By setting the display content of the special display section 63 as described above, the display content of the special display section 63 does not overlap between the different types of notification content in the image display device 67. Accordingly, the display content of the special display section 63 can be associated with the notification content of the image display device 67.

It should be noted that the display contents of the special display section 63 are not limited to a configuration in which the display contents of the special display section 63 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the image display device 67, and a part of the notification contents or A plurality of types of display contents of the special display section 63 may be set corresponding to all of them. Even in this case, the display contents of the special display part 63 can be associated with the notification contents in the image display device 67 by preventing the display contents of the special display part 63 from overlapping between different types of notification contents. Becomes

67(a) and 67(b) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the notification content on the image display device 67 and the display content on the special display section 63.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 67, as shown in FIG. 67(a1), the image display device 67 has the same number of stop operations as necessary to end the game. Unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 67(a1), the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. An image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image G1, and an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G2. In the right unit display image G3, the image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed.

While the image display device 67 displays an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, the special display portion 63 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 67(a2). "5" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R. That is, in the image display device 67, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are stopped in the stop order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the special display portion 63 performs display regardless of the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Accordingly, even if the display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed on the special display portion 63, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display content on the image display device 67.

When the image display device 67 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the branch timing of the lottery mode is notified, as shown in FIG. 67(b1), the image display device 67 is loaded with the game. Although the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stop operations required to complete the display are displayed, image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Absent. Specifically, the image of "?" is displayed as the same image in each of the left unit display image G1, the middle unit display image G2, and the right unit display image G3. In addition to each of the unit display images G1 to G3, a character image G11 “Aim!” is displayed as an image indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode.

On the image display device 67, an image indicating the branch timing in the lottery mode is displayed as described above, whereas in the special display section 63, the branch timing in the lottery mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 67(b2). “H” is displayed corresponding to The display of "H" does not correspond to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this way, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified on the image display device 67, the special display section 63 also displays that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be specified. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game content of causing the player to predict the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from being erased by the display content of the special display portion 63.

Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the display range of the special display section 63 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 67. As a result, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the special display section 63 as compared with the image display device 67. Further, the special display portion 63 is present on the opposite side of the image display device 67 side with the display window portions 21L, 21M and 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be visually recognized. As a result, the special display section 63 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 67, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display section 63.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the notification control process.

In the notification control process, if the index value IV=1 to 6 is won (step S3401: YES), the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S3402: YES), the setting process of the first display data is executed (step S3403). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table provided in the main ROM 83, the display contents corresponding to the stop order that enables the occurrence of the bell prize at the index value IV that has been won this time is displayed. Understand the type of data. Then, the display content data of the grasped type is read from the display data storage area provided in the main ROM 83, and the display control of the special display section 63 is executed according to the read display content data. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the occurrence of the bell prize is started on the special display portion 63.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 92 (step S3404). The notification execution command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the notification related to the winning combination should be executed in the current game, and the stop order command is the reels 32L, 32M, to be notified in the current game. It is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize the stop order of 32R. Only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set as the transmission target regardless of the content of notification in the image display device 67. The stop order command is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the kind of stop order to be notified by the image display device 67, and in step S3404, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the occurrence of a bell prize. The stop order command corresponding to is read from the main ROM 83 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S3404 are transmitted to the production-side MPU 92 in command output processing (step S309) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13).

In the notification control process, when the winning combination that allows the generation of the first RT replay winning or the winning combination that allows the generation of the second RT replay winning is won (step S3405: YES), the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is displayed. If the value is any of 1 to 3 (step S3406: YES), the setting process of the first display data is executed (step S3407). In the setting processing of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 83, it is possible to generate the first RT replay prize if the winning combination that enables the generation of the first RT replay prize is won. The type of data of the display content corresponding to the stop order is grasped, and if the winning combination that enables the second RT replay prize is won, it corresponds to the stop order that enables the second RT replay prize. Understand the type of data displayed. Then, the data of the grasped type of display contents is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 83, and the display control of the special display section 63 is executed according to the read data of the display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the occurrence of the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize is started on the special display portion 63.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 92 (step S3408). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification in the image display device 67. Regarding the stop order command, the main order is the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the winning of the winning side of the winning combination of the first RT replay prize and the second RT replay prize. It is read from the ROM 83 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S3408 are transmitted to the production-side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

In the notification control process, when the winning combination that allows the generation of the first falling replay prize or the winning combination that allows the generation of the second falling replay winning is won (step S3409: YES), the AT state of the main RAM 84 When the value of the counter is “2” or “3”, or when the value of the AT state counter is “1” and the second RT mode is not set (step S3410: YES, step S3411: NO), the first display data The setting process of is executed (step S3412). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 83, if the winning combination that enables the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is won, the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is generated. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the second falling replay prize if the role that enables the occurrence of the second falling replay prize is won by grasping the data type of the display content corresponding to the avoidable stop order. Understand the type of display content data that corresponds to the stop order. Then, the data of the grasped type of display contents is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 83, and the display control of the special display section 63 is executed according to the read data of the display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay prize or the second falling replay prize is started on the special display portion 63.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as the transmission targets to the effect MPU 92 (step S3413). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification in the image display device 67. Regarding the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the winning on the side corresponding to the winning combination of the first falling replay prize and the second falling replay prize Is read from the main ROM 83 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S3413 are transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). By the way, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, information on the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display section 63 selected in step S3412 is set.

It should be noted that the case where the value of the AT state counter is "1" is the ART preparation state, and in the ART preparation state is the second RT mode, the second fall replay winning combination is possible. Even if it is done, by making the configuration in which the stop order that makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is avoided, there is an opportunity to shift to the first RT mode when the ART preparation state is started in the second RT mode. It becomes possible. Since the transition from the ART ready state to the ART state occurs when the first RT mode is switched to the second RT mode, when the ART ready state is started in the second RT mode, the transition to the first RT mode is performed once. It is possible to secure an opportunity to generate a trigger for shifting from the ART preparation state to the ART state.

In the notification control process, when the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 84 is "4", that is, when the ART end branch state is set (step S3414: YES), the branch-based notification control process is executed (step S3415). .. The notification control process corresponding to the branch will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the winning combination that allows the occurrence of the second falling replay prize is won (step S3501: YES), the setting process of the second display data is executed (step S3502). In the ART end branch state, even if the winning combination that allows the second falling replay prize to be generated is won, the stop order in which the second falling replay winning can be avoided is not notified. Therefore, in the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main side ROM 83, the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified is dealt with. Understand the type of display content data. Then, the data of the grasped type of display contents is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 83, and the display control of the special display section 63 is executed according to the read data of the display contents. As a result, a display corresponding to the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is started on the special display section 63, although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

After that, the notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S3503). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification in the image display device 67. The set notification execution command is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). In this case, in the case of the ART end branch state as described above, the stop order in which the occurrence of the second falling replay prize can be avoided even if the winning combination of the second falling replay prize is won as described above. Is not reported. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

In the notification control process corresponding to the branch, when the winning combination that allows the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is won (step S3504: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S3505). : YES), the first display data setting process is executed (step S3506). If it is in the ART end branch state, and if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, as described above, if the winning combination of the first falling replay prize is won, the first falling replay prize is generated. The stop order that can be avoided is notified. Therefore, in the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main side ROM 83, the type of the data of the display contents corresponding to the stop order that makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is grasped. .. Then, the data of the grasped type of display contents is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 83, and the display control of the special display section 63 is executed according to the read data of the display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is started on the special display portion 63.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as the transmission targets to the effect MPU 92 (step S3507). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification in the image display device 67. Regarding the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is read from the main ROM 83 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S3507 are transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). By the way, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, information on the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display section 63 selected in step S3506 is set.

On the other hand, when the winning combination that allows the generation of the first falling replay prize is won and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0” (step S3504: YES, step S3505: NO), the second display data The setting process is executed (step S3508). In the case of the ART end branch state, as described above, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the first falling replay prize is generated even if the winning combination that enables the first falling replay prize is generated. The stop order that can be avoided is not notified. Therefore, in the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main side ROM 83, the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified is dealt with. Understand the type of display content data. Then, the data of the grasped type of display contents is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 83, and the display control of the special display section 63 is executed according to the read data of the display contents. As a result, a display corresponding to the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is started on the special display section 63, although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

After that, the notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S3509). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification in the image display device 67. The set notification execution command is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). In this case, as described above, in the case of the ART end branch state and when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, as described above, the winning role of the first falling replay prize is won. However, the stop order that can avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

In the notification control process corresponding to the branch, when the winning combination that enables the generation of the second RT replay prize is won (step S3510: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S3511: (YES), the first display data setting process is executed (step S3512). In the case of the ART end branch state, as described above, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the second RT replay prize can be generated when the winning combination of the second RT replay prize is won. The stop order to be performed is notified. Therefore, in the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 83, the data type of the display content corresponding to the stop order that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay prize is grasped. Then, the data of the grasped type of display contents is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 83, and the display control of the special display section 63 is executed according to the read data of the display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is started on the special display portion 63.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as the transmission targets to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3513). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification in the image display device 67. Regarding the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the generation of the second RT replay winning is read from the main ROM 83 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S3513 are transmitted to the performance side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

On the other hand, when the winning combination that allows the generation of the second RT replay prize is won and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0” (step S3510: YES, step S3511: NO), the second display data A setting process is executed (step S3514). In the case of the ART end branch state, as described above, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the second RT replay prize can be generated even if the winning combination of the second RT replay prize is generated. The stopping order to be performed is not notified. Therefore, in the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main side ROM 83, the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified is dealt with. Understand the type of display content data. Then, the data of the grasped type of display contents is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 83, and the display control of the special display section 63 is executed according to the read data of the display contents. As a result, a display corresponding to the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is started on the special display section 63, although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

After that, the notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 92 (step S3515). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification in the image display device 67. The set notification execution command is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S309) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). In this case, as described above, in the case of the ART end branch state and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, as described above, it is assumed that the winning combination of the second RT replay is won. Also, the stop order that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay prize is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

Next, the notification processing executed in the other processing (step S1629) of the command corresponding processing (FIG. 37) in the effect MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 70. The notification process is executed, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec.

When both the notification execution command and the stop order command are received from the main MPU 82 (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether or not the current game state is the addition state (step S3602). If it is not in the add-on state (step S3602: NO), the first stop for setting the data necessary to display the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop order command on the image display device 67. A process for setting forward notification data is executed (step S3603). However, at this timing, the images in the stop order are not displayed on the image display device 67. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3604). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating and reach constant speed rotation, and is set to, for example, 0.5 msec. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started.

On the other hand, when both the notification execution command and the stop order command are received from the main MPU 82 (step S3601: YES), if the current game state is the addition state (step S3602: YES), stop first. The first stop order notification data setting process is executed to set the data necessary to display the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the forward command on the image display device 67 (step). S3605). The data necessary to display the images in the stop order set in this case are the data used also in step S3603. The necessary data includes image data such as JPEG data and MPEG data set in the frame buffer to determine the content of the image, and parameter information applied when setting the image data in the frame buffer. .. In addition, the second stop order notification data setting process is performed to set the data necessary for displaying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop order command on the stop order notification device 71. (Step S3606). The stop order set in this case is the same as the stop order set in step S3605. This makes it possible to notify the same stop order in both the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71. However, the notification of the stop order is not executed by the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 at the timing when these steps S3605 and S3606 are executed. Then, similarly to step S3604, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3607).

In the notification process, when only the notification execution command is received from the main MPU 82 among the notification execution command and the stop order command, and the stop order command is not received in the monitoring period before and after the timing of receiving the notification execution command ( Step S3608: YES), the data necessary for displaying an image on the image display device 67, which indicates that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have not been notified of the stop order, but is the branch timing of the lottery mode, is set (step S3608: YES). S3609). However, at this timing, the image indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is not displayed on the image display device 67. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3610). The value corresponding to this notification delay period is the same as that in step S3604.

In the notification process, if the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the effect RAM 94 has elapsed (step S3611: YES), the notification start process is executed (step S3612). In the notification start process, if the current time is the timing when the notification delay period set in step S3604 has elapsed, the image display device 67 displays images in the stop order based on the data set in step S3603. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a1), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 67. If this time is the timing when the notification delay period set in step S3607 has elapsed, the image display device 67 displays images in the stop order based on the data set in step S3605, and step S3606. The stop order informing device 71 notifies the stop order based on the data set in. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the stop order notification device 71 displays the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is also displayed on the image display device 67. On the other hand, in the notification start process, if the current time is the timing when the notification delay period set in step S3610 has elapsed, the image display device 67 displays an image based on the data set in step S3609. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b1), the image indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed on the image display device 67 although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

In the notification process, other processes are executed (step S3613). In other processing, for example, when a game end command is received from the main MPU 82, the image that is finally displayed on the image display device 67 in the game is ended, and the image waiting for the start of the next game is displayed. Start to display. In this case, when the game end command is received in a state where the image informing the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed, the display of the image informing the stop order is ended. Further, when the game end command is received in the state where the image showing the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed, the display of the image is ended.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 71, how the special display section 63 and the image display device 67 notify each other of the winning combination will be described. 71(a) shows the rotation period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, FIG. 71(b) shows the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and FIG. 71(c) relates to the winning combination in the special display section 63. 71D shows the execution period of the notification, and FIG. 71D shows the execution period of the notification regarding the winning combination in the image display device 67.

At timing t1, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating as shown in FIG. 71(a), and the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R starts as shown in FIG. 71(b). Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 71(c), notification of the relationship with the winning combination is started on the special display section 63 based on the direct display control by the main MPU 82.

After that, at a timing t2 which is an intermediate timing in the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, as shown in FIG. Notification of the relationship is started. That is, in the configuration in which the notification about the winning combination is performed not only in the image display device 67 but also in the special display unit 63, the notification about the winning combination is started on the special display unit 63 directly controlled by the main MPU 82. After that, the notification regarding the winning combination is started on the image display device 67 whose display is directly controlled by the production side MPU 92.

After that, at the timing of t3, the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends as shown in FIG. 71(b), and the constant speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R starts. Thereafter, at timing t4, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 71(a). In this case, the notification regarding the winning combination in the image display device 67 is ended at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 71(d). Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 71(c), the notification regarding the winning combination in the special display portion 63 is ended. Then, at the subsequent timing of t6, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are newly started to rotate as shown in FIG. However, the notification regarding the winning combination is not executed in the game.

In the case of the above configuration, after the timing when the notification regarding the winning combination is started on the special display section 63 that is directly display-controlled by the main MPU 82, the image display device 67 that is directly display-controlled by the production MPU 92 is displayed. After the timing when the notification regarding the winning combination is started and the notification regarding the winning combination in the image display device 67 that is directly controlled by the production side MPU 92 ends, the special display portion 63 that is directly display-controlled by the main MPU 82. The notification about the winning combination in is ended. That is, the entire period during which the notification regarding the winning combination is executed on the image display device 67 is included in the entire period during which the notification regarding the winning combination is executed on the special display unit 63. As a result, when the notification about the winning combination is executed on the image display device 67, the notification about the winning combination is surely executed on the special display section 63, and the winning executed on the image display device 67 is executed. In the case of confirming whether or not the notification regarding the winning combination is due to an illegal act by using the display content of the special display portion 63, the confirmation can be performed at an arbitrary timing.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When 100 games are exhausted in the acquisition challenge state ST1, the first transition challenge state ST2 is generated, and in the first transition challenge state ST2, the number of lottery group information generated in the acquisition challenge state ST1 is equal to the AT transition lottery process. Is executed. Then, the game state shifts to the AT state ST5 based on the fact that the AT has been won in the AT shift lottery process. As a result, in the acquisition challenge state ST1, a game is played while expecting that lottery group information is acquired, and in the first transition challenge state ST2, while expecting to be an AT win in the AT transition lottery process. A game will be played. Therefore, in the acquisition challenge state ST1 and the first transition challenge state ST2, the player's attention is different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the uniformization of the game.

Further, since 100 games are exhausted in the acquisition challenge state ST1 to transition to the first transition challenge state ST2, the timing of transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 becomes clear, and understanding of the game content Can be facilitated.

In addition, in the first transition challenge state ST2, if the lottery result of the AT transition lottery process does not result in AT winning, the acquisition challenge state ST1 occurs again. As a result, in the first transition challenge state ST2, if the lottery result of the AT transition lottery process does not result in AT winning, the acquisition challenge state ST1 is repeated, and it is possible to facilitate understanding of the game content.

In the acquisition challenge state ST1, there are a high-probability state in which lottery group information is relatively easy to be acquired and a low-probability state in which lottery group information is relatively hard to be acquired. As a result, since the acquisition probability of the lottery group information changes in the acquisition challenge state ST1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the acquisition challenge state ST1.

In the first transition challenge state ST2, when the lottery result of the AT transition lottery process does not result in AT winning and the acquisition challenge state ST1 newly occurs, the probability of obtaining lottery group information is high. As a result, even if the acquisition challenge state ST1 newly occurs without the AT winning, it is possible to continue the motivation to continue the game.

Further, when the acquisition challenge state ST1 is newly generated, the high-probability state in which the lottery group information acquisition probability is high is maintained over at least the specific number of games, and thus the lottery group is at least until the specific number of games is exhausted. It becomes possible to play a game while expecting to acquire information. Further, when the number of specific games has been exhausted, the number of games required until the acquisition challenge state ST1 ends and the state moves to the first transition challenge state ST2 is less than 100 games, so the game continues. It is possible to continue the motivation of.

In the first transition challenge state ST2, the AT transition lottery process is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination. As a result, in the first transition challenge state ST2, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the lottery result of the AT transition lottery process but also to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination.

In the first transition challenge state ST2, since the AT transition lottery process corresponding to one lottery group information is executed for one game, it is possible to clarify the situation in which one AT transition lottery process is executed. It becomes possible to make the player pay attention to each execution time of the AT transfer lottery process.

Even in the situation in which it is determined that the number of laps in the acquisition challenge state ST1 becomes the ceiling-corresponding value, it is determined that the AT state ST5 is entered, and the lottery group information is consumed when the first transition challenge state ST2 is started. As a result, a transition to the AT state ST5 occurs. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the transition to the AT state ST5 may occur due to the lottery group information being digested in the first transition challenge state ST2. In addition, when the first transition challenge state ST2 is started in a situation in which the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed, the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs when the first lottery group information is exhausted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first transition challenge state ST2 from continuing for a long time despite the situation in which the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed.

When the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs with the lottery group information remaining, the first transition challenge state ST2 occurs because the AT transition lottery processing is executed for the remaining lottery group information after the AT state ST5 ends. In this case, it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the AT state ST5 with the lottery group information left. As a result, since the player expects that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur early in the first transition challenge state ST2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first transition challenge state ST2. Becomes

When the number of laps in the acquisition challenge state ST1 becomes the ceiling-corresponding value, it is determined that the AT state ST5 is entered. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a rescue when the execution of the acquisition challenge state ST1 is repeated without the transition to the AT state ST5.

In the acquisition challenge state ST1, a lottery process of trigger points for determining whether or not the lottery group information is acquired in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the lottery group information is acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1, but also to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination.

Plural types of lottery group information are set so that the probability of AT winning in the AT transition lottery process triggered by execution is different. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting that the lottery group information that will increase the probability of winning the AT will be stored, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

When the promotion challenge state ST3 occurs, the type of lottery group information can be promoted to a type that is advantageous to the player. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting to enter the promotion challenge state ST3, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the promotion challenge state ST3, the promotion lottery process for determining whether or not to promote the type of lottery group information is performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination. As a result, in the promotion challenge state ST3, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the type of lottery group information is promoted, but also to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination.

In the promotion challenge state ST3, since the promotion lottery process is executed for one lottery group information for one game, it is possible to clarify the situation where the promotion of the lottery group information occurs, and the promotion lottery process is performed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to each execution time of.

When the lottery group information is acquired, the lottery group information of the type having the lowest probability of winning the AT is stored. This makes it possible to increase the degree of advantage when the type of lottery group information is promoted.

When the lottery group information is not acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1, it does not move to the first transition challenge state ST2 but moves to the second transition challenge state ST4. Even if the lottery group information is not acquired, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation. Further, since the second transition challenge state ST4 has a different degree of expectation that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur from the first transition challenge state ST2, the significance of acquiring lottery group information in the acquisition challenge state ST1 is significant. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

The second transition challenge state ST4 has a higher degree of expectation of transition to the AT state ST5 than the first transition challenge state ST2 when the number of lottery group information is one, and the number of lottery group information is two or more. In this case, the degree of expectation of transition to the AT state ST5 is lower than that of the first transition challenge state ST2. In this case, the player expects that the lottery group information will not be acquired rather than the number of pieces of lottery group information acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1, and the lottery group information will be acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1. When acquired, the player expects that the lottery group information will further increase. As a result, the player's expectation that the lottery group information will be acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1 will vary depending on the number of pieces of the lottery group information acquired. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the uniformization of the game and improve the interest of the game.

The number of executions of the lottery process for determining whether to shift to the AT state ST5 and the probability of being AT-winned in the lottery process are different between the first transition challenge state ST2 and the second transition challenge state ST4. There is. This makes it possible to clarify the difference between the first transition challenge state ST2 and the second transition challenge state ST4.

In the second transition challenge state ST4, the number of times of the lottery process for determining whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 is larger than that in the first transition challenge state ST2, while in the one lottery process, the AT is won. The probability is higher in the first transition challenge state ST2 than in the second transition challenge state ST4. This makes it possible to generate many situations in which attention is paid to whether or not the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs in the second transition challenge state ST4, while once in the first transition challenge state ST2. It is possible to increase the expectation of the lottery process. Therefore, the difference between the first transition challenge state ST2 and the second transition challenge state ST4 can be made clear.

In the second transition challenge state ST4, when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) for the winning combination is the specific result, the lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 is executed a plurality of times. As a result, in the second transition challenge state ST4, the probability of the transition to the AT state ST5 occurring according to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination (FIG. 18) increases, so in the second transition challenge state ST4, the AT transition lottery It is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the result of the lottery process but also to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the combination. Further, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 18) is a specific result, a lottery process different from the AT transition lottery process is additionally executed with respect to whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects without complicating the processing configuration of the AT transfer lottery processing.

In the acquisition challenge state ST1, when the maximum lottery group information of five pieces is acquired, a profit different from the profit that the AT transfer lottery process is executed five times is given. This makes it possible to dramatically increase the advantage of acquiring the lottery group information for the maximum value in the acquisition challenge state ST1. Therefore, the player's attention to the acquisition of the lottery group information in the acquisition challenge state ST1 is increased, and the interest of the game in the acquisition challenge state ST1 can be improved.

In the acquisition challenge state ST1, when the lottery group information, which is the maximum value, is acquired, the first transition challenge state ST2 occurs even if 100 games have not been exhausted, and thus the first transition challenge state ST2 is entered. It is possible to reduce the number of games required for playing. As a result, not only the benefit that the number of executions of the AT transition lottery process increases when the maximum lottery group information is acquired, but also the advantage that the first transition challenge state ST2 is started early is given. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to acquiring the lottery group information in the acquisition challenge state ST1.

In the acquisition challenge state ST1, when the maximum lottery group information of 5 pieces is acquired, the promotion challenge state ST3 in which the type of the lottery group information can be promoted to the type advantageous to the player occurs. As a result, not only the benefit that the number of times the AT transfer lottery process is executed is increased when the maximum lottery group information is acquired, but also the benefit that the promotion challenge state ST3 is started is given. In the acquisition challenge state ST1, it is possible to increase the player's attention to acquiring the lottery group information.

In the promotion challenge state ST3, when all of the lottery group information is the target of execution of the promotion lottery process, the first transition challenge state ST2 is entered. As a result, the AT transfer lottery process can be executed early on the lottery group information targeted for promotion in the promotion challenge state ST3.

In the promotion challenge state ST3, the promotion lottery process is executed in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination. As a result, in the promotion challenge state ST3, it is possible not only to win the promotion by the promotion lottery process, but also to make the player pay attention to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination.

In the promotion challenge state ST3, since the promotion lottery process is executed for one lottery group information for one game, it is possible to clarify the situation in which the promotion lottery process is executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to each execution time.

In the add-on execution state, each time the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, an addition of the number of continuous games in one execution of the ART state occurs, so that the player expects the add-on execution state to continue for a long time. In this case, the continuation rate promotion state that allows the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process in the addition execution state to be changed from the initial probability occurs before the addition execution state is started. In the case of the continuation rate promotion state, the player expects that the continuation winning probability in the subsequent addition execution state has a higher probability. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the continuous rate promotion state, the continuous winning probability can be higher than before, but not lower than before. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the continuation rate promotion state and increase the player's expectation in the continuation rate promotion state.

In the continuation rate promotion state, the continuation rate promotion lottery processing is executed by winning in any of the index values IV=7 to 11 in the lottery processing (FIG. 18) of the winning combination, and the continuation rate promotion lottery processing continues. The rate of continuous promotion wins increases as a result of rate promotion wins. As a result, the player performs the operation while expecting to win the prize with any of the index values IV=7 to 11, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the continuation rate promotion state is started, a probability lower than the continuation winning probability initially set is notified in the image display device 67, and thereafter, the notification probability is set so that this notification probability approaches the actual continuation winning probability. The display of is updated. As a result, even if the continuous winning probability does not actually increase in the continuation rate promotion state, it is possible to perform an effect as if the continuous winning probability increased in the notification probability. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction in the continuation rate promotion state. Also, since the notification probability is lower than the initial continuous winning probability at the start of the continuation rate promotion state, the continuous winning probability has increased while preventing the notification probability from exceeding the actual continuous winning probability. It is possible to perform such an effect.

When the continuation rate promotion state is started, even if the notification probability does not correspond to the actual continuation winning probability, it will be dealt with until the continuation rate promotion state ends. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the actual continuous winning probability before the addition execution state is started.

The notification probability is updated so as to fill the difference between the notification probability and the actual continuous winning probability over a plurality of games. As a result, it is possible to increase the period in which the notification probability is updated so as to approach the actual continuous winning probability, and it is possible to cause many situations in which the player feels satisfied.

When the actual continuous winning probability increases, the notification probability is updated so as to approach the changed continuous winning probability. This makes it possible to prevent the notification probability from deviating significantly from the actual continuous winning probability.

When the notification probability and the actual continuous winning probability do not match, the notification probability is updated so as to approach the actual continuous winning probability. This allows the notification probability to match the actual continuous winning probability in the continuation rate promotion state.

When the update win is selected in the display update lottery process, the notification probability is updated so as to approach the actual continuous win probability. As a result, it is possible to irregularly generate the update of the notification probability in order to approach the actual continuous winning probability. In addition, the display update lottery processing is executed on condition that the notification probability does not match the actual continuous winning probability, and the update of the notification probability is performed so as to approach the actual continuous winning probability. Even if the update is performed irregularly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the notification probability eventually does not match the actual continuous winning probability.

When the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is increased by 1% in all the remaining games in the continuous rate promotion state, the maximum value of the continuous winning probability is finally 99%. In each of the above situations, the value is displayed on the image display device 67 regardless of the result of the continuation rate promotion lottery process, provided that the value of the actual continuation rate counter 94a is larger than the value of the display continuation rate counter 94b. The value of the continuous winning probability is increased by 1%. As a result, in the configuration in which the display of the continuous winning probability is updated only by 1% in one game to increase the frequency of update, the continuous winning probability is the maximum value 99. Even in the situation where the percentage is %, it is possible to set the value of the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 as the value of the actual continuous rate counter 94a within the range of the continuous rate promotion state.

When the start lever 41 is operated in the add-on execution state, the add-on execution state is ended midway. As a result, it becomes possible to meet the demand of the player who wants to end the additional execution state early. In addition, when the addition execution state is ended midway, the compensation game number is added in addition to the addition game number that is the object to be added by the time the cancel operation is performed by operating the start lever 41. It is possible to give a relief measure to the player who has performed the cancel operation regarding the addition of the number of additional games. In particular, not only the number of compensation games is given, but also the number of additional games that have been targeted before the cancel operation is performed, so that the number of additional games generated before the cancel operation is performed is not wasted. It becomes possible to do.

The number of compensation games given when the cancel operation is performed varies depending on the continuous winning probability at that time. Specifically, the number of compensation games increases as the continuous winning probability increases. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner of giving the number of compensation games, and it is also advantageous to give the number of compensation games to a cancel operation that occurs in a situation where the winning probability is advantageous. It becomes possible.

The number of compensation games is set to a number smaller than the expected number of games to be added, which is derived from the relationship between the number of additional games to be given for one operation of the first credit insertion button 47 and the continuous winning probability. Has been done. As a result, it is advantageous for the player not to perform the cancel operation, so that it is possible to reduce the frequency of performing the cancel operation in the addition execution state.

In a situation where the displaceable stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position, the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, the difference between the situation in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the situation in which the stop order is not notified can be caused by a physical movement such as a change in the position of the stop order notification device 71. It is possible to give unexpectedness to. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the stop order notification device 71 is displaced and is arranged at the notification time position, the stop order notification device 71 is noticed by notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. , 32M, 32R, the attention to the notification of the stop order can be increased.

In the stop order notification device 71, the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged at the notification time position, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is arranged in the condition where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged at the initial position. Notification is not executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the situation in which the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the situation in which the notification is not executed, at the position of the stop order notification device 71. Becomes

The notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed by the image display device 67 and also by the stop order notification device 71. This makes it possible to diversify the locations where the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed, and prevent the situation where the notification is executed from becoming uniform. ..

In both the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71, a situation in which the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed only by the image display device 67 of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71. There are situations and situations in which they occur. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the notification in a manner suitable for each situation.

In the configuration in which the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 are provided as the display means for performing the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop order notification device 71 is displaceably provided. On the other hand, the image display device 67 is provided so as not to be displaced. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a clear difference in the presence or absence of physical movement between the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71.

The stop order notification device 71 performs notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a state of being opposed to the display area of the image display device 67. As a result, in a situation in which the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the player can be made to pay attention to the stop order notification device 71 rather than the image display device 67. Further, in a configuration in which the image display device 67 is fixedly arranged at a position easily visible to the player, the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at a position easily visible to the player, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Can be notified. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, when the player confirms the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 confirms the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Since it is not necessary to shift, the visibility can be improved.

Even when the stop order notification device 71 arranged at the notification time position notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the image display device 67 displays the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Notification is executed. As a result, a failure occurs in the stop order notification device 71 itself or the configuration for displacing the stop order notification device 71, and the stop order notification device 71 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Alternatively, even if the stop order notification device 71 is not placed at the notification time position, the image display device 67 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, even in the situation where the above failure occurs, it is possible to inform the player of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

When the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in the image display device 67, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged in a region facing the stop order notification device 71 from behind. The notification of the stop order is executed. Accordingly, when the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the visibility of the stop order notification of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 67 is reduced. Is possible. Therefore, even when the stop order notification device 71 arranged at the notification time position notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the image display device 67 stops the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In the configuration in which the order notification is executed, the player's attention to the stop order notification device 71 can be increased.

By the configuration in which the notification of the stop order is executed by the image display device 67 based on the control of the production side MPU 92 when the predetermined corresponding winning combination in which the predetermined winning occurs when the predetermined stop order is achieved, Even if the processing load for executing the notification on the image display device 67 is increased in order to increase the attention of the player to the image display device 67, the influence can be prevented from affecting the main MPU 82. Becomes However, in the configuration in which the image display device 67 notifies the stop order based on the control of the production-side MPU 92, the communication path between the main-side MPU 82 and the production-side MPU 92 and the production-side MPU 92 are tampered with. As a result, it is conceivable that the image display device 67 may illegally inform the stop order while trying to illegally gain a profit. In this case, it is assumed that it becomes difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to understand that the illegal act is performed due to the notification of the stop order being executed by the image display device 67. .. On the other hand, not only the stop order is notified by the image display device 67 controlled by the production-side MPU 92, but also the stop of the notification target is performed by the special display section 63 directly controlled by the main-side MPU 82. Notification corresponding to the order is given. As a result, by visually confirming whether or not the notification corresponding to the stop order of the notification target is also executed on the special display section 63 when the notification of the stop order is executed on the image display device 67, as described above. It is possible to confirm whether or not a wrongdoing is being performed.

When the predetermined corresponding winning combination in which a predetermined winning is generated when the predetermined stop order is reached, the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of the combination is not executed on the special display portion 63. As a result, the role of the special display portion 63 can be made clear.

When the notification of the stop order is executed on the image display device 67, the special display unit 63 executes the notification corresponding to the stop order of the notification target. Accordingly, it is possible to check whether or not the notification of the stop order being executed in the image display device 67 is proper every time when the notification of the stop order is executed.

The notification corresponding to the stop order on the special display section 63 is performed in a manner that the player is less likely to understand the content of the stop order as the notification target than the notification of the stop order on the image display device 67. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the image display device 67 in the configuration in which not only the image display device 67 but also the special display section 63 is provided. Therefore, even if the notification mode on the special display section 63 is simplified, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The display range of the special display section 63 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 67. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the image display device 67 in the configuration in which not only the image display device 67 but also the special display section 63 is provided. Therefore, even if the notification mode on the special display section 63 is simplified, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

In a configuration in which a stop order command that allows the image display device 67 to notify the stop order is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the production side MPU 92, the stop order command includes the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. I can't. As a result, even if the communication route between the main MPU 82 and the production MPU 92 is illegally accessed and the stop order command is illegally acquired, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is grasped from the stop order command. Can be disabled. Therefore, it is possible to substantially invalidate the illegal act by acquiring the stop order command.

The main-side MPU 82 collectively executes the determination of whether or not to execute the notification of the stop order in the image display device 67 and the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display section 63. As a result, even if bidirectional communication is not performed between the main MPU 82 and the production MPU 92, the special display unit 63 corresponds to the stop order when the image display device 67 notifies the stop order. The notification can be executed.

In a configuration in which a plurality of types of stop order notification are set in the image display device 67, the special display section 63 performs the notification in a manner corresponding to the stop order notification type. Accordingly, even if a plurality of types of notification of the stop order are set, the content of the notification of the stop order corresponding to the current game can be grasped by checking the content of the notification on the special display section 63. It becomes possible.

If the image display device 67 does not notify the stop order even if the predetermined corresponding winning combination in which the predetermined winning occurs when the predetermined stop order is reached, the special display section 63 displays the stop order. The corresponding notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stop order from being executed on the special display section 63 in a situation where the notification of the stop order is not preferable to be executed on the image display device 67.

When the image indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed on the image display device 67 although the stop order is not notified, the special display unit 63 does not notify the stop order. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stop order from being executed on the special display section 63 in a situation where the notification of the stop order is not preferable to be executed on the image display device 67. Further, when the image indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed on the image display device 67, the display corresponding to the display content on the image display device 67 is not the notification corresponding to the stop order, but the special display portion 63. It is executed in. As a result, even when the image indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed on the image display device 67, it is displayed on the image display device 67 by checking the special display section 63. It is possible to confirm whether the image is legitimate.

The image display device 67 starts notification of the stop order at a timing after the timing at which the notification corresponding to the stop order starts on the special display unit 63. Thus, by checking the special display portion 63 at the timing when the notification of the stop order is started in the image display device 67, it is possible to confirm whether or not the notification of the stop order is valid. ..

Even if the notification of the stop order in the image display device 67 is started after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display portion 63 is started, the stop in the image display device 67 is performed during the invalid period of the stop operation. Notification of the order is started. This allows the player to recognize the content of the notification of the stop order in the image display device 67 before the stop operation is validated.

After the notification of the stop order on the image display device 67 ends, the notification corresponding to the stop order on the special display unit 63 ends. Accordingly, since the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 63 does not end before the stop order notification in the image display device 67 ends, the stop order notification in the image display device 67 is normal. It is possible to increase the chances of confirming whether or not it is a thing.

In the configuration including the main MPU 82 that executes the lottery process of the winning combination and the payout MPU 86 that executes the control for giving the game medium, the payout MPU 86 has a function of driving and controlling the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 82. On the other hand, the lottery process of the winning combination is executed by the main MPU 82, so that the process of determining the content that influences the result of the game can still be executed by the main MPU 82.

Even if the payout side MPU 86 controls the drive of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by transmitting the lottery result command corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination from the main side MPU 82 to the payout side MPU 86, The drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process.

When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is finished, the payout side MPU 86 sends a rotation end command to the main side MPU 82. As a result, the main MPU 82 can recognize that the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has ended.

When the winning of the winning combination corresponding to the award of the game medium occurs, the rotation end command is transmitted from the payout side MPU 86 when the awarding of the number of gaming media corresponding to the winning combination is completed. This allows the main MPU 82 to execute control for enabling the start of the next game after the addition of the game medium is completed.

When a winning of a winning combination other than the winning combination corresponding to the award of the game medium occurs, a rotation end command is transmitted from the payout MPU 86 with the information corresponding to the winning combination set, and the main MPU 82 receives it. The process corresponding to the rotation end command is executed. As a result, the processing corresponding to the winning of a winning combination other than the winning combination corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed in the main MPU 82, and the processing load of the payout MPU 86 does not become extremely high. It becomes possible to

Every time the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, a stop command command is transmitted from the payout side MPU 86. As a result, even when the payout-side MPU 86 has the function of executing the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the main-side MPU 82 indicates the timing at which the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped. It becomes possible to grasp in. Therefore, it becomes possible for the main MPU 82 to perform control corresponding to the timing at which the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped.

The payout side RAM 88 is provided with a virtual medal counter 88a, and the payout side MPU 86 manages the number of virtual medals. As a result, it is possible to centralize the function of adding the game medium in the payout side MPU 86.

When any of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is operated, a credit insertion command is transmitted from the main MPU 82, and the payout MPU 86 determines the number of virtual medals according to the required insertion amount set in the credit insertion command. Subtract. Then, the payout-side MPU 86 transmits a credit-corresponding command in which information on the number of subtracted virtual medals is set. As a result, it is possible to set the bet amount using the virtual medals managed by the payout MPU 86 while allowing the main side MPU 82 to perform the function of setting the bet number for the game medium.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents of the branching notification control processing executed by the main MPU 82 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the notification control processing for branching according to the present embodiment.

When the winning combination that allows the second falling replay prize to be generated is won (step S3701: YES), the notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the production-side MPU 92 (step S3702). In this case, in the ART end branch state, even if the winning combination that allows the occurrence of the second falling replay prize is won, the stop order that can avoid the occurrence of the second falling replay prize is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the production side MPU 92. As a result, the image display device 67 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but notifies that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Further, this time, the special display section 63 does not perform the notification regarding the winning combination.

In the branching notification control process, when the winning combination that allows the first falling replay prize to be generated is won (step S3703: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S3704). : YES), display data setting processing is executed (step S3705). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is started on the special display portion 63. After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 92 (step S3706). As a result, the image display device 67 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay prize.

On the other hand, in the case where the winning combination that allows the occurrence of the first falling replay prize is won and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0” (step S3703: YES, step S3704: NO), the notification execution command is issued. It is set as a transmission target to the rendering MPU 92 (step S3707). In this case, when the state is the ART end branch state and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the first falling replay prize is won even if the winning combination of the first falling replay prize is possible. The stop order that makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the production side MPU 92. As a result, the image display device 67 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but notifies that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Further, this time, the special display section 63 does not perform the notification regarding the winning combination.

In the notification control process corresponding to the branch, when the winning combination that enables the second RT replay winning is won (step S3708: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S3709: YES), the display data setting process is executed (step S3710). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is started on the special display portion 63. After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as the transmission targets to the effect MPU 92 (step S3711). As a result, the image display device 67 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the second RT replay winning.

On the other hand, when the winning combination that allows the generation of the second RT replay prize is won and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0” (step S3708: YES, step S3709: NO), the notification execution command is rendered. It is set as a transmission target to the side MPU 92 (step S3712). In this case, in the case of the ART end branch state and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the second RT replay prize is generated even if the winning combination that enables the generation of the second RT replay prize is won. The stop order that enables the above is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the production side MPU 92. As a result, the image display device 67 does not notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but notifies that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Further, this time, the special display section 63 does not perform the notification regarding the winning combination.

According to the above configuration, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified even if the image display device 67 notifies that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode, the special display unit 63 performs the notification. Not done. As a result, the notification is executed in the special display section 63 only when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 67, and the role of the special display section 63 is clarified. Is possible.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied to the configurations of the above-described embodiments individually or in combination. Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different configurations may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above-described embodiments are mutually combined. Good.

(1) In the state where the first transition challenge state ST2 is in a state where the execution of the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) of the winning combination is executed is awaited. It may be configured to be performed. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be used as an effect for notifying the player of the result of the AT transfer lottery process for the lottery group information. For example, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started upon the execution of the AT transfer lottery process for one lottery group information, and by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 or irrespective of the operation. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, if the AT win is selected in the AT transfer lottery process, the combination of symbols corresponding to the AT win is stopped and displayed, and the AT win is selected in the AT transfer lottery process. If not, the composition of symbols corresponding to the result of the deviation may be stopped and displayed. Further, the first transition challenge state ST2 may be executed in a situation where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completely stopped, and some or all of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. The first transition challenge state ST2 may be executed in the situation.

(2) In the state where the second transition challenge state ST4 is in a state where the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) is executed is awaited. It may be configured to be performed. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be used as an effect for notifying the player of the result of the AT transition lottery process. For example, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started upon execution of the AT transfer lottery process, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 or irrespective of the operation. In this case, if the AT transition lottery process is AT winning, the combination of symbols corresponding to the AT win is stopped and displayed, and if the AT transition lottery process is not AT winning, the result of the failure The combination of symbols corresponding to may be stopped and displayed. Further, the second transition challenge state ST4 may be executed in a situation where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completely stopped, and some or all of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. The configuration may be such that the second transition challenge state ST4 is executed in the situation.

(3) The promotion challenge state ST3 is performed in a state where the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) is executed is waited for. It may be configured. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be used as an effect for notifying the player of the result of the promotion lottery process for the lottery group information. For example, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started when the promotion lottery process is executed for one lottery group information, and the reels are operated by the stop buttons 42 to 44 or irrespective of the operation. When 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, if the promotion lottery process has been promoted, the combination of symbols corresponding to the promotion prize is stopped and displayed, and the promotion lottery process is not promoted. In this case, a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of deviation may be stopped and displayed. In addition, a plurality of types of symbol combinations corresponding to promotion wins may be prepared, and the symbol combinations corresponding to the types of lottery group information after promotion may be stopped and displayed. Further, the promotion challenge state ST3 may be executed in a situation in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped, and in a situation in which some or all of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotated. The promotion challenge state ST3 may be executed.

(4) The acquisition challenge state ST1 is not limited to the configuration in which the lottery group information is transferred to the promotion challenge state ST3 when the maximum value is acquired, and the number is less than the maximum value and is 2 or more. The configuration may be such that the promotion challenge state ST3 can be entered when the lottery group information of a certain special number or more is acquired. For example, in the configuration in which the maximum value of the lottery group information is 5, when the number of lottery group information is 3, the transitional lottery process is executed, and when the transition is elected, the promotion challenge state ST3 is moved to, When the number of lottery group information is 4, the transition lottery process is executed in a state where the winning probability is higher than in the case of 3 pieces, and when the number of lottery group information is 4, the transition to the promotion challenge state ST3, and the lottery group information When the maximum number is 5, which is the maximum value, the promotion challenge state ST3 may be surely entered. As a result, the degree of expectation of transition to the promotion challenge state ST3 gradually increases as the lottery group information is acquired.

(5) Promotion In the promotion challenge state ST3, when the promotion is selected in the promotion lottery process, a plurality of types of lottery group information may be simultaneously promoted. For example, in the promotion challenge state ST3, when the promotion lottery process results in a promotion win, all the lottery group information acquired at that time may be promoted to the advantageous side type. In addition, in the configuration, if the promotion lottery process results in promotion win, all of the lottery group information is promoted to the advantageous side by one stage, and all of the promotion lottery processes executed multiple times in the promotion challenge state ST3. In the case of being promoted in the processing cycle, all lottery group information may be the most advantageous type.

(6) As a configuration in which a dedicated display unit for displaying the number and types of acquired lottery group information is provided, and the display unit is directly controlled by the main MPU 82 instead of the production MPU 92 Good. In this case, the number and types of lottery group information may not be displayed on the image display device 67, or the number and types of lottery group information may be displayed on the image display device 67. In the case where the number and type of lottery group information are displayed on the image display device 67, the number of lottery group information on the image display device 67 is displayed after the display of the number and type of lottery group information on the dedicated display unit is started. While the display of the number and the type is started and the number and type of the lottery group information are displayed on the image display device 67, the dedicated display section may be configured to perform the display. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether the number and type of lottery group information on the image display device 67 are legitimate by confirming the dedicated display section.

(7) When the number of laps of the acquisition challenge state ST1 executed without the transition to the AT state ST5 becomes the number corresponding to the ceiling corresponding value, the first transition challenge state ST2 or the second transition challenge The AT state ST5 may be entered without going through the state ST4. In this case, when the acquisition challenge state ST1 is repeated without the transition to the AT state ST5, the transition to the AT state ST5 can be caused early.

(8) The number of digested games in the acquired challenge state ST1 required for the transition to the first transition challenge state ST2 when the promotion challenge state ST3 does not occur is limited to a configuration in which 100 games are fixed. Alternatively, when the acquisition challenge state ST1 occurs, the digested game number may be selected from among a plurality of types of games. This makes it possible to diversify the number of digestion games.

Further, in the configuration, as the number of lottery group information items subjected to the AT transition lottery processing in the first transition challenge state ST2 increases, the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs in the first transition challenge state ST2. The number of exhausted games in the acquired challenge state ST1 that has occurred without any more may be a smaller number or a smaller number of games. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of digestive games in the acquisition challenge state ST1 as a compensation for the player who has not acquired the lottery group information but has not transitioned to the AT state ST5.

In addition, as the number of laps in the acquisition challenge state ST1 executed without the transition to the AT state ST5 increases, the number of the digested games selected in the acquisition challenge state ST1 becomes smaller or smaller. It may be configured to be easy to become. This makes it possible to reduce the number of exhausting games in the acquisition challenge state ST1 as a compensation for the repeated acquisition challenge state ST1 without the transition to the AT state ST5.

(9) In the acquisition challenge state ST1, when the acquisition point is selected in the opportunity point lottery process, only the addition process of the opportunity point counter 84b is executed, and the lottery group information may not be acquired. In this case, in the first transition challenge state ST2, the AT transition lottery process is executed by the number of times corresponding to the value of the trigger point counter 84b, and the probability of being AT-winned is constant in each AT transition lottery process. Good.

(10) The type of lottery group information at the acquired timing is not limited to a configuration in which the type is the least advantageous, and the type of lottery group information at the acquired timing is the most advantageous type. It may be configured to be fixed to, and to be demoted to the type having a lower advantage every time the demotion condition is satisfied.

(11) The type of lottery group information at the acquired timing may not be fixed. For example, the type of lottery process may be executed when the lottery group information acquisition condition is satisfied, and the type of lottery group information selected in the lottery process may be acquired. Further, for example, as the number of laps of the acquisition challenge state ST1 executed without the transition to the AT state ST5 increases, the probability that advantageous type of lottery group information is acquired may increase. This makes it possible to acquire advantageous type of lottery group information as a compensation for the repeated acquisition challenge state ST1 without the transition to the AT state ST5.

(12) As the number of laps of the acquisition challenge state ST1 executed without the transition to the AT state ST5 increases, the AT transition lottery process executed in the first transition challenge state ST2 or the second transition challenge state ST4 is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the AT is increased. As a result, as a compensation for the repeated acquisition challenge state ST1 without the transition to the AT state ST5, it becomes possible to easily become an AT win in the AT transition lottery process.

(13) Limited to a configuration in which the first transition challenge state ST2 when the number of pieces of lottery group information acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1 is less than the second transition challenge state ST4 is expected to transition to the AT state ST5 The number of pieces of lottery group information acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1 is 1 or more and 2 or less, 1 or more and 3 or less, 1 or more and 4 or less, or 1 or more The first transition challenge state ST2 when the maximum value is less than or equal to the maximum value may have a lower degree of expectation of transition to the AT state ST5 than the second transition challenge state ST4.

(14) When five pieces of lottery group information corresponding to the maximum value are acquired in the acquisition challenge state ST1, the configuration may be such that the first transition challenge state ST2 is entered without transition to the promotion challenge state ST3. If a transition win is obtained in the transition lottery process when individual pieces are acquired, the game proceeds to the promotion challenge state ST3, and if not, the first transition challenge state ST2 without transition to the promotion challenge state ST3. It may be configured to shift to.

(15) In the acquisition challenge state ST1, if five pieces of lottery group information corresponding to the maximum value are acquired, the process moves to the promotion challenge state ST3, and after the promotion challenge state ST3 ends, the process moves to the acquisition challenge state ST1. It may be configured. In this case, when the acquisition condition of the lottery group information is newly established in the acquisition challenge state ST1 after the return, the lottery group information may not be acquired but the promotion challenge state ST3 may be set. As a result, it becomes possible to easily make the type of lottery group information an advantageous type.

(16) When the first transition challenge state ST2 or the second transition challenge state ST4 ends without the transition to the AT state ST5, the acquisition challenge state ST1 is not transitioned to the acquisition challenge state ST1. It may be configured to shift to a different game state. Then, it may be configured to shift to the acquisition challenge state ST1 when a predetermined shift condition is satisfied in the different game state. Even with the configuration, the first transition challenge state ST2 in the case where the lottery group information is one may have a lower transition expectation degree to the AT state ST5 than the second transition challenge state ST4, In the challenge state ST1, when five pieces of lottery group information corresponding to the maximum value are acquired, the promotion challenge state ST3 may be adopted.

(17) In addition to or instead of the configuration of shifting to the continuation rate promotion state that can increase the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process in the addition execution state before the addition execution state is started, the addition execution state The configuration may be such that a transition is made to a state in which it is possible to increase the expected number of additional games to be given for one operation of the first credit insertion button 47 in FIG. In this case, the continuous winning probability may be high in the continuous rate promotion state, and the expected number of additional games may be increased. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the advantage of the continuous rate promotion state. Further, in the continuation rate promotion state, the trigger for increasing the probability of continuous winning may be the same as the trigger for increasing the expected number of games to be added, or may be different.

(18) The continuous winning probability may be lower than that in the continuous rate promotion state. For example, when the continuation rate promotion state is started, the maximum value of the continuous winning probability is set, and the continuous winning probability may be reduced every time the demotion condition is satisfied.

(19) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the initial continuous winning probability is fixed when the continuation rate promotion state is started, and the initial continuous winning probability may be determined by lottery.

(20) When the continuation rate promotion state is started, the probability lower than the actual continuous winning probability is notified by the image display device 67, but the actual continuous winning probability is notified as it is. Alternatively, the probability of being higher than the actual continuous winning probability may be notified. In a configuration in which a probability higher than the actual continuous winning probability is notified when the continuation rate promotion state is started, a situation may occur in which the notified probability is lowered so as to approach the actual continuous winning probability. By doing so, the notified probability may be matched with the actual continuous winning probability.

(21) When the continuation winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 is updated in the continuation rate promotion state, 2% may be added instead of 1%. In this case, the value obtained by adding up the number of remaining games in the continuous rate promotion state and 2% is equal to or less than the difference between the actual maximum value of the continuous winning probability and the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67. In the situation, the continuous winning probability displayed on the image display device 67 may be updated so as to be added by 2%.

(22) When the addition of the number of continuous games in one execution of the ART state is notified on the image display device 67 over a plurality of games, the addition already determined when the notification period is started. The number of games smaller than the number of games may be notified by the image display device 67, and the number of games notified in subsequent games may be updated to the larger number of games so as to approach the actual number of additional games. Good. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that the number of additional games increases.

(23) The operation unit operated to generate the number of additional games in the additional execution state is not limited to the first credit insertion button 47 and may be another operation unit. Further, the operation unit operated to perform the cancel operation in the addition-on state is not limited to the start lever 41, and may be another operation unit.

(24) When the cancel operation is performed in the additional execution state, the total number of additional games and the number of compensation games provided based on the operation of the first credit insertion button 47 until the cancellation operation is performed. The number of compensation games is not limited to the above configuration, and only the number of compensation games may be provided.

(25) A notification image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R displayed on the image display device 67 in a situation where the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the initial position, and the stop order notification device 71 at the notification time position. The notification image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R displayed on the image display device 67 in the state of being arranged in may be configured to have different display contents. For example, the former notification image may be displayed in a larger size than the latter notification image, and the former notification image is displayed using a wider range of the image display device 67 than the latter notification image. It may be configured to be.

(26) When the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position and the notification image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the image display device 67, the notification image notifies the stop order. The display may be performed in a region not facing the device 71, or may be displayed in both a region facing the stop order notification device 71 and a region not facing the stop order notification device 71.

(27) The stop order notification device 71 is not limited to the configuration of being rotatable, but may be of a sliding type.

(28) Not only the stop order notification device 71 but also the image display device 67 may be movably provided. In this case, when the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position, the image display device 67 is arranged at a retracted position outside the notification time position, and the image display device 67 is arranged at the notification time position. Alternatively, the stop order notification device 71 may be arranged at the initial position. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the display device arranged at the notification time position.

(29) Even when the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the initial position, the stop order notification device 71 may face a part of the image display device 67. In this case, when the information display device 67 is arranged at the notification position, the range in which the image display device 67 faces the stop order notification device 71 is wider than that when the image display device 67 is arranged at the initial position. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the stop order notification device 71 in a situation where the order notification device 71 is arranged at the notification time position.

(30) The stop order notification device 71 is not limited to the configuration in which the stop order notification device 71 is displaced between two positions, the initial position and the notification time position, and may be configured to be displaced between three or more positions. For example, in addition to the initial position, the first notification position and the second notification position can be displaced, and in a predetermined AT state, the stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the first notification position, and in a specific AT state. The stop order notification device 71 is arranged at the second notification position. This makes it possible to diversify the situation in which the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

(31) In each of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be notified at the same time, and any of the notifications may be made visible to the player. Good. In this case, the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 notify different stop orders, and only one of them notifies the correct stop order, thereby allowing the player to select the correct stop order. It is possible to perform the effect. For example, when a winning combination that can establish the first falling replay prize is won, one of the six stopping sequences makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay winning. As for the stop order, one of the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71 is notified of one correct stop order, and the other is notified of one incorrect stop order. In this case, the six stop orders are narrowed down to two.

Further, in the configuration, in a situation in which the stop order notification device 71 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of positions where the stop order notification device 71 is arranged are prepared, and the stop order notification device 71 is arranged. The probability that the stop order displayed on the stop order notification device 71 is correct may be changed according to the position where the order notification device 71 is arranged. In this case, the player selects the stop order in relation to the arrangement position of the stop order notification device 71.

(32) Instead of the configuration in which the AT transition lottery processing for the number of lottery group information is executed in the first transition challenge state ST2, when a plurality of lottery group information is stored, the plurality of lottery group information is aggregated. The AT transfer lottery process may be executed in this manner. For example, although the AT transfer lottery process is executed regardless of whether one lottery group information is stored or two lottery group information is stored, the latter case is better than the former case. Also, the AT transition lottery process may be executed once in a mode in which the probability of winning the AT is high.

(33) When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 67, and when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified but the branch timing of the lottery mode is notified. It is not limited to the configuration in which the display is performed on the special display section 63 only, and the configuration may be such that the display is performed on the special display section 63 in other cases. For example, even when the image display device 67 does not execute the notification of the stop order and the notification indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode, a predetermined winning combination in which a predetermined winning occurs when the predetermined stop order is reached. When the player wins, the special display section 63 may be configured to give a corresponding notification. Further, for example, when the image display device 67 does not execute the stop order notification but executes the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode, the special display section 63 provides the notification corresponding to the stop order. Good. However, if the player is informed of the stop order clearly in the image display device 67 in such a manner that the stop order can be clearly specified, for example, any of the index values IV=1 to 6 If the crab is won, the bell prize will be established regardless of whether or not the player is in the AT state. Therefore, in such a situation, it is preferable that when the special display section 63 gives a notification, the notification is made in a manner that makes it difficult to specify the stop order.

(34) When the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is executed on the image display device 67 or the like under the control of the effecting side MPU 92, the notification corresponding to the notification may be performed on the special display section 63. Good. For example, before the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, images such as characters and letters are displayed on the image display device 67 in a display color corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination in the game. At the timing before the image is displayed, at the same timing as the display timing of the image, or at the timing after the image is displayed, the display corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination of the game or The display corresponding to the display color may be executed in the special display section 63. More specifically, when an image such as a blue character or character is displayed on the image display device 67 when the normal replay combination is won, the corresponding blue display is displayed on the special display section 63. When the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role is won, when an image such as a green character or character is displayed on the image display device 67, a corresponding green display is displayed. The special display unit 63 may be configured to be performed. As a result, when the image display device 67 notifies the display color corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the display corresponding to the display color is displayed on the special display section 63. The configuration may be applied to a slot machine in which the winning combination is not changed in accordance with the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled by the production side MPU 92. It may be applied to a slot machine which is not configured to be notified based on the above.

(35) Some display may be performed on the special display section 63 in each game regardless of the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination. In this case, the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination may be performed on the special display part 63, but by checking the special display part 63, the player can clearly understand the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Since it is not desirable that the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is specified, it is preferable that the notification is performed.

(36) When the image display device 67 notifies the stop order, the special display portion 63 provides the notification corresponding to the stop order, but when the image display device 67 does not notify the stop order. The special display unit 63 may be configured to display such that the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination cannot be specified. For example, when the stop order is not notified on the image display device 67, the display content of the special display unit 63 is determined by lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result may be performed on the special display unit 63. .. As a result, when the stop order is notified on the image display device 67, the special display section 63 notifies the stop order while the stop order is not notified. It is possible to make the display content of the display unit 63 irregular. In this case, the function of the special display section 63 becomes difficult for the player to understand, and the player's attention to the special display section 63 can be reduced.

(37) When the image display device 67 notifies the stop order and when the notification indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode is performed, the corresponding notification is performed on the special display section 63. In other cases, the special display section 63 may display such that the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination cannot be specified. For example, when the image display device 67 does not notify the stop order and the notification indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode, the display content of the special display section 63 is determined by the lottery and the display corresponding to the lottery result. May be performed in the special display section 63.

(38) When the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82, some display may be always displayed on the special display section 63. For example, in the case where the stop order is notified on the image display device 67 and in the game where the notification indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode is performed, the corresponding notification is performed on the special display section 63, and in other cases. Alternatively, the special display section 63 may be configured to perform a standby display indicating that it is on standby. As a result, a special display is performed to confirm whether or not any abnormality has occurred in the electrical path between the main MPU 82 and the special display portion 63 and whether or not a failure has occurred in the special display portion 63. It becomes possible to perform it only by visually observing the portion 63.

(39) Although the period in which the notification of the stop order is executed in the image display device 67 is included in the period in which the notification corresponding to the stop order is executed in the special display portion 63, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration is such that at least a part of the period in which the notification of the stop order is being executed in the image display device 67 is not included in the period in which the notification corresponding to the stop order is being executed in the special display section 63. May be For example, while the image display device 67 starts the notification of the stop order after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop order on the special display unit 63 is started, while the notification of the stop order is being performed in the image display device 67. The notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 63 may be ended, and the notification of the stop order in the image display device 67 is started after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 63 is finished. The configuration may be such that the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 63 is started after the notification of the stop order is started in the image display device 67, and after the timing when the notification of the stop order is ended in the image display device 67 The notification corresponding to the stop order in the display unit 63 may be terminated, and the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 63 is started after the notification of the stop order in the image display device 67 is started, The notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display portion 63 may be ended at a timing before the notification of the stop order in 67 ends. The player's attention to the special display unit 63 by shortening the period in which the notification corresponding to the stop order is executed in the special display unit 63 is shorter than the period in which the notification of the stop order is executed in the image display device 67. It is possible to reduce the degree.

(40) The special display unit 63 may be provided in the display unit for notifying other information such as the credit display unit 61 or the number-of-grants display unit 62. For example, one of the credit display unit 61 and the number-of-grants display unit 62, a target display unit that partitions the outer edge of the target display unit, and notification light emission for notifying information of the notification target of the target display unit The special display section 63 may be arranged at a position adjacent to the notification light emitting section in the area partitioned by the partition frame section of the target display section. In this case, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display section 63.

(41) Set the same number of unit display parts as the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R that affect the result of winning on the special display part 63, and set the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each unit display part. It may be configured to execute the corresponding display. In this case, in the special display section 63 as well as in the image display device 67, a notification that allows the player to clearly understand the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed.

(42) A role that enables the generation of the first RT replay prize, a role that enables the generation of the second RT replay prize, a role that enables the generation of the first falling replay prize, and a generation of the second falling replay prize. For at least one of the winning combinations, at least one of the winning combinations does not cause a replay winning that triggers the transition of the lottery mode corresponding to the case where the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the predetermined stopping order. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be configured to generate a replay prize that triggers a shift to the lottery mode when the stop operation timing with respect to the rotation position reaches a predetermined operation timing. In this case, when it is possible to generate a replay prize that is a trigger for the transition of the combination or to avoid the occurrence of the replay prize, the player can recognize the stop operation timing in the image display device 67. In addition to the notification, the special display section 63 provides the notification corresponding to the content of the notification.

(43) The device for executing the notification of the stop mode under the control of the production-side MPU 92 is not limited to the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71, and the image display device 67 and the stop order notification device 71. Instead of or in addition to this, the production side MPU 92 may control the dedicated light emitting unit for informing the stop state, and the production side MPU 92 may control the speaker unit 65. The notification of the stop mode may be executed by doing so. Further, the stop order notification device 71 may not be provided.

(44) The configuration in which the main MPU 82 determines whether or not to notify the stop mode is not essential, and the determination as to whether or not to notify the stop mode is performed in each of the main MPU 82 and the production MPU 92. It may be configured to be performed, or may be configured to determine whether to execute the notification of the stop mode in the performance side MPU 92. However, in the case of a configuration in which the production-side MPU 92 determines whether or not to notify the stop mode, information on the determination result needs to be transmitted from the production-side MPU 92 to the main-side MPU 82.

(45) The main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 are not limited to being housed in the same board box, but the main control board 81 and the payout control board 85 are housed in different board boxes. It may be configured to have. Further, the main MPU 82 and the payout MPU 86 are not limited to being mounted on separate boards, and the main MPU 82 and the payout MPU 86 may be mounted on the same board.

(46) The virtual medal counter 88a is not limited to being provided in the payout side RAM 88, and the virtual medal counter 88a may be provided in the main RAM 84. In this case, it is not necessary to transmit a credit insertion command from the main MPU 82 to the payout MPU 86 when the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are operated, but when a prize corresponding to the addition of the game medium occurs, the payment is given. Information on the number of target game media is transmitted from the payout-side MPU 86 to the main MPU 82, and the number of game media exceeding the upper limit storage number of the virtual medal counter 88a is included in the information on the number of game media to be granted. The number information is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the payout MPU 86. Then, the payout side MPU 86 is configured to drive and control the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals corresponding to the information about the number of game media exceeding the payout amount is paid out.

(47) When a prize corresponding to the award of a game medium occurs, instead of the configuration in which the payout side MPU 86 does not send the rotation end command until the award of the number of game media corresponding to the award is completed, the award of the game medium is given. When the winning corresponding to the winning occurs, the rotation end command may be transmitted from the payout side MPU 86 even if the number of game media corresponding to the winning is not completed. In this case, the main MPU 82 may be configured to perform control so that the next game can be started even while the game medium is being added. A configuration may be adopted in which the corresponding command is transmitted from the payout-side MPU 86 to the main-side MPU 82 so that the main-side MPU 82 performs control so that the next game can be started after the addition of the game medium is completed.

(48) When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the bell prize in the case of being won by any of the index values IV=1 to 6, medals are paid out. The configuration may not occur.

(49) The main line ML is not limited to the bent line, but may be a straight line. Further, even if the combination of the same symbols is stopped in the sub lines SL1 to SL5, the winning may not be established. In this case, the situation in which the combination of the same symbols is stopped and the winning is established is only the situation in which the combination of the same symbols is stopped in the main line ML. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to one main line ML, and the number of effective lines may be two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of active lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, and the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(50) Instead of a configuration in which the reel unit 31 is electrically connected to the payout side MPU 86 and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is drive-controlled by the payout side MPU 86, the reel unit 31 is electrically connected to the main side MPU 82. The main MPU 82 may be connected to each other and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be drive-controlled. In this case, stop information such as a sliding table for driving and controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. Instead, the stop information may be stored in the payout ROM 87. The configuration may be stored in advance.

When the stop information is stored in advance in the payout side ROM 87, when the lottery processing of the winning combination is executed in the main MPU 82, the main MPU 82 is caused to transmit the stop information corresponding to the lottery result. A command may be transmitted from the side MPU 82 to the payout side MPU 86, and the payout side MPU 86 receiving the command may read the stop information instructed in the command from the payout side ROM 87 to the main side MPU 82. Further, instead of the configuration, when a lottery process of a winning combination is executed in the main MPU 82, a command indicating the lottery result is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the payout MPU 86, and the payout MPU 86 receiving the command is The type of stop information corresponding to the lottery result indicated in the command may be specified, and the stop information of the specified type may be read from the payout side ROM 87 and transmitted to the main MPU 82. By thus configuring the stop side information to be stored in the payout side ROM 87, even if the main side MPU 82 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop information is stored in advance in the main side ROM 83. It is not necessary to store the data, and the storage capacity required in the main ROM 83 can be reduced.

(51) The display content on the special display section 63 is in a one-to-one correspondence with the content of the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination executed on the image display device 67 or the like under the control of the production side MPU 92. However, the display content on the special display section 63 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and one type of notification content corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination executed by the image display device 67 or the like is displayed. The configuration may be set.

For example, when the image display device 67 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the special display section 63 displays a one-to-one correspondence with the type of winning combination in the game. It may be configured to be opened. In this case, even in the situation where the same stop order is notified by the image display device 67, the display content on the special display portion 63 varies depending on the type of winning combination in the game.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 67, one display content selected by lottery is selected from a plurality of types of display content corresponding to the notification content of the stop order. The selected display content may be displayed on the special display section 63. For example, when a notification indicating that the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R on the image display device 67, the special display unit In 63, any one of “3”, “L” and “H” may be determined and displayed by lottery. Even in this case, even if the same stop order is notified by the image display device 67, the display content on the special display section 63 may be different.

According to each of the above-mentioned configurations, the contents notified on the special display section 63 become difficult for the player to understand. However, in order to make the display content of the special display section 63 correspond to the content of the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination executed on the image display apparatus 67 or the like based on the control of the production side MPU 92, the image display apparatus 67 is predetermined. Display contents that can be displayed on the special display unit 63 when the notification is executed, and display contents that can be displayed on the special display unit 63 when the notification different from the predetermined notification is executed on the image display device 67. It is preferable to have a completely different structure.

(52) The special display portion 63 may be configured to perform a display corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination. In this case, the display content of the special display portion 63 may correspond to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination in a one-to-one correspondence. Further, instead of the configuration, a plurality of types of display contents on the special display unit 63 may be set for each result of the lottery process of the winning combination. For example, when IV=11 in which the BB combination is set is won, any one of “L”, “H”, and “F” is determined and displayed by lottery on the special display portion 63, and When IV=7 in which the watermelon role and the second watermelon role are set is won, any one of “1”, “5”, and “8” is determined and displayed by lottery in the special display portion 63. When IV=8 in which the Bell replay combination is set is won, either “2” or “4” may be determined and displayed by lottery on the special display portion 63. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the lottery process of the winning combination even if the special display unit 63 is checked while the display corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed on the special display unit 63. However, in order to make the display content of the special display portion 63 correspond to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination, the display content that can be displayed on the special display portion 63 when the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination is a predetermined result, When the result of the lottery process is different from the predetermined result, it is preferable that the display content that can be displayed on the special display portion 63 is completely different. In this case, the type of display content of the special display portion 63 set for one result of the lottery process of the winning combination may be the same number regardless of the result of the lottery process of any winning combination. The number may be different depending on the result of the lottery process.

The configuration may be applied to a slot machine in which the winning combination is not changed in accordance with the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled by the production side MPU 92. It may be applied to a slot machine which is not configured to be notified based on the above. For example, the configuration may be applied to a configuration in which the notification corresponding to the type of winning combination is executed on the image display device 67 or the like under the control of the effect MPU 92.

(53) When the display corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination is executed on the special display portion 63, after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the lottery of the winning combination on the special display portion 63 is performed. The display may be started corresponding to the result of the processing. In this case, even if the special display section 63 is checked in a situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, it is possible to prevent the result of the lottery process of the winning combination in the game from being specified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the lottery process of the winning combination is executed and before the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the lottery process of the winning combination in the special display portion 63 is performed. The display corresponding to the result may be started.

(54) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the production MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above-described embodiments. For example, when a prize corresponding to the award of a game medium is established, the award is given by the award. Information about the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the production MPU 92. In this case, it becomes possible to inform the information of the number of game media awarded by winning on the image display device 67 or the like. Further, even when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to it is displayed on the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 82 to the production-side MPU 92. In this case, an effect corresponding to the rotation state of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be performed on the image display device 67 or the like.

(55) A backlight may be provided on the back side of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for illuminating the design visible from the back side through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. In this case, when the winning is achieved, the back light is used to illuminate the symbol from the back side, so that the player can easily recognize that the winning is achieved. In the configuration, like the first bell role, the second bell role, the first watermelon role, the second watermelon role, the normal replay role, the bell replay role, the first cherry replay role, the second cherry replay role, and the BB role, In the configuration in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML when the corresponding winning is established, but the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the sub lines SL1 to SL5, the sub lines SL1 to SL5 are displayed. If the entire combination of the same symbols that are stopped and displayed is illuminated with a backlight, the player may mistakenly recognize that the sublines SL1 to SL5 are the main lines ML. Therefore, in order to prevent the occurrence of such misidentification, when the winning is established on the main line ML in the situation where the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the sub lines SL1 to SL5, the same symbol is formed. The combination of symbols which are not displayed in the main line ML but are not displayed may be illuminated by the backlight. In addition to or instead of the configuration, at least one symbol stopped and displayed at a position where the sublines SL1 to SL5 in which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed intersects with the main line ML is backed up. It may be configured to illuminate with a light. Further, in addition to or in place of these configurations, while not illuminating the entire subline in which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a part of the symbols stopped and displayed on the subline and the subline are displayed. May be configured to illuminate the symbols stopped and displayed at different positions with a backlight.

(56) The image display device 67 may notify the type of winning combination after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating. In the configuration, like the first bell role, the second bell role, the first watermelon role, the second watermelon role, the normal replay role, the bell replay role, the first cherry replay role, the second cherry replay role, and the BB role, In the configuration in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML when the corresponding winning is established, but the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the sub lines SL1 to SL5, the sub lines SL1 to SL5 are displayed. When the entire combination of the same symbols that are stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device 67, the player may erroneously recognize that the sublines SL1 to SL5 are the main lines ML. Therefore, in order to prevent such misidentification, at least one of the sub-lines SL1 to SL5 in which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the main line ML are stopped and displayed are crossed. The pattern may be displayed on the image display device 67. Further, while clearly showing the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on the image display device 67, the same symbol combination stopped or displayed on the sublines SL1 to SL5 or the symbol corresponding to the same symbol combination is displayed. May be displayed on the image display device 67. Further, although the same symbol combination stopped and displayed on the sub-lines SL1 to SL5 is not displayed as it is on the image display device 67, one symbol which constitutes the same symbol combination is displayed on the image display device 67. It may be configured to. In this case, the symbol is temporarily displayed at a timing before the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and the display is continued even after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. It may be configured to display the symbol once after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are once displayed at a timing before the rotation is stopped. It may be configured to turn off.

(57) In the above-described embodiment, the privilege to pay out the medals is given when the small winning combination is established. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the player may be given some privilege. I wish I had it. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and manages credits of medals owned by a player, an increase in credited medals corresponds to awarding of a privilege.

(58) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and may be a C type, a combined type of A type and C type, a combined type of B type and C type, and further an RT game, a CT game or an AT. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a type equipped with a game.

(59) Instead of a configuration in which the end condition for one execution in the ART state is the consumption of the number of games, the total number of payouts of game media generated in one execution in the ART state is equal to or larger than the end reference number, and the one execution is performed. The configuration may be such that the number of times ends. Further, the number of game media increased in one execution time in the ART state may be equal to or more than the end reference number, and the one execution time may be ended. In these cases, instead of the configuration in which the number of additional games is added in the additional execution state or the like, the configuration is such that the addition of the end reference number is generated.

(60) Instead of the special display unit 63, the image display device 67, and the stop order notification device 71 that notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, the relationship with the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In order to prevent the player from recognizing the predetermined timing when the winning combination is won when the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the above is the predetermined timing, or in order not to be the predetermined timing. The special display unit 63, the image display device 67, and the stop order notification device 71 may be configured to perform the notification for making the timing recognizable to the player.

(61) Even if one game is finished, if the replay prize is established in the game, the acceptance permission process is not executed, and the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are not accepted and are ejected to the medal tray 59. The configuration is not limited to the above-described configuration, and even when the replay prize is established, the acceptance permission process is executed and the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and then the hopper. It may be configured to be collected by the device 53. In this case, the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 between the end of the game in which the replay winning is established and the start of the next game are stored and stored as virtual medals.

(62) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., and may be a geometric line, a figure, etc. Further, it is possible to configure the design by light, color, etc., the design can also be configured by a three-dimensional shape, etc., and even a combination of these can constitute the design. That is, it is sufficient that the design has a function as information having distinctiveness.

(63) In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied has been shown, but the invention may be applied to a pachinko machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. Good.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-described embodiment>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses, etc.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A lottery opportunity generating means that causes a lottery opportunity (addition of the value of the opportunity point counter 84b) when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the opportunity period (acquisition challenge state ST1) (acquisition wins in the opportunity point lottery process). (Function of executing the processing of steps S1410 and S1803 in the main MPU 82),
First transition means (function of executing the process of step S1712 in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to a lottery period (first transition challenge state ST2) when a predetermined number of games have been exhausted in the triggerable period,
Predetermined lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery processing for the number of the lottery triggers generated by the lottery trigger generation means before the start of the lottery period in the lottery period (execution of step S2005 in the main MPU 82) Function),
A privilege granting unit (a function of executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the lottery of the predetermined lottery process being the privilege granting result,
Second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S2112 in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to the triggerable period when the result of the predetermined lottery process does not become the privilege granting result in the lottery period,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, the lottery period occurs when the predetermined number of games is exhausted during the triggerable period, and the predetermined lottery process is executed for the number of lottery triggers that occurred during the triggerable period during the lottery period. Then, the bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the bonus grant result. As a result, the game can be played while expecting a lottery opportunity to occur during the possible opportunity period, and the game can be performed while expecting that the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process will be the benefit grant result during the lottery period. Become. Therefore, the target that the player pays attention to in each period is different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the uniformization of the game.

In addition, the configuration allows the player to move to the lottery period when a predetermined number of games are exhausted during the triggerable period, so the opportunity to move to the lottery period becomes clear, and the understanding of the game content can be facilitated. Becomes

Further, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process does not become the privilege granting result during the lottery period, the triggerable period again occurs. As a result, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process does not become the privilege granting result in the lottery period, the triggerable period is repeated, and it becomes possible to facilitate understanding of the game content.

Feature A2. Characteristic A1 characterized in that, in the possible trigger period, there is a high probability state in which the lottery opportunity is relatively likely to occur and a low probability state in which the lottery opportunity is relatively unlikely to occur. Game machine.

According to the characteristic A2, the easiness of occurrence of the lottery opportunity varies during the opportunity period, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opportunity period.

Features A3. When the transition to the triggerable period by the second transition unit occurs, the high-probability setting unit (function of executing the process of step S2116 in the main MPU 82) for setting the high probability state is provided. The gaming machine described in Feature A2.

According to the feature A3, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process does not become the privilege granting result during the lottery period and a new triggerable period occurs, a lottery trigger is likely to occur. As a result, even if the triggerable period is newly generated without generating the privilege granting result, it becomes possible to continue the motivation to continue the game.

Features A4. The characteristic A3 characterized in that the high probability state set by the high certainty setting means when the transition to the triggerable period by the second transition means occurs, continues for at least a specific number of games. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic A4, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process does not become the privilege granting result during the lottery period and a new triggerable period occurs, a lottery trigger is likely to occur at least over the specific number of games. Therefore, at least until the specific number of games is exhausted, it is possible to allow the player to play a game while expecting a lottery opportunity to occur. In addition, if the number of specific games is exhausted, the number of games required to move to the lottery period after the triggerable period has ended is less than the predetermined number of games, so the desire to continue playing continues. It becomes possible.

Features A5. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the predetermined lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery process in a mode corresponding to a result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

According to the characteristic A5, the predetermined lottery process is executed in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, so that not only the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process but also the result of the lottery process of the winning combination can be selected in the lottery period. It is possible to draw attention.

Features A6. The predetermined lottery execution means, when the lottery trigger generation means generates a plurality of the lottery triggers before the start of the lottery period, performs the predetermined lottery process corresponding to one lottery trigger for one game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5 characterized by being executed.

According to the characteristic A6, since the predetermined lottery process corresponding to one lottery trigger is executed for one game in the lottery period, it is possible to clarify the situation in which one predetermined lottery process is executed. Thus, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to each execution of the predetermined lottery process.

Features A7. When the lottery period is started in a situation where the condition for granting the privilege is established, a means for allowing the privilege to be granted when the first lottery opportunity is exhausted in the lottery period (main) The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which is provided with a function of making a positive determination in step S2003 in the side MPU 82.

According to the feature A7, even when the condition for granting the privilege is satisfied, the lottery period is started and the lottery trigger is exhausted so that the privilege is granted, and thus the lottery trigger is generated in the lottery period. It is possible to give the player the impression that the privilege is granted by digesting. In addition, if the lottery period is started in a situation where the conditions for granting the privilege are satisfied, the privilege is granted when the first lottery opportunity is exhausted, so the condition for granting the privilege is satisfied. However, it is possible to prevent the lottery period from continuing for a long time.

Feature A8. The privilege granting means, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process is the privilege grant result, shifts to an advantageous game state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player as the grant of the privilege.
The predetermined lottery execution means, in a situation where the lottery trigger that has not become the execution trigger of the predetermined lottery process remains, the result of the predetermined lottery process executed by a lottery trigger different from the lottery trigger In the case of a bonus grant result, any one of the characteristics A1 to A7 characterized in that the predetermined lottery process is executed with respect to the lottery trigger that has not become the execution trigger of the predetermined lottery process after the end of the advantageous game state. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic A8, when the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the situation where the lottery opportunity remains, the predetermined lottery process is executed for the remaining lottery opportunity after the end of the advantageous game state, so the lottery period occurs. In this case, it is more advantageous for the player that the transition to the advantageous game state occurs with the lottery opportunity left. As a result, the player expects that the transition to the advantageous game state will occur early in the lottery period, so that it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the lottery period.

Features A9. A means for allowing the privilege to be granted when the triggerable period is executed a predetermined number of times without the privilege being granted (the function of the main MPU 82 that makes an affirmative determination in step S2003 and the main MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is provided with a function of making a positive determination in step S2401.

According to the characteristic A9, since the privilege is granted when the triggerable period is executed a predetermined number of times without the granting of the privilege, it is possible to perform the relief when the triggerable period is repeated. ..

Feature A10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the lottery opportunity generating means determines whether or not the lottery opportunity is generated in a manner corresponding to a result of the lottery processing of the winning combination.

According to the characteristic A10, the presence or absence of the lottery trigger is determined in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Therefore, not only the presence or absence of the lottery trigger in the triggerable period but also the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination is determined. Also makes it possible to draw attention to the player.

Feature A11. The lottery opportunity generating means stores lottery opportunity information (lottery group information) in the information storage means (information storage area 111) when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A plurality of the lottery trigger information may be stored in the information storage means in one triggerable period,
The predetermined lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery processing individually for the lottery trigger information when a plurality of the lottery trigger information is stored in the information storage means in the lottery period. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A10.

According to the characteristic A11, the game is played while expecting the lottery opportunity information to be obtained in the opportunity period, and the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process executed individually for the lottery opportunity information is obtained in the lottery period. A game is played while expecting to be the result of awarding.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein a plurality of types of the lottery trigger information are set with different degrees of advantage of the player when the predetermined lottery process is triggered.

According to the characteristic A12, the player can play the game while expecting that the lottery opportunity information having a higher degree of advantage will be stored in the information storage means, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Becomes

Features A13. Promotion execution means for promoting the type of the lottery opportunity information stored in the information storage means to a type advantageous to the player when the promotion condition is satisfied (function of executing the process of step S2206 in the main MPU 82) ) The gaming machine according to Feature A12.

According to the characteristic A13, when the promotion condition is satisfied, the type of the lottery opportunity information is promoted to the type advantageous to the player, so the player expects that the promotion condition is also satisfied. As the game is played, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A14. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the promotion executing means determines at least one of presence or absence of the promotion and contents of the promotion in a mode corresponding to a result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

According to the characteristic A14, at least one of the presence/absence of promotion and the content of promotion is determined in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Therefore, not only the promotion condition is satisfied during the promotion period but also the lottery of the winning combination. It is possible to focus the player on the result of the processing.

Feature A15. When a plurality of the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means, the promotion executing means determines at least one of the presence or absence of the promotion and the content of the promotion for one piece of the lottery opportunity information for one game. The game machine according to feature A13 or A14, which is characterized by determining.

According to the characteristic A15, at least one of the presence/absence of promotion and the content of the promotion is determined for one lottery trigger information for one game during the promotion period, and therefore, the situation in which the promotion support process is executed is clarified. It becomes possible to make the player pay attention to each execution time of the process corresponding to promotion.

Feature A16. When the predetermined condition is satisfied and the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means, the lottery opportunity generation means causes the information storage means to store the type of lottery opportunity information having the lowest player's advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A15.

According to the characteristic A16, when the type of lottery opportunity information is promoted because the type of lottery opportunity information with the lowest player's advantage at the stage of being stored in the information storage means is stored in the information storage means. It is possible to increase the advantage of.

Features A17. When the lottery opportunity does not occur during the possible opportunity period, the special transition means (step in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to the special period (second transition challenge state ST4) in which the degree of expectation of grant of the privilege is different from the lottery period The game machine according to any one of the features A1 to A16, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of S1715).

According to feature A17, even if the lottery opportunity does not occur during the opportunity period, the special period is entered, so that even if the lottery opportunity does not occur in the situation when the end of the opportunity period is approaching, the player It will be possible to sustain expectations. Further, since the degree of expectation of award is different in the special period from the lottery period, it is possible to prevent the significance of generating the lottery opportunity in the opportunity period from being lost.

Feature A18. In the special period, when the number of occurrences of the lottery trigger is less than or equal to a predetermined number, the degree of expectation of grant of the privilege is higher than the lottery period, and the number of occurrences of the lottery trigger is more than the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to Feature A17, wherein the degree of expectation of grant of the privilege is lower than that in the lottery period.

According to the characteristic A18, the player expects that the lottery opportunity will not occur than the predetermined number of times of the lottery opportunity during the opportunity period, and the number of occurrences of the lottery opportunity during the opportunity period becomes a predetermined number. If so, the player expects that a lottery opportunity will be further generated. As a result, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the lottery opportunity changes during the opportunity period, depending on the number of times the lottery opportunity occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the uniformization of the game and improve the interest of the game.

Features A19. A specific lottery executing means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to grant the privilege in the special period (a function of executing the process of step S2403 in the main MPU 82);
The number of times the specific lottery process is executed in the special period is different from the number of times the predetermined lottery process is executed in the lottery period,
Characteristic A17 characterized in that the awarding probability of the privilege when the specific lottery process is executed once and the awarding probability of the privilege when the predetermined lottery process is executed once are different. The gaming machine described in A18.

According to the feature A19, the number of times the lottery process is performed to generate the privilege and the probability of granting the privilege in the lottery process are different between the lottery period and the special period. This makes it possible to clarify the difference between the lottery period and the special period.

Feature A20. The number of times the specific lottery process is executed in the special period is a number larger than the maximum number of times the predetermined lottery process is executed in the lottery period,
A feature A19 characterized in that the probability of granting the privilege when the specific lottery process is executed once is lower than the probability of granting the privilege when the predetermined lottery process is executed once. Machine.

According to the characteristic A20, the number of times of the lottery process for generating the grant of the privilege is greater than that of the lottery period during the special period, while the probability of grant of the privilege in one lottery process is longer than that of the special period. Is higher. As a result, it is possible to generate many situations in which attention is paid to whether or not a privilege is given during the special period, while it is possible to increase expectations for one lottery process during the lottery period. Becomes Therefore, the difference between the lottery period and the special period can be made clear.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to any one of features A17 to A20, wherein a specific lottery process for determining whether to grant the privilege is executed in each game in the special period.

According to the characteristic A21, it is possible to expect that a privilege will be given in each game during the special period.

Feature A22. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
In each game of the special period, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a specific result, the degree of expectation of granting the privilege is high, and the gaming machine according to feature A21.

According to the characteristic A22, since the degree of expectation of award increases according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the player pays attention not only to the result of the specific lottery process but also to the result of the winning lottery process during the special period. It becomes possible.

Feature A23. When the result of the specific lottery process in the special period is a result that does not correspond to the grant of the privilege and the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result, it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege. The gaming machine according to Feature A22, which is provided with a unit (a function of performing the process of step S2408 in the main MPU 82) for performing the lottery process again.

According to the characteristic A23, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result, the lottery process for determining whether to grant the privilege is executed a plurality of times. As a result, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination becomes the specific result during the special period, the degree of expectation of award is high. Therefore, during the special period, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the result of the lottery process of the specific lottery process but also to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Further, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result, a lottery process different from the specific lottery process is additionally executed with respect to the award of the privilege, so that the process configuration of the specific lottery process is complicated. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects without performing the above.

Feature A24. When the lottery opportunity occurs more than a special number of times defined as a plurality in the opportunity period, it is provided with a profit giving means (a function of executing the process of step S1806 in the main MPU 82) for giving a profit to the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A23.

According to the characteristic A24, when the lottery trigger has occurred a special number of times or more in the triggerable period, a profit different from the profit that the number of times the predetermined lottery process is executed is increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the advantage of generating a lottery opportunity more than a special number in the opportunity period. Therefore, the player's attention to the generation of the lottery opportunity during the opportunity period can be increased, and the interest of the game during the opportunity period can be improved.

Feature A25. A feature A24 characterized in that the profit giving means shifts to the lottery period even in a situation where the predetermined number of games has not been exhausted, when the lottery trigger has occurred the special number of times or more in the triggerable period. Gaming machine described in.

According to feature A25, when the number of lottery triggers exceeds the special number in the triggerable period, the lottery period occurs even if the predetermined number of games has not been exhausted. Therefore, the number of games required to shift to the lottery period can be set. It is possible to shorten it. As a result, when a lot of lottery triggers are generated, not only the advantage that the number of times the predetermined lottery process is executed becomes large, but also the advantage that the lottery period is started early is given, and the lottery is possible in the triggerable period It is possible to increase the player's attention to the generation of the opportunity.

Feature A26. The lottery opportunity generating means stores lottery opportunity information (lottery group information) in the information storage means (information storage area 111) when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A plurality of the lottery trigger information may be stored in the information storage means in one triggerable period,
The predetermined lottery execution means, when a plurality of the lottery trigger information is stored in the information storage means in the lottery period, individually executes the predetermined lottery process for the lottery trigger information,
The lottery opportunity information is set in a plurality of types with different degrees of advantage of the player when the execution of the predetermined lottery process is triggered,
The profit giving means is
When the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means in a number greater than or equal to a special number during the possible opportunity period, an upgrade transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1806 in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to the promotion period,
In the promotion period, the promotion execution means for promoting the type of the lottery opportunity information stored in the information storage means to the type advantageous to the player when the promotion condition is satisfied (in step S2206 in the main MPU 82). Function to execute processing),
The gaming machine according to the feature A24 or A25, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic A26, when the special lot number or more of the lottery opportunity information is stored in the opportunity period, there is an promotion period in which the type of lottery opportunity information can be promoted to a type advantageous to the player. As a result, when a lot of lottery triggers are generated, not only the benefit that the number of times the predetermined lottery process is executed increases, but also the benefit that the promotion period is started is given. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the generation.

Feature A27. When all of the lottery opportunity information stored in the information storage means during the promotion period is a target for determining whether or not to be promoted, means for shifting to the lottery period (executes the process of step S2306 in the main MPU 82). A gaming machine according to Feature A26, which is provided with a function of:

According to the characteristic A27, when the promotion period ends, the lottery period is entered, so that the predetermined lottery process is executed early for the lottery opportunity information that is the target of promotion during the promotion period. It becomes possible to do.

Feature A28. When the transition to the promotion period occurs, the transition to the lottery period may occur before the number of games exhausted after the transition to the triggerable period occurs to reach the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine described in Feature A27.

According to the characteristic A28, when the special number or more of the lottery trigger information is stored in the triggerable period, not only the promotion period occurs, but also the number of games required to shift to the lottery period can be shortened. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage that the lottery trigger information is stored in the special number or more during the triggerable period.

Feature A29. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The promotion execution means determines at least one of the presence or absence of the promotion and the content of the promotion in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Amusement machine.

According to the feature A29, at least one of the presence/absence of promotion and the content of promotion is determined in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination. Therefore, not only the promotion condition is satisfied during the promotion period but also the winning combination of the winning combination is performed. It is possible to focus the player on the result of the processing.

Feature A30. When a plurality of the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means, the promotion executing means determines at least one of the presence or absence of the promotion and the content of the promotion for one piece of the lottery opportunity information for one game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A26 to A29 characterized by being determined.

According to the characteristic A30, at least one of the presence/absence of promotion and the content of the promotion is determined for one lottery trigger information for one game in the promotion period, and therefore, the situation in which the process corresponding to the promotion is executed is clarified. It becomes possible to make the player pay attention to each execution time of the process corresponding to promotion.

Feature A31. When the predetermined condition is satisfied and the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means, the lottery opportunity generation means causes the information storage means to store the type of lottery opportunity information having the lowest player's advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A26 to A30.

According to the characteristic A31, the type of lottery opportunity information is promoted because the type of lottery opportunity information having the lowest player's advantage at the time of being stored in the information storage means is stored in the information storage means. It is possible to increase the advantage of.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features A1 to A31, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A lottery opportunity generating means that causes a lottery opportunity (addition of the value of the opportunity point counter 84b) when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the opportunity period (acquisition challenge state ST1) (acquisition wins in the opportunity point lottery process). (Function of executing the processing of steps S1410 and S1803 in the main MPU 82),
Lottery period shifting means (function of executing the process of step S1712 in the main MPU 82) for shifting to the lottery period (first shift challenge state ST2) when the shift condition is satisfied in the triggerable period.
Predetermined lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery process in the lottery period in the mode corresponding to the number of the lottery triggers generated by the lottery trigger generation means by the start of the lottery period (predetermined lottery execution unit in the main MPU 82). Function to execute processing),
A privilege granting unit (a function of executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the lottery of the predetermined lottery process being the privilege granting result,
When the lottery opportunity does not occur in the opportunity period, the special transition means (step in the main MPU 82) for shifting to the special period (second transition challenge state ST4) in which the degree of expectation of grant of the privilege is different from the lottery period Function for executing the processing of S1715),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the lottery period occurs when the transition condition is satisfied in the triggerable period, and the predetermined lottery process is executed in a manner corresponding to the number of lottery triggers generated in the triggerable period in the lottery period. .. Then, the bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the bonus grant result. As a result, the game can be played while expecting a lottery opportunity to occur during the possible opportunity period, and the game can be performed while expecting that the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process will be the benefit grant result during the lottery period. Become. Therefore, the target that the player pays attention to in each period is different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the uniformization of the game.

In addition, even if the lottery opportunity does not occur during the possible opportunity period, the special period is entered, so the player's expectation is maintained even if the lottery opportunity does not occur in the situation where the possible opportunity period is approaching It becomes possible. Further, since the degree of expectation of award is different in the special period from the lottery period, it is possible to prevent the significance of generating the lottery opportunity in the opportunity period from being lost.

The predetermined lottery execution means may be configured to execute the predetermined lottery processing for the number of the lottery triggers generated by the lottery trigger generation means before the start of the lottery period in the lottery period.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the lottery period transition means transitions to the lottery period as the establishment of the transition condition when a predetermined number of games are exhausted during the triggerable period.

According to the feature B2, since the predetermined number of games are exhausted in the triggerable period to shift to the lottery period, the chance to shift to the lottery period becomes clear, and the understanding of the game content is facilitated. It is possible to plan.

Feature B3. In the special period, when the number of occurrences of the lottery trigger is less than or equal to a predetermined number, the degree of expectation of grant of the privilege is higher than the lottery period, and the number of occurrences of the lottery trigger is more than the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the degree of expectation of granting the privilege is lower than that in the lottery period.

According to the feature B3, the player expects that the lottery opportunity will not occur than the predetermined number of times of the lottery opportunity during the opportunity period, and the number of occurrences of the lottery opportunity within the opportunity period becomes the predetermined number of times. If so, the player expects that a lottery opportunity will be further generated. As a result, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the lottery opportunity changes during the opportunity period, depending on the number of times the lottery opportunity occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the uniformization of the game and improve the interest of the game.

Feature B4. A specific lottery executing means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to grant the privilege in the special period (a function of executing the process of step S2403 in the main MPU 82);
The number of times the specific lottery process is executed in the special period is different from the number of times the predetermined lottery process is executed in the lottery period,
Features B1 to B1, characterized in that the privilege granting probability when the specific lottery process is executed once is different from the privilege granting probability when the predetermined lottery process is executed once. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the feature B4, the number of times the lottery process is performed to generate the privilege and the probability of granting the privilege in the lottery process are different between the lottery period and the special period. This makes it possible to clarify the difference between the lottery period and the special period.

Feature B5. The number of times the specific lottery process is executed in the special period is a number larger than the maximum number of times the predetermined lottery process is executed in the lottery period,
A game according to feature B4, wherein a probability of granting the privilege when the specific lottery process is executed once is lower than a probability of granting the privilege when the predetermined lottery process is executed once. Machine.

According to the feature B5, the number of times of the lottery process for generating the grant of the privilege is greater than that of the lottery period during the special period, while the probability of grant of the privilege in one lottery process is longer than that of the special period. Is higher. As a result, it is possible to generate many situations in which attention is paid to whether or not a privilege is given during the special period, while it is possible to increase expectations for one lottery process during the lottery period. Becomes Therefore, the difference between the lottery period and the special period can be made clear.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein a specific lottery process for determining whether to grant the privilege is executed in each game in the special period.

According to the feature B6, it is possible to expect that a privilege will be given in each game during the special period.

Feature B7. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
In each game of the special period, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a specific result, the degree of expectation of grant of the privilege is high, and the gaming machine according to feature B6.

According to feature B7, the degree of expectation of award increases according to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination, so that the player pays attention not only to the result of the specific lottery processing but also to the result of the winning combination of the winning combination during the special period. It becomes possible.

Feature B8. When the result of the specific lottery process in the special period is a result that does not correspond to the grant of the privilege and the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result, it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, which is provided with a unit (a function of performing the process of step S2408 in the main MPU 82) for performing the lottery process again.

According to the feature B8, when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is the specific result, the lottery process for determining whether or not to grant the privilege is executed a plurality of times. As a result, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination becomes the specific result during the special period, the degree of expectation of award is high. Therefore, during the special period, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the result of the lottery process of the specific lottery process but also to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Further, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result, a lottery process different from the specific lottery process is additionally executed with respect to the award of the privilege, so that the process configuration of the specific lottery process is complicated. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects without performing the above.

Feature B9. Features B1 to B8 characterized in that, in the possible trigger period, there are a high probability state in which the lottery opportunity is relatively likely to occur and a low probability state in which the lottery opportunity is relatively unlikely to occur. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature B9, the ease of occurrence of the lottery trigger varies during the triggerable period, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the triggerable period.

Feature B10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein the predetermined lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery process in a mode corresponding to a result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

According to the characteristic B10, the predetermined lottery process is executed in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, so that not only the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process but also the result of the lottery process of the winning combination can be selected in the lottery period. It is possible to draw attention.

Feature B11. The predetermined lottery execution means, when the lottery trigger generation means generates a plurality of the lottery triggers before the start of the lottery period, performs the predetermined lottery process corresponding to one lottery trigger for one game. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10 characterized by being executed.

According to the feature B11, the predetermined lottery process corresponding to one lottery opportunity is executed for one game during the lottery period, so that it is possible to clarify the situation in which one predetermined lottery process is executed. Thus, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to each execution of the predetermined lottery process.

Feature B12. When the lottery period is started in a situation where the condition for granting the privilege is established, a means for allowing the privilege to be granted when the first lottery opportunity is exhausted in the lottery period (main) The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, which is provided with a function of making a positive determination in step S2003 in the side MPU 82.

According to the feature B12, the lottery period is started and the lottery opportunity is exhausted even when the condition for granting the privilege is satisfied. It is possible to give the player the impression that the privilege is granted by digesting. In addition, if the lottery period is started in a situation where the conditions for granting the privilege are satisfied, the privilege is granted when the first lottery opportunity is exhausted, so the condition for granting the privilege is satisfied. However, it is possible to prevent the lottery period from continuing for a long time.

Feature B13. The privilege granting means, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process is the privilege grant result, shifts to an advantageous game state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player as the grant of the privilege.
The predetermined lottery execution means, in a situation where the lottery trigger that has not become the execution trigger of the predetermined lottery process remains, the result of the predetermined lottery process executed by a lottery trigger different from the lottery trigger In the case of a bonus grant result, any one of the features B1 to B12 characterized in that the predetermined lottery process is executed with respect to the lottery trigger that has not become the execution trigger of the predetermined lottery process after the end of the advantageous game state. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B13, when the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in the situation where the lottery opportunity remains, the predetermined lottery process is executed for the remaining lottery opportunity after the end of the advantageous game state, so the lottery period occurs. In this case, it is more advantageous for the player that the transition to the advantageous game state occurs with the lottery opportunity left. As a result, the player expects that the transition to the advantageous game state will occur early in the lottery period, so that it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the lottery period.

Feature B14. A means for allowing the privilege to be granted when the triggerable period is executed a predetermined number of times without the privilege being granted (the function of the main MPU 82 that makes an affirmative determination in step S2003 and the main MPU 82). The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B13, which is provided with a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2401.

According to the characteristic B14, since the privilege is granted when the triggerable period is executed a predetermined number of times without the granting of the privilege, it is possible to perform relief when the triggerable period is repeated. ..

Feature B15. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B14, wherein the lottery opportunity generating means determines whether or not the lottery opportunity is generated in a manner corresponding to a result of the lottery processing of the winning combination.

According to Feature B15, whether or not a lottery trigger has occurred is determined in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination. Therefore, not only the presence or absence of a lottery trigger in the triggerable period but also the result of the lottery processing for the winning combination is determined. Also makes it possible to draw attention to the player.

Feature B16. The lottery opportunity generating means stores lottery opportunity information (lottery group information) in the information storage means (information storage area 111) when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A plurality of the lottery trigger information may be stored in the information storage means in one triggerable period,
The predetermined lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery processing individually for the lottery trigger information when a plurality of the lottery trigger information is stored in the information storage means in the lottery period. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B15.

According to the feature B16, the game is played while expecting that the lottery opportunity information is acquired in the opportunity period, and the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process executed individually for the lottery opportunity information is obtained in the lottery period. A game is played while expecting to be the result of awarding.

Feature B17. The gaming machine according to feature B16, wherein the lottery opportunity information is set in a plurality of types with different degrees of advantage of the player when the predetermined lottery processing is triggered.

According to the characteristic B17, the player can play the game while expecting that the lottery opportunity information having a higher degree of advantage will be stored in the information storage means, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Becomes

Feature B18. Promotion execution means for promoting the type of the lottery opportunity information stored in the information storage means to a type advantageous to the player when an promotion condition is satisfied (function of executing step S2206 in the main MPU 82) ) The gaming machine according to Feature B17.

According to the characteristic B18, when the promotion condition is satisfied, the type of the lottery opportunity information is promoted to the type that is advantageous to the player, so the player expects that the promotion condition is also satisfied. As the game is played, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B19. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to Feature B18, wherein the promotion executing means determines at least one of presence or absence of the promotion and contents of the promotion in a mode corresponding to a result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

According to Feature B19, at least one of the presence/absence of promotion and the content of promotion is determined in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Therefore, not only the promotion condition is satisfied during the promotion period but also the winning combination of the winning combination is performed. It is possible to focus the player on the result of the processing.

Feature B20. When a plurality of the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means, the promotion executing means determines at least one of the presence or absence of the promotion and the content of the promotion for one piece of the lottery opportunity information for one game. The gaming machine according to feature B17 or B19, which is characterized by determining.

According to the characteristic B20, at least one of the presence/absence of promotion and the content of the promotion is determined for one lottery trigger information for one game in the promotion period, so the situation in which the process corresponding to the promotion is executed is clarified. It becomes possible to make the player pay attention to each execution time of the process corresponding to promotion.

Feature B21. When the predetermined condition is satisfied and the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means, the lottery opportunity generation means causes the information storage means to store the type of lottery opportunity information having the lowest player's advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B18 to B20.

According to the characteristic B21, when the information storage means stores the lottery opportunity information of the type having the lowest player's advantage in the information storage means, the type of the lottery opportunity information is promoted. It is possible to increase the advantage of.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features B1 to B21, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A lottery opportunity generating means that causes a lottery opportunity (addition of the value of the opportunity point counter 84b) when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the opportunity period (acquisition challenge state ST1) (acquisition wins in the opportunity point lottery process). (Function of executing the processing of steps S1410 and S1803 in the main MPU 82),
Lottery period shifting means (function of executing the process of step S1712 in the main MPU 82) for shifting to the lottery period (first shift challenge state ST2) when the shift condition is satisfied in the triggerable period.
Predetermined lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery process in the lottery period in the mode corresponding to the number of the lottery triggers generated by the lottery trigger generation means by the start of the lottery period (predetermined lottery execution unit in the main MPU 82). Function to execute processing),
A privilege granting unit (a function of executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the lottery of the predetermined lottery process being the privilege granting result,
A profit giving unit (a function for executing the process of step S1806 in the main MPU 82) which gives a profit to the player when the lottery opportunity occurs more than a special number of times defined as a plurality in the opportunity period.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic C1, the lottery period occurs when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in the triggerable period, and the predetermined lottery process is executed in a mode corresponding to the number of lottery triggers generated in the triggerable period in the lottery period. To be done. Then, the bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the bonus grant result. As a result, the game can be played while expecting a lottery opportunity to occur during the possible opportunity period, and the game can be performed while expecting that the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process will be the benefit grant result during the lottery period. Become. Therefore, the target that the player pays attention to in each period is different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the uniformization of the game.

Further, when the lottery trigger occurs a special number of times or more in the triggerable period, a profit different from the profit that the predetermined lottery process is executed in a mode corresponding to the lottery trigger is given. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the advantage of generating a lottery opportunity more than a special number in the opportunity period. Therefore, the player's attention to the generation of the lottery opportunity during the opportunity period can be increased, and the interest of the game during the opportunity period can be improved.

The predetermined lottery execution means may be configured to execute the predetermined lottery processing for the number of the lottery triggers generated by the lottery trigger generation means before the start of the lottery period in the lottery period.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the lottery period transition means transitions to the lottery period as the establishment of the transition condition when a predetermined number of games are exhausted during the triggerable period.

According to the characteristic C2, since the predetermined number of games are exhausted in the triggerable period to shift to the lottery period, the trigger for shifting to the lottery period becomes clear, and the understanding of the game content is facilitated. It is possible to plan.

Feature C3. Characteristic C2, wherein the profit-giving means shifts to the lottery period even if the predetermined number of games has not been exhausted when the lottery trigger has occurred at least the special number in the triggerable period. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic C3, when the lottery trigger occurs more than the special number in the triggerable period, the lottery period occurs even if the predetermined number of games has not been exhausted. Therefore, the number of games required to shift to the lottery period is set. It is possible to shorten it. As a result, when a lot of lottery triggers are generated, not only the advantage that the predetermined lottery process according to the corresponding mode is executed, but also the advantage that the lottery period is started early is given, and it is possible to trigger. It is possible to raise the player's attention to the generation of the lottery opportunity during the period.

Feature C4. The lottery opportunity generating means stores lottery opportunity information (lottery group information) in the information storage means (information storage area 111) when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A plurality of the lottery trigger information may be stored in the information storage means in one triggerable period,
The predetermined lottery execution means, when a plurality of the lottery trigger information is stored in the information storage means in the lottery period, individually executes the predetermined lottery process for the lottery trigger information,
The lottery opportunity information is set in a plurality of types with different degrees of advantage of the player when the execution of the predetermined lottery process is triggered,
The profit giving means is
When the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means in a number greater than or equal to a special number during the possible opportunity period, an upgrade transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1806 in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to the promotion period,
In the promotion period, the promotion execution means for promoting the type of the lottery opportunity information stored in the information storage means to the type advantageous to the player when the promotion condition is satisfied (in step S2206 in the main MPU 82). Function to execute processing),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic C4, when the special lot number or more of the lottery opportunity information is stored in the opportunity period, a promotion period occurs in which the type of the lottery opportunity information can be promoted to a type advantageous to the player. As a result, when a lot of lottery triggers are generated, not only the benefit that the predetermined lottery process according to the corresponding mode is executed, but also the benefit that the promotion period is started is given. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the generation of the lottery opportunity.

Feature C5. When all of the lottery opportunity information stored in the information storage means during the promotion period is a target for determining whether or not to be promoted, means for shifting to the lottery period (executes the process of step S2306 in the main MPU 82). The gaming machine according to feature C4, which is characterized by having the function of

According to the feature C5, when the promotion period ends, the lottery period is entered, so that the predetermined lottery process is executed early on the lottery opportunity information targeted for promotion during the promotion period. It becomes possible to do.

Feature C6. The lottery period shift means shifts to the lottery period as establishment of the shift condition when a predetermined number of games are exhausted in the triggerable period,
When the transition to the promotion period occurs, the transition to the lottery period may occur before the number of games exhausted after the transition to the triggerable period occurs to reach the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine described in Feature C5.

According to the characteristic C6, when the special number or more of the lottery trigger information is stored in the triggerable period, not only the promotion period occurs but also the number of games required for shifting to the lottery period can be shortened. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage that the lottery trigger information is stored in the special number or more during the triggerable period.

Feature C7. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The promotion execution means determines at least one of the presence or absence of the promotion and the content of the promotion in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic C7, at least one of the presence or absence of promotion and the content of promotion is determined in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Therefore, not only the promotion condition is satisfied during the promotion period but also the winning combination of the winning combination is performed. It is possible to focus the player on the result of the processing.

Feature C8. When a plurality of the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means, the promotion executing means determines at least one of the presence or absence of the promotion and the content of the promotion for one piece of the lottery opportunity information for one game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7 characterized by being determined.

According to the characteristic C8, at least one of the presence/absence of promotion and the content of the promotion is determined for one lottery trigger information for one game during the promotion period, and therefore, the situation in which the process corresponding to the promotion is executed is clarified. It becomes possible to make the player pay attention to each execution time of the process corresponding to promotion.

Feature C9. When the predetermined condition is satisfied and the lottery opportunity information is stored in the information storage means, the lottery opportunity generation means causes the information storage means to store the type of lottery opportunity information having the lowest player's advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

According to the characteristic C9, when the type of lottery opportunity information is promoted because the type of lottery opportunity information with the lowest player's advantage at the time of being stored in the information storage means is stored in the information storage means. It is possible to increase the advantage of.

Feature C10. Features C1 to C9 characterized in that, in the possible trigger period, there are a high probability state in which the lottery opportunity is relatively likely to occur and a low probability state in which the lottery opportunity is relatively unlikely to occur. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic C10, the likelihood of occurrence of the lottery opportunity varies during the opportunity period, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opportunity period.

Feature C11. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the predetermined lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery process in a mode corresponding to a result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

According to the characteristic C11, the predetermined lottery process is executed in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, so that not only the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process but also the result of the lottery process of the winning combination can be selected as a player in the lottery period. It is possible to draw attention.

Feature C12. The predetermined lottery execution means, when the lottery trigger generation means generates a plurality of the lottery triggers before the start of the lottery period, performs the predetermined lottery process corresponding to one lottery trigger for one game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C11 characterized by being executed.

According to the characteristic C12, the predetermined lottery process corresponding to one lottery trigger is executed for one game in the lottery period, so that it is possible to clarify the situation in which one predetermined lottery process is executed. Thus, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to each execution of the predetermined lottery process.

Feature C13. When the lottery period is started in a situation where the condition for granting the privilege is established, a means for allowing the privilege to be granted when the first lottery opportunity is exhausted in the lottery period (main) The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C12, which is provided with a function of making a positive determination in step S2003 in the side MPU 82.

According to the characteristic C13, the lottery period is started and the lottery trigger is exhausted so that the privilege is given even if the condition for granting the privilege is satisfied, whereby the lottery trigger is generated in the lottery period. It is possible to give the player the impression that the privilege is granted by digesting. In addition, if the lottery period is started in a situation where the conditions for granting the privilege are satisfied, the privilege is granted when the first lottery opportunity is exhausted, so the condition for granting the privilege is satisfied. However, it is possible to prevent the lottery period from continuing for a long time.

Feature C14. The privilege granting means, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process is the privilege grant result, shifts to an advantageous game state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player as the grant of the privilege.
The predetermined lottery execution means, in a situation where the lottery trigger that has not become the execution trigger of the predetermined lottery process remains, the result of the predetermined lottery process executed by a lottery trigger different from the lottery trigger In the case of a privilege grant result, the predetermined lottery process is executed for the lottery trigger that has not become the execution trigger of the predetermined lottery process after the end of the advantageous game state, any one of features C1 to C13 Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic C14, when the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the situation where the lottery opportunity remains, the predetermined lottery process is executed for the remaining lottery opportunity after the end of the advantageous game state, so the lottery period occurs. In this case, it is more advantageous for the player that the transition to the advantageous game state occurs with the lottery opportunity left. As a result, the player expects that the transition to the advantageous game state will occur early in the lottery period, so that it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the lottery period.

Feature C15. Means for allowing the privilege to be granted when the triggerable period is executed a predetermined number of times without the privilege being granted (the function of the main MPU 82 that makes an affirmative determination in step S2003 and the main MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C14, which is provided with a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2401.

According to the feature C15, since the privilege is granted when the triggerable period is executed a predetermined number of times without the granting of the privilege, it is possible to perform the relief when the triggerable period is repeated. ..

Feature C16. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C15, wherein the lottery opportunity generating means determines whether or not the lottery opportunity is generated in a manner corresponding to a result of the lottery processing of the winning combination.

According to Feature C16, whether or not a lottery trigger has occurred is determined in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination. Therefore, not only the presence or absence of a lottery trigger in the triggerable period but also the result of the lottery processing for the winning combination. Also makes it possible to draw attention to the player.

Feature C17. The lottery opportunity generating means stores lottery opportunity information (lottery group information) in the information storage means (information storage area 111) when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A plurality of the lottery trigger information may be stored in the information storage means in one triggerable period,
The predetermined lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery processing individually for the lottery trigger information when a plurality of the lottery trigger information is stored in the information storage means in the lottery period. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C16.

According to the characteristic C17, the game is played in the expectation that the lottery opportunity information will be acquired in the opportunity period, and the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process executed individually for the lottery opportunity information is obtained in the lottery period. A game is played while expecting to be the result of awarding.

Feature C18. The gaming machine according to Feature C17, wherein a plurality of types of the lottery trigger information are set with different degrees of advantage of the player when the predetermined lottery process is triggered.

According to the characteristic C18, the player plays the game while expecting that the lottery opportunity information having a higher degree of advantage will be stored in the information storage means, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Becomes

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features C1 to C18, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Predetermined privilege granting means (main MPU 82) that executes a process for granting a predetermined privilege to the player based on the occurrence of a specific trigger (operation of the first credit insertion button 47) in the specific game state (addition execution state). Function for executing the processing of steps S3009 and S3010 in step S3010),
When the specific trigger occurs, the continuous lottery process is performed at a specific continuation rate, and when the continuous winning result is obtained, the continuation determining means (the process of steps S3012 to S3014 in the main MPU 82 is executed is continued. Function),
Before the specific game state is started, a variable state in which profit corresponding numerical information that is at least one of the predetermined privilege and the specific continuation rate can be changed from initial numerical information (continuous rate promotion state) State setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 82) set to
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, in the specific game state, a predetermined privilege is given to the player each time a specific opportunity occurs, so the player expects the specific game state to continue for a long time. In this case, a variable state in which the profit corresponding numerical information in the specific gaming state can be changed from the initial numerical information occurs before the specific gaming state is started. In the case of the variable state, the player expects the profit corresponding numerical value information in the specific game state thereafter to be advantageous information. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein in the variable state, the profit corresponding numerical value information can be higher than before, but not lower than before.

According to the characteristic D2, since the profit corresponding numerical value information in the variable state can be higher than that in the variable state, it is possible to increase the player's expectation in the variable state.

Feature D3. When the change condition is satisfied based on the player's operation in the variable state (continuation rate promotion lottery processing results in continuation rate promotion win), changing means for changing the profit corresponding numerical value information (step in the main MPU 82) The game machine described in the feature D1 or D2, which is provided with a function of executing the process of S2909.

According to the characteristic D3, the player performs the operation while expecting the change condition to be satisfied in the variable state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D4. The variable state is a state that continues for the maximum number of games,
The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the change condition can be satisfied in each of the games in the variable state.

According to the characteristic D4, it is possible to make the player expect the profit corresponding numerical value information to increase in each game in the variable state.

Feature D5. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein the change condition is satisfied based on a result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

According to the characteristic D5, since the profit corresponding numerical information increases based on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, in the variable state, not only the presence or absence of the change condition is satisfied, but also the result of the lottery process of the winning combination indicates the player. It is possible to draw attention.

Feature D6. When the variable state is started, the information corresponding to the profit corresponding numerical information lower than the initial numerical information is notified as notification target information, and then the notification target information is changed to the actual profit corresponding numerical information. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, which is provided with an informing unit (a function of executing the processes of step S3101 to step S3113 in the effect-side MPU 92) that is updated so as to approach the corresponding information. ..

According to the characteristic D6, even if the profit corresponding numerical information does not actually increase in the variable state, it is possible to perform an effect as if the profit corresponding numerical information has increased in the notification target information. Becomes This makes it possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction in the variable state. Further, since the profit corresponding numerical value information notified in the notification target information is lower than the initial numerical value information at the start of the variable state, the profit corresponding numerical value information notified in the notification target information is the actual profit corresponding numerical value. While not exceeding the information, it is possible to perform an effect as if the profit corresponding numerical information increased.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to Feature D6, wherein the notification unit causes the notification target information to correspond to the actual profit corresponding numerical value information until the variable state ends.

According to the feature D7, even if the notification target information does not correspond to the actual profit corresponding numerical value information when the variable state is started, the notification target information is dealt with until the variable state ends. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the actual profit-corresponding numerical value information before the variable state ends.

Feature D8. The variable state is a state that continues over the upper limit number of games defined as a plurality of games,
A feature D6 characterized in that the notification means updates the notification target information so as to fill the difference between the profit corresponding numerical value information corresponding to the notification target information and the actual profit corresponding numerical value information over a plurality of games. Or the game machine described in D7.

According to the characteristic D8, since the notification target information is updated over a plurality of games, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the effect using the update of the notification target information.

Feature D9. When the change condition is satisfied based on the player's operation in the variable state (continuation rate promotion lottery processing results in continuation rate promotion win), changing means for changing the profit corresponding numerical value information (step in the main MPU 82) Function for executing the processing of S2909),
When the numerical value information changing unit changes the profit-corresponding numerical value information, the notification unit updates the notification target information so as to approach the changed profit-corresponding numerical value information. The gaming machine described in any one of D8.

According to the characteristic D9, when the actual profit corresponding numerical value information is changed, the notification target information is updated so as to be closer to the changed profit corresponding numerical value information. Therefore, the notification target information is the actual profit corresponding numerical value information. It is possible to prevent a large deviation from the above.

Feature D10. The notification means, the condition that the profit corresponding numerical value information corresponding to the notification target information and the actual profit corresponding numerical value information do not match, to bring the notification target information close to the actual profit corresponding numerical value information The gaming machine according to any one of features D6 to D9, which is updated to

According to the characteristic D10, when the profit corresponding numerical value information corresponding to the notification target information and the actual profit corresponding numerical value information do not match, the notification target information is updated so as to approach the actual profit corresponding numerical value information. In the variable state, the notification target information can be updated so as to match the actual profit corresponding numerical information.

Feature D11. The notifying means is
Means for executing an update lottery process when the profit corresponding numerical value information corresponding to the notification target information and the actual profit corresponding numerical value information do not match (function of executing the process of step S3110 in the production side MPU 92),
A means for updating the notification target information so as to be closer to the actual profit corresponding numerical value information when the update is selected in the update lottery process (a function of executing the processes of step S3112 and step S3113 in the production side MPU 92). ,
A gaming machine according to feature D10, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic D11, it is possible to update the notification target information irregularly so as to approach the actual profit corresponding numerical value information. Further, the update lottery process is executed on condition that the notification target information does not match the actual profit corresponding numerical value information, and the update of the notification target information is performed so as to approach the actual profit corresponding numerical value information. Even if the target information is updated irregularly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the notification target information eventually does not match the actual profit corresponding numerical value information.

Feature D12. The variable state is a state that continues over the upper limit number of games defined as a plurality of games,
In the variable state, the profit corresponding numerical information can be higher than before, but not lower than before.
When the notification target information is updated so as to approach the actual profit corresponding numerical value information, the update is performed so that only the unit numerical value increases per game.
In the situation where the notification means is a value obtained by integrating the number of remaining games in the variable state and the unit numerical value is equal to or less than the difference between the maximum value of the profit corresponding numerical value information and the value corresponding to the notification target information. In a situation where the profit corresponding numerical information corresponding to the notification target information does not match the actual profit corresponding numerical information, the notification is performed so that the value corresponding to the notification target information increases by the unit numerical value. The gaming machine according to any one of features D6 to D11, which is characterized by updating target information.

According to the characteristic D12, even when the profit corresponding numerical value information is the maximum value, only the unit numerical value is increased per game when the notification target information is updated, and the changeable state It is possible to match the notification target information with the actual profit corresponding numerical information within the range.

Feature D13. Predetermined privilege granting means (main MPU 82) that executes a process for granting a predetermined privilege to the player based on the occurrence of a specific trigger (operation of the first credit insertion button 47) in the specific game state (addition execution state). Function for executing the processing of steps S3009 and S3010 in step S3010),
When the specific trigger occurs, the continuous lottery process is performed at a specific continuation rate, and when the continuous winning result is obtained, the continuation determining means (the process of steps S3012 to S3014 in the main MPU 82 is executed is continued. Function),
Before the specific game state is started, the state setting means (step S2902 in the main MPU 82 and the main side MPU 82 and the setting of a variable state (continuous rate promotion state) capable of changing the specific continuous rate from the initial continuous rate A function of executing the processing of step S2903),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic D13, in the specific game state, a predetermined privilege is given to the player each time a specific opportunity occurs, so the player expects the specific game state to continue for a long time. In this case, a variable state in which the specific continuation rate of the continuous lottery process in the specific game state can be changed from the initial continuation rate occurs before the specific game state is started. When the variable state is reached, the player expects that the specific continuation rate in the specific game state thereafter becomes a higher continuation rate. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D14. The gaming machine according to Feature D13, wherein in the variable state, the specific continuation rate can be higher than before, but not lower than before.

According to the characteristic D14, since the specific continuation rate can be higher in the variable state than before, it is possible to increase the player's expectation in the variable state.

Feature D15. When the change condition is satisfied based on the operation of the player in the variable state (continuation rate promotion lottery process results in continuation rate promotion win), continuation rate changing means (in the main MPU 82) for changing the specific continuation rate. The gaming machine described in the feature D13 or D14, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2909).

According to the characteristic D15, the player performs the operation while expecting the change condition to be satisfied in the variable state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D16. The variable state is a state that continues for the maximum number of games,
The gaming machine according to Feature D15, wherein the change condition can be satisfied in each game in the variable state.

According to the characteristic D16, it is possible to make the player expect the specific continuation rate to increase in each of the fluctuable games.

Feature D17. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
Equipped with
One game is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to Feature D16, wherein the change condition is satisfied based on a result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

According to the feature D17, since the specific continuation rate increases based on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the player pays attention not only to whether or not the change condition is satisfied in the variable state, but also to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It becomes possible.

Feature D18. When the fluctuable state is started, the information corresponding to the specific continuation rate lower than the initial continuation rate is notified as the continuation rate information, and then the continuation rate information is actually the specific continuation rate. The gaming machine according to any one of features D13 to D17, which is provided with informing means (a function of executing the processing of step S3101 to step S3113 in the effect-side MPU 92) that updates so as to approach the corresponding information. ..

According to the feature D18, even if the specific continuation rate is not actually increased in the variable state, it is possible to perform an effect as if the specific continuation rate is increased in the continuation rate information. Become. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction in the variable state. Further, since the continuation rate reported in the continuation rate information is lower than the initial continuation rate at the start of the variable state, the continuation rate reported in the continuation rate information exceeds the actual specified continuation rate. It is possible to perform an effect as if the specific continuation rate had increased while preventing the occurrence of such a situation.

Feature D19. The gaming machine according to Feature D18, wherein the notification unit causes the information on the continuation rate to correspond to the information on the actual specific continuation rate by the time the variable state ends.

According to the feature D19, even if the information on the continuation rate does not correspond to the actual specific continuation rate when the variable state is started, the information is provided until the variable state ends. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the actual specific continuation rate before the specific game state is started.

Feature D20. The variable state is a state that continues over the upper limit number of games defined as a plurality of games,
A feature D18 characterized in that the notification means updates the continuation rate information so as to fill the difference between the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate information and the actual specific continuation rate over a plurality of games. The game machine described in D19.

According to the characteristic D20, since the continuation rate information is updated over a plurality of games, it is possible to increase the chances of performing an effect using the update of the continuation rate information.

Feature D21. When the change condition is satisfied based on the player's operation in the variable state (continuation rate promotion lottery process results in continuation rate promotion win), continuation rate changing means (in the main MPU 82) for changing the specific continuation rate. Function for executing the processing of step S2909),
When the specific continuation rate is changed by the continuation rate changing unit, the notification unit updates the continuation rate information so as to be closer to information corresponding to the changed specific continuation rate. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D18 to D20.

According to the feature D21, when the actual specific continuation rate is changed, the continuation rate information is updated so as to approach the changed specific continuation rate. Therefore, the continuation rate information becomes the actual specific continuation rate. It is possible to prevent it from being greatly displaced.

Feature D22. The notification means, on the condition that the continuation rate corresponding to the information of the continuation rate and the actual specific continuation rate do not match, the information of the continuation rate to the information corresponding to the actual specific continuation rate. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D18 to D21, which is updated so as to approach.

According to the characteristic D22, since the continuation rate information is updated so as to approach the actual specific continuation rate when the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate information does not match the actual specific continuation rate, the fluctuation In the possible state, it becomes possible to update the information on the continuation rate so as to match the actual specific continuation rate.

Feature D23. The notifying means is
A means for executing an update lottery process when the continuation rate corresponding to the information on the continuation rate does not match the actual specific continuation rate (a function for executing the process of step S3110 in the production side MPU 92),
A means for updating the information on the continuation rate to be closer to the information corresponding to the actual specific continuation rate when the update lottery process results in an update win (executes the processing of step S3112 and step S3113 in the production side MPU 92) Function),
A gaming machine described in Feature D22, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D23, it becomes possible to irregularly update the information on the continuation rate in order to approach the actual specific continuation rate. Also, the update lottery process is executed on condition that the continuation rate information does not match the actual specified continuation rate, and the update of the continuation rate information is performed so as to approach the actual specified continuation rate. Even if the rate information is irregularly updated, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the continuation rate information eventually does not match the actual specified continuation rate.

Feature D24. The variable state is a state that continues over the upper limit number of games defined as a plurality of games,
In the variable state, the specific continuation rate may be higher than before, but is not lower than that,
When the information of the continuation rate is updated so as to approach the information corresponding to the actual specific continuation rate, the update is performed so that only the unit numerical value increases per game.
In the situation where the notification means is a value obtained by integrating the remaining number of games in the variable state and the unit numerical value is equal to or less than a difference between the maximum value of the specific continuation rate and the value corresponding to the continuation rate information. In a situation where the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate information does not match the actual specific continuation rate, the continuation rate is increased so that the value corresponding to the continuation rate information increases by the unit numerical value. The game machine according to any one of the features D18 to D23, which is characterized by updating the information.

According to the feature D24, even when the specific continuation rate is the maximum value, only the unit numerical value is increased per game when the continuation rate information is updated, and the variable state It is possible to match the information on the continuation rate with the specific continuation rate within the range.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features D1 to D24, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. State setting means (steps S2902 and S2903 in the main side MPU 82) for setting the profit corresponding numerical information that determines the profit giving rate to a fluctuable state (continuous rate promotion state) that can be changed from the initial numerical information Function to execute)
When the fluctuable state is started, the information corresponding to the profit corresponding numerical information lower than the initial numerical information is notified as notification target information, and then the notification target information is changed to the actual profit corresponding numerical information. Informing means for updating so as to approach the corresponding information (function for executing the processing of steps S3101 to S3113 in the performance side MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, even if the profit corresponding numerical information does not actually increase in the variable state, it is possible to perform an effect as if the profit corresponding numerical information has increased in the notification target information. Becomes This makes it possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction in the variable state. Further, since the profit corresponding numerical value information notified in the notification target information is lower than the initial numerical value information at the start of the variable state, the profit corresponding numerical value information notified in the notification target information is the actual profit corresponding numerical value. While not exceeding the information, it is possible to perform an effect as if the profit corresponding numerical information increased.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the notifying unit causes the notification target information to correspond to the actual profit corresponding numerical value information until the variable state ends.

According to the characteristic E2, even if the notification target information does not correspond to the actual profit corresponding numerical value information when the variable state is started, the notification target information is dealt with until the variable state ends. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the actual profit-corresponding numerical value information before the variable state ends.

Feature E3. The variable state is a state that continues over the upper limit number of games defined as a plurality of games,
The notifying means updates the notification target information so as to fill the difference between the profit corresponding numerical value information corresponding to the notification target information and the actual profit corresponding numerical value information over a plurality of games. Alternatively, the gaming machine described in E2.

According to the characteristic E3, since the notification target information is updated over a plurality of games, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the effect using the update of the notification target information.

Feature E4. When the change condition is satisfied based on the player's operation in the variable state (continuous rate promotion lottery process results in continuous rate promotion win), numerical information changing means (main side MPU 82) for changing the profit corresponding numerical information. Function for executing the process of step S2909 in
When the numerical value information changing unit changes the profit-corresponding numerical value information, the notification unit updates the notification target information so as to approach the changed profit-corresponding numerical value information. The gaming machine according to any one of E3.

According to the characteristic E4, when the actual profit corresponding numerical value information is changed, the notification target information is updated so as to be closer to the changed profit corresponding numerical value information. Therefore, the notification target information is the actual profit corresponding numerical value information. It is possible to prevent a large deviation from the above.

Feature E5. The notification means, the condition that the profit corresponding numerical value information corresponding to the notification target information and the actual profit corresponding numerical value information do not match, to bring the notification target information close to the actual profit corresponding numerical value information The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4, which is updated to.

According to the characteristic E5, when the profit corresponding numerical value information corresponding to the notification target information and the actual profit corresponding numerical value information do not match, the notification target information is updated so as to approach the actual profit corresponding numerical value information. In the variable state, the notification target information can be updated so as to match the actual profit corresponding numerical information.

Feature E6. The notifying means is
Means for executing an update lottery process when the profit corresponding numerical value information corresponding to the notification target information and the actual profit corresponding numerical value information do not match (function of executing the process of step S3110 in the production side MPU 92),
A means for updating the notification target information so as to be closer to the actual profit corresponding numerical value information when the update is selected in the update lottery process (a function of executing the processes of step S3112 and step S3113 in the production side MPU 92). ,
A gaming machine according to feature E5, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic E6, it is possible to irregularly update the notification target information in order to bring it closer to the actual profit corresponding numerical information. Further, the update lottery process is executed on condition that the notification target information does not match the actual profit corresponding numerical value information, and the update of the notification target information is performed so as to approach the actual profit corresponding numerical value information. Even if the target information is updated irregularly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the notification target information eventually does not match the actual profit corresponding numerical value information.

Feature E7. The variable state is a state that continues over the upper limit number of games defined as a plurality of games,
In the variable state, the profit corresponding numerical information can be higher than before, but not lower than before.
When the notification target information is updated so as to approach the actual profit corresponding numerical value information, the update is performed so that only the unit numerical value increases per game.
In the situation where the notification means is a value obtained by integrating the number of remaining games in the variable state and the unit numerical value is equal to or less than the difference between the maximum value of the profit corresponding numerical value information and the value corresponding to the notification target information. In a situation where the profit corresponding numerical information corresponding to the notification target information does not match the actual profit corresponding numerical information, the notification is performed so that the value corresponding to the notification target information increases by the unit numerical value. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, which is characterized by updating target information.

According to the feature E7, even when the profit corresponding numerical value information is the maximum value, only the unit numerical value is increased per game when the notification target information is updated, and the profitable numerical value information is changed. It is possible to match the notification target information with the actual profit corresponding numerical information within the range.

It should be noted that features A1 to A31, features B1 to B21, features C1 to C18, features D1 to D24, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to the configurations of the features E1 to E7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Predetermined privilege granting means (main MPU 82) that executes a process for granting a predetermined privilege to the player based on the occurrence of a specific trigger (operation of the first credit insertion button 47) in the specific game state (addition execution state). Function for executing the processing of steps S3009 and S3010 in step S3010),
When the specific trigger occurs, the continuous lottery process is performed at a specific continuation rate, and when the continuous winning result is obtained, the continuation determining means (the process of steps S3012 to S3014 in the main MPU 82 is executed is continued. Function),
Midway termination means (a function of making a positive determination in step S3007 in the main MPU 82) for terminating the specific game state on the way based on a cancel operation performed by the player,
When the specific game state is ended midway by the midway ending means, in addition to the predetermined privilege that has been granted by the time the cancel operation is performed, a bonus (compensation game number) for midway termination is provided to the player. Midway end giving means (function for executing the processing of steps S3015 to S3017 in the main MPU 82),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, it is possible to end the specific game state on the way, so that it is possible to meet the demand of the player who wants to end the specific game state early. In addition, when the specific game state is ended midway, in addition to the predetermined privilege that was given by the time the cancel operation is performed, a special mid-term end benefit is granted, so for example, you may accidentally cancel the operation. It is possible to give a relief measure to the player who has ended up regarding the award. In particular, not only the benefits for mid-term termination but also the specified benefits that have been granted by the time the cancel operation is performed, so that the specific trigger that occurs before the cancel operation is not wasted. Is possible.

Feature F2. Target setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S2906 to S2909 in the main MPU 82) that sets the profit corresponding information to be executed among the plurality of kinds of profit corresponding information that determines the award mode of the privilege in the specific game state. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the midway end giving means gives the halfway ending benefit in a mode according to the profit correspondence information set by the target setting means.

According to the feature F2, the privilege corresponding to the halfway end is given with the content corresponding to the profit corresponding information. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the manner of granting the privilege for ending the process.

Feature F3. A continuation rate setting means for setting the specific continuation rate in the specific gaming state from a plurality of types of continuation rates (function of executing the processing of steps S2906 to S2909 in the main MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the midway end granting means grants the privilege corresponding to the midway end in a mode according to the specific continuation rate set by the continuation rate setting means.

According to the feature F3, the privilege corresponding to the halfway end is given with the content corresponding to the specific continuation rate. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the manner of granting the privilege for ending the process.

Feature F4. The halfway end giving means gives a benefit that is more disadvantageous than the expected value of the benefit content derived from the relationship between the content of the predetermined benefit and the specific continuation rate, as the benefit for handling the end of operation. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F3.

According to the feature F4, it is advantageous for the player not to perform the cancel operation, so that it is possible to reduce the frequency of performing the cancel operation in the specific game state.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features F1 to F4, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The correspondence executing means wins a predetermined correspondence combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern has become the predetermined mode, executes the predetermined correspondence execution. Means (function of executing the processes of step S1303, step S2710 to step S2723, step S2815, step S3020, step S3305, step S3311 and step S3312 in the main MPU 82, the winning determination process and the medium grant process in the payout MPU 86) Function),
The gaming machine is
A predetermined display means (stop order notification device 71) displaceably provided;
Displacement control means for displacing the predetermined display means so as to be in a predetermined arrangement state (arrangement state at the notification time position) (function for executing the processing of step S1506, step S1622 and step S1627 in the production side MPU 92),
In the predetermined display means in the predetermined arrangement state, a predetermined notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved when the predetermined corresponding combination is won. A predetermined notification control unit to be executed (a function of executing the process of step S3606 and step S3612 in the effect MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, a predetermined notification that is one of a notification corresponding to a predetermined mode and a notification corresponding to a mode not to be a predetermined mode is executed when a predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. By doing so, the player who confirms the predetermined notification can set the stop operation mode to the predetermined mode or not, and execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination or correspond to the predetermined corresponding combination. It is possible not to execute the control to perform. In the configuration, the predetermined notification as described above is executed in a situation where the predetermined displaceable display means is in the predetermined arrangement state. This makes it possible to cause a difference between the situation in which the predetermined notification is executed and the situation in which the predetermined notification is not executed even by a physical movement such as a change in the arrangement state of the predetermined display means, which gives the player unexpectedness. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, by performing the predetermined notification in a situation where the predetermined display means is displaced and is in the predetermined arrangement state, it is possible to increase the attention degree to the predetermined notification by causing the player to pay attention to the predetermined display means. Becomes

In the configuration of the above feature G1,
"The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of pattern display regions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The picture display control means controls the picture display means such that the variable display of the picture in the picture display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
The predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring are that variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined corresponding order."
The configuration may be applied.

Features G2. The displacement control means is capable of displacing the predetermined display means so as to be in a specific arrangement state (initial state arrangement state) different from the predetermined arrangement state,
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the predetermined notification control means does not execute the predetermined notification on the predetermined display means in the specific arrangement state.

According to the characteristic G2, the predetermined display means executes the predetermined notification in the predetermined arrangement state, and does not execute the predetermined notification in the specific arrangement state. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the situation in which the predetermined notification is performed on the predetermined display means and the situation in which the predetermined notification is not performed, in the arrangement state of the predetermined display means.

Features G3. A specific display means (image display device 67) provided separately from the predetermined display means,
A specific notification control unit that causes the specific display unit to execute a specific notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the winning combination is won. A function of executing the processing of step S3603 and step S3605 in the MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G3, the notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode is performed not only on the predetermined display means but also on the specific display means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the location where the notification is performed, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the notification is performed from becoming uniform.

Features G4. The specific notification control means,
A means for executing the specific notification by the specific display means in a situation where the predetermined notification is not executed by the predetermined display means (a function of executing the process of step S3603 in the performance side MPU 92);
Means for causing the specific display means to execute the specific notification in a situation where the predetermined notification is executed on the predetermined display means (function for executing the process of step S3605 in the production side MPU 92);
The gaming machine described in the feature G3, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic G4, the notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring when the predetermined corresponding combination is won is the specific display of the predetermined display unit and the specific display unit. There are situations that are performed only by the means and situations that are performed by both the predetermined display means and the specific display means. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the notification in a manner suitable for each situation.

Features G5. The gaming machine according to the feature G3 or G4, which is not provided with a device for displacing the specific display device.

According to the characteristic G5, the predetermined display unit and the specific unit are provided as the display unit for executing the notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won. In the structure provided with the display means, the predetermined display means is provided so as to be displaceable, whereas the specific display means is provided so as not to be displaceable. As a result, it is possible to provide a clear difference in the presence or absence of physical movement between the predetermined display means and the specific display means.

Features G6. The predetermined arrangement state is a state in which the predetermined display means faces the display area of the specific display means from a side facing the display area, according to any one of features G3 to G5. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic G6, the predetermined display means executes the predetermined notification in a state where the predetermined display means faces the display area of the specific display means. Thereby, in a situation where the predetermined notification is executed on the predetermined display means, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the predetermined display means rather than the specific display means. Further, in the configuration in which the specific display means is arranged at a position that is easily visible to the player, it is possible to execute the predetermined notification while the predetermined display means is arranged at the position that is easily visible. This makes it possible to enhance the visibility of the predetermined notification. Further, since it is not necessary for the player to shift the line of sight between when the specific notification is confirmed on the specific display means and when the predetermined notification is confirmed on the predetermined display means, it is possible to improve the visibility.

Features G7. In the displacement control means, the predetermined display means does not face the display area of the specific display means, or the range in which the predetermined display means faces the display area of the specific display means from the side facing the display area is predetermined. It is possible to displace the specific display means such that the specific display state becomes narrower than the case of the arrangement state,
The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the predetermined notification control means does not execute the predetermined notification on the predetermined display means in the specific arrangement state.

According to the characteristic G7, since the predetermined notification is not executed on the predetermined display means in the specific arrangement state, it is possible to fix the arrangement state of the predetermined display means when the predetermined notification is executed. This makes it possible to enhance the visibility of the predetermined notification.

Features G8. The predetermined arrangement state is a state in which the predetermined display means faces the display area of the specific display means from the side facing the display area,
The specific notification control means causes the specific display means to execute the specific notification when the specific display means executes the specific notification (step S3605 in the production-side MPU 92). The game machine according to any one of features G3 to G7, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the processing of.

According to the characteristic G8, a situation occurs in which the predetermined display means or the structure for displacing the predetermined display means fails and the predetermined display means does not execute the predetermined notification, or the predetermined display means does not enter the predetermined arrangement state. Even in this case, the specific notification is executed by the specific display means. Therefore, even if the failure as described above occurs, the player is notified of any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being set when the predetermined support combination is won. Can be provided to.

Features G9. When the predetermined notification is executed on the predetermined display means, the predetermined arrangement response means is in an area facing the predetermined display means when the predetermined arrangement state is in the display area of the specific display means. The gaming machine according to feature G8, characterized in that the specific notification is executed.

According to the feature G9, when the predetermined display means is in the predetermined arrangement state and the predetermined notification is executed by the predetermined display means, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the specific notification on the specific display means. Thus, in a configuration in which the specific notification is executed by the specific display unit even in a situation where the predetermined notification is executed by the predetermined display unit in the predetermined arrangement state, the player's attention to the predetermined notification is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature G10. The predetermined layout responding means uses the control information used for executing the specific notification by the specific display means in a situation where the predetermined display means is not in the predetermined layout state, and the predetermined display means The gaming machine according to the feature G8 or G9, characterized in that the specific notification is executed by the specific display means in a state where the predetermined arrangement state is set.

According to the characteristic G10, in the configuration in which the specific notification is executed by the specific display means regardless of whether the predetermined display means is in the predetermined arrangement state or the predetermined display means is not in the predetermined arrangement state. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the amount of information required to execute the specific notification.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic A group, the characteristic B group, the characteristic C group, the characteristic D group, the characteristic E group, the characteristic F group, and the characteristic G group, the following problems can be solved. Is.

2. Description of the Related Art As a kind of gaming machine, a slot machine, a gaming machine or the like capable of playing a game similar to a slot machine by using a game ball instead of a medal as a game medium are known. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is a general configuration that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery processing of the winning combination. Further, when the lottery processing of the winning combination is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The correspondence executing means wins a predetermined correspondence combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern has become the predetermined mode, executes the predetermined correspondence execution. Means (function of executing the processing of step S1304, step S1409, step S1410, step S1512, step S1606, step S1607, step S1610 and step S1611 in the main MPU 82),
The gaming machine is
A first control means (main side MPU 82) having the role lottery means,
A first notification means (special display section 63) controlled by the first control means,
Second control means (production side MPU 92) for controlling the second notification means (image display device 67) so that the notification is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means makes a first notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. A first notification control unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S3403, S3407, S3412, S3506, and S3512 in the main MPU 82) for controlling the first notification unit so that
The second control means is a target of the first notification in the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. A second notification control means (a function of executing the processing of step S3603 and step S3605 in the production side MPU 92) that controls the second notification means so that the second notification corresponding to the aspect is executed is provided. And the gaming machine.

According to the feature H1, when the winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the notification corresponding to the predetermined mode or the notification corresponding to the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being performed is executed. It is possible for the player who confirms that the stop operation mode is the predetermined mode or not, and it is possible to execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination or not execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination. Becomes In this configuration, the second notification is executed by the second notification means based on the control of the second control means when the predetermined corresponding combination is won, so that the player's attention to the second notification can be increased. Even if the processing load for causing the second notifying means to execute the notification is increased in order to increase it, it is possible to prevent the influence thereof from affecting the first control means.

However, in the configuration in which the second notification means executes the second notification based on the control of the second control means, with respect to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means and the second control means. It is conceivable that an act of fraudulently trying to obtain profit while improperly performing the second notice by the second notifying means by giving fraud. In this case, it is assumed that it is difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed due to the second notification being executed by the second notification means.

On the other hand, not only the second notification is performed by the second notification means controlled by the second control means, but also the first notification is performed by the first notification means directly controlled by the first control means. Be seen. Thus, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, it is visually confirmed whether or not the first notification is also executed by the first notification means, so that the above-mentioned misconduct is performed. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is.

As described above, it is possible to preferably perform the control for executing the notification of the stop mode.

In addition, in the configuration of the above feature H1,
"The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of pattern display regions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The picture display control means controls the picture display means such that the variable display of the picture in the picture display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
The predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring are that variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined corresponding order."
The configuration may be applied.

Features H2. The first notification control means prevents the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination from being executed by the first notification means when the predetermined corresponding combination is not won in the lottery processing of the winning combination. The gaming machine described in the characteristic H1.

According to the feature H2, when the predetermined corresponding winning combination is not won, the first notifying means does not execute the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, thereby clarifying the role of the first notifying means. It becomes possible to do.

Features H3. Characteristic H1 or H2 characterized in that the first notification control means causes the first notification means to execute the first notification when the second notification means executes the second notification. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic H3, when the second notifying means is executing the second notification, the first notifying means executes the first notification. Therefore, the second notifying means executes the second notification. It is possible to check whether or not the notification is valid each time the second notification is executed.

Features H4. The first notification control means allows the player to understand the contents of the stop operation mode in which the first notification in the first notification means is the notification target rather than the second notification in the second notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H3, characterized in that the gaming machine is in a difficult mode.

According to the feature H4, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second notifying means in the configuration in which both the first notifying means and the second notifying means are provided. As a result, even if the notification mode of the first notification means is simplified, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Features H5. The display range of the first notification means is narrower than the display range of the second notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4.

According to the feature H5, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second notifying means in the configuration in which both the first notifying means and the second notifying means are provided. As a result, even if the notification mode of the first notification means is simplified, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Features H6. The first control means transmits the predetermined information that enables the second notification means to execute the second notification (step S3404, step S3408, step S3413, step S3507 and step in the main MPU 82). Function for executing the processing of S3513),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the predetermined information does not include the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

According to Feature H6, even if the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is illegally accessed and the predetermined information is illegally acquired, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination will be grasped from the predetermined information. It becomes possible to prohibit. As a result, it is possible to substantially invalidate the fraudulent activity caused by acquiring the predetermined information.

Features H7. The first control means is
It is determined whether or not to execute the notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. Deciding means (a function of executing steps S3401 to S3402, steps S3405 to S3406, steps S3409 to S3411, step S3504 to step S3505, and steps S3510 to S3511 in the main MPU 82),
A transmitting unit that transmits predetermined information when the determining unit determines to execute the notification (a function of executing the processes of steps S3404, S3408, S3413, S3507, and S3513 in the main MPU 82);
Equipped with
The first notification control means controls the first notification means so that the first notification is executed based on the fact that the determination means determines to execute the notification,
Features H1 to H6 characterized in that the second notification control means controls the second notification means so that the second notification is executed based on that the transmission means has transmitted the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature H7, the first control means collectively executes the determination of whether to execute the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means. This makes it possible to execute the first notification when the second notification is executed, without performing bidirectional communication between the first control means and the second control means. ..

Features H8. There are a plurality of types of the predetermined corresponding roles, with different contents of the predetermined mode for executing the control corresponding to the predetermined combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the first notification control means causes the first notification to be executed in a mode corresponding to the type of the predetermined corresponding combination.

According to the feature H8, even if a plurality of types of predetermined corresponding combinations are present, by confirming the content of the first notification by the first notification means, the content of the notification corresponding to the current game time can be grasped. Is possible.

Feature H9. The first notification control means allows the player to recognize the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. In a situation where the notification is not executed by the second notification means, the notification that enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being performed is not executed by the first notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H8.

According to the characteristic H9, the first notification means executes the notification that allows the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being performed, although the second notification means has not executed the notification. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature H10. The second notification control means executes a notification that allows the player to recognize the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from becoming the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. A means for controlling the second notification means (a function for executing the process of step S3609 in the performance side MPU 92) so that special notification is executed, although not performed,
The first notification control means does not become the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination and the special notification is executed by the second notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that the notification for allowing the player to recognize the mode for doing so is not executed in the first notification means.

According to the characteristic H10, the predetermined mode and the mode for avoiding the predetermined mode are not executed so that the player can recognize the predetermined mode, but the special mode is executed in the second notification means, and the special mode is executed. It is possible to prevent the first notification means from executing the notification that allows the player to recognize the mode for preventing the predetermined mode.

Feature H11. In the case where the predetermined notification combination is won in the combination lottery process and the special notification is executed by the second notification unit, the first notification control unit executes the notification corresponding to the situation. The gaming machine according to Feature H10, characterized in that the first notifying unit is controlled as described above.

According to the feature H11, even when the special notification is executed by the second notification unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special notification is valid by checking the first notification unit. Become.

Features H12. When both the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means are executed, the first notification means starts the first notification, and then the first notification is started. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the second notification is started by the two notification means.

According to the feature H12, it is possible to confirm whether or not the second notification is valid by confirming the first notification means at the timing when the second notification is started by the second notification means. Become.

Features H13. When the variable display of the pattern is started, a means for invalidating the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern for a predetermined period from the start timing (function of executing the process of step S906 in the payout side MPU 86) ),
The first notification control means starts the first notification by the first notification means at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period has elapsed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. And then
The second notification control means notifies the second notification at a timing after the predetermined timing and before the predetermined period elapses when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature H12, wherein the gaming machine is started by the second notification means.

According to the characteristic H13, even if the second notification is started after the timing when the first notification is started, it is possible to start the second notification during the invalid period of the stop operation. The content of the second notification can be made to be recognized by the player before the stop operation is validated.

Features H14. When both the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means are executed, the first notification is performed at a timing after the timing at which the second notification ends in the second notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H13, characterized in that the first notification is terminated in the notification means.

According to the feature H14, the first notification does not end before the second notification ends, so it is possible to increase the chances of confirming whether the second notification is legitimate. Become.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features H1 to H14, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The correspondence executing means wins a predetermined correspondence combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern has become the predetermined mode, executes the predetermined correspondence execution. Means (function of executing the processes of step S1303, step S2710 to step S2723, step S2815, step S3020, step S3305, step S3311 and step S3312 in the main MPU 82, the winning determination process and the medium grant process in the payout MPU 86) Function),
The gaming machine is
A first control means (main side MPU 82) having the role lottery means,
A first notification means (special display section 63) controlled by the first control means,
Second control means (production side MPU 92) for controlling the second notification means (image display device 67) so that the notification is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means makes a first notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. A first notification control unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S3403, S3407, S3412, S3506, and S3512 in the main MPU 82) for controlling the first notification unit so that
The second control means is a target of the first notification in the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. A second notification control unit (a function for executing the processing of step S3603 and step S3605 in the production-side MPU 92) that controls the second notification unit so that the second notification corresponding to the aspect is executed,
When both the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means are executed, the first notification means starts the first notification, and then the first notification is started. A game machine characterized in that the second notification is started by the two notification means.

According to the characteristic I1, when the winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the notification corresponding to the predetermined mode or the notification corresponding to the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being performed is executed. It is possible for the player who confirms that the stop operation mode is the predetermined mode or not, and it is possible to execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination or not execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination. Becomes In this configuration, the second notification is executed by the second notification means based on the control of the second control means when the predetermined corresponding combination is won, so that the player's attention to the second notification can be increased. Even if the processing load for causing the second notifying means to execute the notification is increased in order to increase it, it is possible to prevent the influence thereof from affecting the first control means.

However, in the configuration in which the second notification means executes the second notification based on the control of the second control means, with respect to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means and the second control means. It is conceivable that an act of fraudulently trying to obtain profit while improperly performing the second notice by the second notifying means by giving fraud. In this case, it is assumed that it is difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed due to the second notification being executed by the second notification means.

On the other hand, not only the second notification is performed by the second notification means controlled by the second control means, but also the first notification is performed by the first notification means directly controlled by the first control means. Be seen. Thus, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, it is visually confirmed whether or not the first notification is also executed by the first notification means, so that the above-mentioned misconduct is performed. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is.

The second notification means starts the second notification at a timing after the timing at which the first notification is started by the first notification means. Accordingly, by confirming the first notifying means at the timing when the second notifying means starts the second notifying means, it becomes possible to confirm whether or not the second notifying is authentic.

As described above, it is possible to preferably perform the control for executing the notification of the stop mode.

Feature I2. When the variable display of the pattern is started, a means for invalidating the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern for a predetermined period from the start timing (function of executing the process of step S906 in the payout side MPU 86) ),
The first notification control means starts the first notification by the first notification means at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period has elapsed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. And then
The second notification control means notifies the second notification at a timing after the predetermined timing and before the predetermined period elapses when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination. The game machine according to feature I1, wherein the game machine is started by the second notification means.

According to the characteristic I2, even if the second notification is started after the timing when the first notification is started, it is possible to start the second notification during the invalid period of the stop operation. The content of the second notification can be made to be recognized by the player before the stop operation is validated.

Feature I3. When both the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means are executed, the first notification is performed at a timing after the timing at which the second notification ends in the second notification means. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that the first notification is terminated in the notification means.

According to the feature I3, the first notification does not end before the second notification ends, so that it is possible to increase the opportunity to confirm whether or not the second notification is legitimate. Become.

Feature I4. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The correspondence executing means wins a predetermined correspondence combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern has become the predetermined mode, executes the predetermined correspondence execution. Means (function of executing the processes of step S1303, step S2710 to step S2723, step S2815, step S3020, step S3305, step S3311 and step S3312 in the main MPU 82, the winning determination process and the medium grant process in the payout MPU 86) Function),
The gaming machine is
A first control means (main side MPU 82) having the role lottery means,
A first notification means (special display section 63) controlled by the first control means,
Second control means (production side MPU 92) for controlling the second notification means (image display device 67) so that the notification is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means makes a first notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. A first notification control unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S3403, S3407, S3412, S3506, and S3512 in the main MPU 82) for controlling the first notification unit so that
The second control means is a target of the first notification in the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. A second notification control unit (a function for executing the processing of step S3603 and step S3605 in the production-side MPU 92) that controls the second notification unit so that the second notification corresponding to the aspect is executed,
When both the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means are executed, the first notification is performed at a timing after the timing at which the second notification ends in the second notification means. A game machine characterized in that the first notification ends in the notification means.

According to the feature I4, when the winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the notification corresponding to the predetermined mode or the notification corresponding to the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being performed is executed, and thus the notification is given. It is possible for the player who confirms that the stop operation mode is the predetermined mode or not, and it is possible to execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination or not execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination. Becomes In this configuration, the second notification is executed by the second notification means based on the control of the second control means when the predetermined corresponding combination is won, so that the player's attention to the second notification can be increased. Even if the processing load for causing the second notifying means to execute the notification is increased in order to increase it, it is possible to prevent the influence thereof from affecting the first control means.

However, in the configuration in which the second notification means executes the second notification based on the control of the second control means, with respect to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means and the second control means. It is conceivable that an act of fraudulently trying to obtain profit while improperly performing the second notice by the second notifying means by giving fraud. In this case, it is assumed that it is difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed due to the second notification being executed by the second notification means.

On the other hand, not only the second notification is performed by the second notification means controlled by the second control means, but also the first notification is performed by the first notification means directly controlled by the first control means. Be seen. Thus, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, it is visually confirmed whether or not the first notification is also executed by the first notification means, so that the above-mentioned misconduct is performed. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is.

Further, the first notification ends in the first notification means at a timing after the timing when the second notification ends in the second notification means. As a result, the first notification does not end before the second notification ends, so it is possible to increase the chances of confirming whether or not the second notification is legitimate.

As described above, it is possible to preferably perform the control for executing the notification of the stop mode.

In addition, in the configuration of the above characteristic I1 or I4,
"The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of pattern display regions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The picture display control means controls the picture display means such that the variable display of the picture in the picture display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
The predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring are that variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined corresponding order."
The configuration may be applied.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features I1 to I4, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The correspondence executing means wins a predetermined correspondence combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern has become the predetermined mode, executes the predetermined correspondence execution. Means (function of executing the processes of step S1303, step S2710 to step S2723, step S2815, step S3020, step S3305, step S3311 and step S3312 in the main MPU 82, the winning determination process and the medium grant process in the payout MPU 86) Function),
The gaming machine is
A first control means (main side MPU 82) having the role lottery means,
A first notification means (special display section 63) controlled by the first control means,
Second control means (production side MPU 92) for controlling the second notification means (image display device 67) so that the notification is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means makes a first notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. A first notification control unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S3403, S3407, S3412, S3506, and S3512 in the main MPU 82) for controlling the first notification unit so that
The second control means is a target of the first notification in the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. A second notification control unit (a function for executing the processing of step S3603 and step S3605 in the production-side MPU 92) that controls the second notification unit so that the second notification corresponding to the aspect is executed,
The first notification control means enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved in the case where the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. In a situation where the notification is not executed by the second notification means, the notification that enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being performed is not executed by the first notification means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature J1, when a winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, a notification corresponding to a predetermined mode or a notification corresponding to a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being performed is executed, and the notification is performed. It is possible for the player who confirms that the stop operation mode is the predetermined mode or not, and it is possible to execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination or not execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination. Becomes In this configuration, the second notification is executed by the second notification means based on the control of the second control means when the predetermined corresponding combination is won, so that the player's attention to the second notification can be increased. Even if the processing load for causing the second notifying means to execute the notification is increased in order to increase it, it is possible to prevent the influence thereof from affecting the first control means.

However, in the configuration in which the second notification means executes the second notification based on the control of the second control means, with respect to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means and the second control means. It is conceivable that an act of fraudulently trying to obtain profit while improperly performing the second notice by the second notifying means by giving fraud. In this case, it is assumed that it is difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed due to the second notification being executed by the second notification means.

On the other hand, not only the second notification is performed by the second notification means controlled by the second control means, but also the first notification is performed by the first notification means directly controlled by the first control means. Be seen. Thus, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, it is visually confirmed whether or not the first notification is also executed by the first notification means, so that the above-mentioned misconduct is performed. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is.

In addition, the notification that enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the mode for avoiding the predetermined mode is not executed by the first notification means even though the notification is not executed by the second notification means. It becomes possible to do.

As described above, it is possible to preferably perform the control for executing the notification of the stop mode.

Features J2. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Means (function of executing corresponding processing at the time of game termination in the main MPU 82, function of executing medium addition processing in the payout MPU 86),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The correspondence executing means wins a predetermined correspondence combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern has become the predetermined mode, executes the predetermined correspondence execution. Means (function of executing the processes of step S1303, step S2710 to step S2723, step S2815, step S3020, step S3305, step S3311 and step S3312 in the main MPU 82, the winning determination process and the medium grant process in the payout MPU 86) Function),
The gaming machine is
A first control means (main side MPU 82) having the role lottery means,
A first notification means (special display section 63) controlled by the first control means,
Second control means (production side MPU 92) for controlling the second notification means (image display device 67) so that the notification is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means makes a first notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being achieved when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. A first notification control unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S3403, S3407, S3412, S3506, and S3512 in the main MPU 82) for controlling the first notification unit so that
The second control means is a target of the first notification in the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. A second notification control unit (a function for executing the processing of step S3603 and step S3605 in the production-side MPU 92) that controls the second notification unit so that the second notification corresponding to the aspect is executed,
The second notification control means executes a notification that allows the player to recognize the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from becoming the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. A means for controlling the second notification means (a function for executing the process of step S3609 in the performance side MPU 92) so that special notification is executed, although not performed,
The first notification control means does not become the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination and the special notification is executed by the second notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that the notification for allowing the player to recognize the mode for doing so is not executed in the first notifying means.

According to the feature J2, when the winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, the notification corresponding to the predetermined mode or the notification corresponding to the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being performed is executed. It is possible for the player who confirms that the stop operation mode is the predetermined mode or not, and it is possible to execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination or not execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination. Becomes In this configuration, the second notification is executed by the second notification means based on the control of the second control means when the predetermined corresponding combination is won, so that the player's attention to the second notification can be increased. Even if the processing load for causing the second notifying means to execute the notification is increased in order to increase it, it is possible to prevent the influence thereof from affecting the first control means.

However, in the configuration in which the second notification means executes the second notification based on the control of the second control means, with respect to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means and the second control means. It is conceivable that an act of fraudulently trying to obtain profit while improperly performing the second notice by the second notifying means by giving fraud. In this case, it is assumed that it is difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed due to the second notification being executed by the second notification means.

On the other hand, not only the second notification is performed by the second notification means controlled by the second control means, but also the first notification is performed by the first notification means directly controlled by the first control means. Be seen. Thus, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, it is visually confirmed whether or not the first notification is also executed by the first notification means, so that the above-mentioned misconduct is performed. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is.

In addition, the predetermined mode and the mode for avoiding the predetermined mode are not executed, but the special mode is not executed in the situation where the special notification is executed by the second notification means. It is possible to prevent the first notification means from executing the notification that allows the player to recognize the mode for doing so.

As described above, it is possible to preferably perform the control for executing the notification of the stop mode.

In the configuration of the above feature J1 or J2,
"The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of pattern display regions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The picture display control means controls the picture display means such that the variable display of the picture in the picture display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
The predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring are that variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined corresponding order."
The configuration may be applied.

Features J3. In the case where the predetermined notification combination is won in the combination lottery process and the special notification is executed by the second notification unit, the first notification control unit executes the notification corresponding to the situation. The gaming machine according to feature J2, characterized in that the first notifying means is controlled as described above.

According to the feature J3, even when the special notification is executed by the second notification unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special notification is valid by checking the first notification unit. Become.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features J1 to J3, the features A1 to A31, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D24, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic H group, the characteristic I group, and the characteristic J group, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art As a kind of gaming machine, a gaming machine or the like is known which is capable of playing a game similar to a slot machine by using a game ball instead of a medal as a slot machine or a game medium. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is a general configuration that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery processing of the winning combination. Further, when the lottery processing of the winning combination is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

In the gaming machine in which the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop operation on the stop button as described above, it is notified that the reel stop mode is the predetermined mode, and the reel stop operation is performed according to the notification A configuration is known in which the corresponding control is executed. For example, a configuration is known in which the reel stop order is notified, and a predetermined prize is established by stopping the reels in an order according to the notified stop order, and a medal corresponding to the predetermined prize is paid out. There is. Further, the reel stop order is notified, and by stopping the reels in the order according to the notified stop order, a predetermined prize is established, and a transition of the game state corresponding to the predetermined prize occurs. Are known. Such notification of the stop mode is performed by other control means that has received the information from the control means that executes the lottery process of the winning combination, and executes the notification control.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, the control for executing the notification of the stop mode needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 82) that executes a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the payout side MPU 86);
Equipped with
When the winning combination is selected in the lottery process of the winning combination, and the stop result corresponding to the relevant winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the gaming medium is awarded to the player. In gaming machines,
A main control means (main side MPU 82) having the role lottery means,
And a payout control means (payout side MPU 86) for executing control for giving the game medium,
A game machine characterized in that at least the payout control means executes a process necessary for performing variable display of the pattern.

According to the characteristic K1, since the processing required for performing variable display of the picture is executed in the payout control means, at least one of reduction of the processing load of the main control means and reduction of the storage capacity required in the main control means. Can be realized. On the other hand, since the lottery processing of the winning combination is executed by the main control means, the processing for determining the content that influences the result of the game can still be executed by the main control means.

Features K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the payout control means includes the pattern display control means.

According to the characteristic K2, since the payout control unit performs the function of controlling the variable display of the pattern, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control unit.

Features K3. The main control means is provided with a lottery result transmission means (function of executing the processing of step S810 in the main MPU 82) for transmitting information corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination to the payout control means. The game machine according to the feature K1 or K2.

According to the characteristic K3, the information corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is transmitted from the main control means to the payout control means, so that the payout control means performs the processing necessary for performing variable display of the pattern. Even with the configuration, it is possible to control the variable display of the design in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

Features K4. The payout control means is provided with end correspondence transmission means (function of executing the processing of steps S1110 and S1212 in the payout side MPU 86) for transmitting end correspondence information to the main control means after the variable display of the pattern is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3.

According to the characteristic K4, when the variable display of the pattern is finished, the payout control means transmits the end correspondence information, so that the main control means can recognize that the variable display of the pattern is finished.

Features K5. When the stop result of the variable display of the pattern is a result corresponding to the addition of the game medium, the end correspondence transmission means, when the addition of the number of game media corresponding to the stop result is completed, the end correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature K4, which transmits

According to the characteristic K5, the end control information is transmitted when the addition of the game medium is completed, so that the main control means allows the start of the next game time after the completion of the addition of the game medium. Can be executed.

Features K6. The main control means receives the end correspondence information corresponding to that the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed when the winning combination different from the medium granting combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination. In the case of playing, a means for executing a control corresponding to the winning combination (a function for executing a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 82) is provided, and any one of the characteristics K1 to K5 is set forth. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic K6, when a winning that triggers execution of a control different from the game medium grant occurs, the control is performed by the main control means. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load of the payout control means from becoming extremely high.

Features K7. The design display means is provided with a plurality of design display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the design,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The picture display control means controls the picture display means such that the variable display of the picture in the picture display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
The payout control means provides information corresponding to the case where the variable display of the patterns in some of the pattern display areas is stopped even when the variable display of the patterns in all of the pattern display areas is not stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, which is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S912 in the payout MPU 86).

According to the characteristic K7, even if the payout control means has the function of controlling the variable display of the picture, the main control means determines the timing at which the variable display of the picture is stopped in a part of the picture display area. It becomes possible to grasp. This makes it possible for the main control means to perform control corresponding to the timing at which the variable display of patterns is stopped in a part of the pattern display area.

Features K8. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, wherein the payout control means includes a medium number storage means (virtual medal counter 88a) that stores information on the number of virtual game media.

According to the characteristic K8, it is possible to integrate the function of giving the game medium in the payout control means.

Features K9. Betting number setting operation means (credit insertion buttons 47 to 49) that is operated to set the betting number of game times using the information on the number of virtual game media stored in the medium number storage means. ,
Recognition for causing the payout control means to recognize information on the number of the virtual game media necessary for setting the bet amount, based on the operation of the bet number setting operation device. And a means (function of executing the processing of step S610 in the main MPU 82) for transmitting the usage information,
The payout control means,
When the recognition information is received, the number of virtual game media required for setting the bet amount is grasped, and the required number is equal to or less than the number of virtual game media stored in the medium storage means. If there is, the information in the medium number storage means is updated so that the required number is subtracted from the number of virtual game media, and the required number is the number of virtual game media stored in the medium storage means. If the number is greater than the above, an updating unit (a function for executing the process of step S707 in the payout MPU 86) that updates the information in the medium number storage unit so that the number of virtual game media becomes “0”,
Means for transmitting information corresponding to the number of the virtual game media subtracted by the updating by the updating means (function of executing the processing of step S709 in the payout MPU 86),
A gaming machine according to feature K8, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K9, it is possible to set the number of bets using the virtual game medium managed by the payout controller while allowing the main controller to perform the function of setting the number of bets on the game medium. ..

It should be noted that features A1 to A31, features B1 to B21, features C1 to C18, features D1 to D24, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to the configurations of the features K1 to K9. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H14, features I1 to I4, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic group K, it is possible to solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art As a kind of gaming machine, a gaming machine or the like is known which is capable of playing a game similar to a slot machine by using a game ball instead of a medal as a slot machine or a game medium. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is a general configuration that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery processing of the winning combination. Further, when the lottery processing of the winning combination is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. As the grant of the privilege, for example, a game medium is granted.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, various controls need to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating drum type game machines such as slot machines: The rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is responsive to the design after the stop. A gaming machine that gives benefits to.

10... Slot machine, 31... Reel unit, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop button, 47... First credit insertion button, 63... Special display part, 67... Image display device, 71... Stop order notification device, 82 ...Main side MPU, 84b... Trigger point counter, 86... Dispensing side MPU, 92... Performance side MPU, 111... Information storage area.

Claims (2)

A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means that is operated to start variable display of patterns on the pattern display means,
A winning combination lottery means for executing a winning combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means,
Stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means,
The variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. A pattern display control means for controlling the display means,
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Means and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The correspondence executing means wins a predetermined correspondence combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern has become the predetermined mode, executes the predetermined correspondence execution. Equipped with means,
This gaming machine is
First control means having the role lottery means,
A first notification means controlled by the first control means,
Second control means for controlling the second notification means so that the notification display is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Information corresponding to the number of game media given to the player based on the winning results of the game times executed corresponding to the execution of the lottery process of the winning combination, and the game media given to the player based on the winning results. Predetermined display means for displaying game medium information, which is any one of information corresponding to the number of game media available to the player including the number,
Equipped with
The first control means is
First notification control means for controlling the first notification means so that the first notification corresponding to the predetermined mode is executed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the winning combination lottery process,
Setting means for setting a set value corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player in a settable state,
Means for causing the first notification means to execute a display corresponding to the setting value that is the selection target in the setting possible state;
Equipped with
The second control means controls the second notification means so that the second notification corresponding to the predetermined mode is executed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process. Equipped with means,
When both the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means are executed, the first notification is performed at a timing after the timing at which the second notification ends in the second notification means. The notification means is configured to end the first notification,
The first notification means is arranged at a position adjacent to the predetermined display means,
A game machine characterized in that the display range of the first notification means is narrower than the display range of the second notification means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is a slot machine.

Images